· pr e f a ce . t his book is intended to answer two questions, viz (i ) what is the fu ndamental...
TRANSCRIPT
'
T ILE
TEACH NO OF THE VEDAS
WH A T LIGH T D OE S IT T H R OW
ON T H E
ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF
RELIGION ?
MAU R I CE PH ILL I PS
LO N D O N M IS S IO N , M A D R A S
T h e rel igious inst inct shou ld be h onoured even in dark
and confused myster ies-S chellz
'
ng
LON D ON
Ci Ii IE IE IQ AL BI I) (l Cl
A N D N EW YOR K : 1 5 EA ST 1 6th STREET
1895
[A ll righ ts reserved!
PR E F A CE .
T H I S book i s i n t e nded t o an swer two que s t i o n s , viz
(I ) what i s t h e fu n dame n tal t eac h i ng of t h e V edas ?
and (2) what l igh t does t hat t eac h i ng t h row on t h e
origi n and deve lopment of R e l igi o n ?
T h ere i s n o book i n t h e E ngl i s h language gi v i nga popu la r , suc c i n c t , and yet an adequat e , accou n t o f
t h e t each i ng of t h e V edas,t h e o ldest r ecords of th e
Aryan n at i o n s . I t is h ope d , t h e r efore , t hat t h i s
wi l l supp ly a wan t long fe l t a l ike by m i ss i ona r i e s ,
m i n i s t e r s , and all i n t e r est e d i n t h e re l igi ou s h i s t o ryof our fe l low-subjec ts i n I ndia .
Wh e n I began my m i s s i ona ry ca r e e r among t h e
H indus , t h irty-t h r e e yea r s ago ,
I fe l t ke e n ly t hat ,i n order t o b e an effic i e n t worker, a kn ow l edge of t h e
re l igi ou s and specu lat i ve t h ough t of t h e peopl e was
ab so lu t e ly n ec essary . B u t t h ere was n o book ava i l
abl e t ha t c ou ld furn i s h me wi t h su ch kn ow l edge .
I had t o ga t h er i t l i t t l e by l i t t l e ; at fi r s t from t h e
works of l earn e d sp ec ia l i s ts , and aft erwards from
th e s tudy of t h e V e das , by t h e aid of pu ndi t s .
T he re su l t s are embod i e d i n t h i s vo lume .
T he s tudy of Compa rat i ve R e l igi o n , wh i c h has
bee n popu lar o n t h e Con t i n e n t fo r some yea r s , i s
iv PR EFACE .
n ow a t t rac t i ng a t t e n t i o n i n E ngland. I t is im
portan t , t h erefore , t o po i n t ou t t h e bea r i ng of Vedi c
t eac h i ng o n t h e profoundly i n t ere st i ng subje c t of t h e
Or igi n and D eve lopme n t of R e l igi o n i n ge n e ra l . I
have e ndeavou r ed t o do s o i n t h i s vo lume : bu t
s h ou l d my co n c lu s i o n s i n t hat r e sp e c t be d e emed
erron eou s by s ome , t h e va lu e of t h e book ,as an ex
pos i t i o n of Vedi c doc t r i n es,wi l l n ot be dim i n i s h ed
i n t h e l ea s t . And s h ou ld i t s t imu la t e o th ers , wh o
po s se s s l ea r n i ng and l e i su re,t o st udy t h e subjec t
more t h orough ly ,and expose wha t may be d e emed
u n t enabl e,n on e w i l l rejo i c e mo re t han mys e lf.
I mu s t cau t i o n t h e ge n era l reade r aga i n s t conclud
ing t ha t t h e doc tr i n e s of t h e V e da s , as s h own in t h i s
book , co n s t i tu t e wha t is kn own as H i ndu i sm ,or
t h e re l igi o n of I ndia t o-day . H i ndu i sm i s a m i x ture
of co r rup t V ed ic doc t r i n e s and pre-Aryan cu l ts .
Its au t h ori ta t i ve gu i d e s are t h e Mahabhara ta ,
t h e R amayana , t h e Pu ranas , t h e Law B ooks and t h e
Ph i losoph ica l T rea t i s e s . B ut , t o u nde r s tand i t s con
st itu ent e l eme n t s, a kn ow l edge of Ved i c doc t r i n e s
i s i n d i spe n sabl e . S h ou l d l ife and h ea l t h con t i nu e ,
I h ope , i n a sub s equ e n t vo lume , t o t r eat H i ndu i sm
on t h e same p lan as I have t r ea t e d Ve d i sm ,wh en
i t w i l l become appare n t t hat i t is far m ore i r ra t i o na l
and immora l t han t h e r e l igi o n of t h e A ryan s i n t h e
far off V e d i c age .
I h ave n o n ew t h eo ry ,e i t h er abou t t h e l i t e ra ture
PR EFACE .
of t h e V e das , or abou t t h e abo r igi na l h ome of t h e
A ryan s . H e n c e t h e fi r s t c hap t er i s l i t t l e mo re t han
a c omp i lat i o n , —ch iefly from t h e works of P r ofe s so r
Max M ii ller , wh ose O p i n i o n s I a ccep t i n p r e fe re n ce
t o t h o s e of ot h ers .
MA UR ICE PH I LL I PS .
28 Albe rt R oad , London , N
Ist N ov. , 1 894 .
CO N T EN T S .
CH A PT E R I .
T H E L ITERA TUR E OF T H E V EDA S .
PA GE
S anh itas ; or, the Co l lections of the Vedas
A uthors of the Vedas
A ge of the Vedas
Language of the Vedas
Vedas Oral ly T ransmittedGeneral Ch aracter of Vedic L iterature
CH A PT E R I I .
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E V ED A S .
(I) T he N umber o f th e Gods
(2) T he N ature of the Gods
(3) T he Origin of the Vedic Concept God
CH A PT E R III.
T H E COSMOLOGY OF T H E V ED A S .
Vedic Cosmology not one Connected N arrativeCreation th e Work of an Inte l ligent B e ingCreation out of N oth ingCreation from Pre-existing M atterCreation a Phenomenal Emanation from the D e ity
CONTENTS .
CH A PT E R IV .
T H E A N TH ROPOLOGY O F T H E V ED A S .
(I) T h e Origin and D ign ity of M an
(2) T h e Consc iousness of S in
(3 ) Personal Immortal ity
4 T h e Origin and Growth of Caste
CH A PT E R V .
T H E SOTER IOLOGY OF T H E V EDA S .
Prayer and Praise2 S acrifice
(3) T h e S acrificers
(4) T he Origin of S acrifice
(5) M editation and A scetic ism
(6) Retrospect and Conc lusionINDEX
CH A PT E R I .
T H E L IT E RAT U R E O F T H E V E D A S .
N on-Ch r ist ian B i b les are a ll deve lopments in th e wrongdire c t ion . Th ey a ll begin w i th some flash e s o f true l igh t andend in darkness .
— S IR M ON I ER W I LL IAM S .
I . T ize San/Mia'
s or 1726 Co/lerfz’
mzs of Vedas .
The H indu s d iv i de th e i r l i tera tu re into two c lasses :
(I ) S ru t i , wha t they have heard wi th the i r ea rs , or
Reve la t i on ; and (2 ) Smr i t i , wha t thei r fath ers tran s
m itted to them , or Trad i t ion . The former i nc l udes
the Veda s , and th e latte r a ll other books bas ed on
the au thori ty of the Vedas .
1 Th i s d i st i nct i on between
1 Smri’
t‘
i compreh ends all post-V edi c l i teratu re under fou rh eads : six V edangas , viz (I ) S iksh a , th e sc ience of
pronunc iat ion ; (2) Ch andas , me tre ; (3 ) V yakarana , grammar ;(4) N irukta , e xp lanat ion O f V edic words ; (5) jyo tisha ,
ast ronomy ; and (6) Ka lpa , ceremonia l
,inc luding S rau ta-Sutras ,
ru les for app lying th e Mantras and B rahmanas to V ed ic sac r ifices Grya
-Sutras , ru les re lat ing to domesti c righ ts SamayaChari ka-Sutras . ru les re lating to convent iona l u sages : th e lasttwo are ca l led Smarta-Sutras. T h e D arsanas
,systems of
ph i losophy . 3 ? T h e D harma-SuTras , law boo ks su c h as Manu ,
2 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
Reve la t i on and Trad i t i on was made after the ascendancy
of the B rahman s as a cas te , and pr i or to the sch i sm of
Buddha .
The word Veda is der i ved from t he San scr i t 711227 or
vz’
dfi , to know ,and i s the same word as appears i n
th e Greek si’
Sw,La t i n video , and the Engl ish 2017.
Th i s word i s u sed by the H i ndu s to denote fou r collec
t ion s O f sacred books,ca l l ed respect ive ly
,
the R i g-Veda,the Yaj u r-Veda
,th e Sama-Veda
,and the
A tharva—Veda of these the R ig iy eda i s by far the most
comp l e te and i n terest i ng .
“ Thi s,
”as Profes sor M ax
Mul l er says , “ i s the Veda par ex cellence, con ta i n i ng the
rea l theogony O f th e H i ndu s . I t i s d iv i ded (1) i n to ten
manda/as (books), conta i n i ng 10 17 metr ica l hymn s
arranged accord i ng to the i r au thors and th e
gods to whom they are addres sed ; and (2) i n to e igh t
as/zz‘a/eds (e ights) nea r ly equa l i n l ength , each of wh i ch i s
subd iv i ded i n to as many ad/zydyas (l ectu re s), and each Of
the se aga i n i n to abou t th i rty-th ree vargas (sect i on s),u sua l ly con ta i n i ng five verses .
The Yaju r-Veda con s i s t s pr i n c i pa l ly of prayers and
i nvocat i on s app l icab l e to th e con secra t ion Of the u ten s i l s
and ma ter ia l s of sacr ifi c ia l worsh i p . I t has abou t ha l f
the number of hymn s found i n the R i g-Veda,bu t i t s
con tent s are not en t i re ly taken from th e R i g , and i t
O ften comb i n es prose w i th poetry . I t i s d iv ided i n to two
Yajnava l kya,and oth ers , wh ich are supposed to h ave grown out
O f th e Smarta-Sutras. A. T h e It ihasas , viz . : th e two ep ic
poems, th e M ahabarata and Ramayana ; the e igh teen Pu ranas ,
or anc i ent legendary lore ; and th e T antras .
T H E L ITER ATUR E O F T H E VED A S . 3
parts : th e wh i te and the b lack the
former i s attr i bu ted to the sage Yaj nava l kya and the
lat te r to T it tiri .
The Sama-Veda,wh i ch i s on ly abou t ha l f the s i z e of
the Yaj u r , is a col l ect ion of separa te texts,taken a lmost
en t i re ly from th e R i g,to be chanted at part icu la r pa rt s of
the sacr ifi ce .
“ I n th e R i g-Veda we fi nd the ent i re hymn s .
I n the fi rst part of the Sama-Veda we find on ly i so lated
verses of those hymn s,d i s l oca ted from the i r natu ra l
connec t i on,though i n the second part the extrac ts are
connected and of grea ter l ength . H ence M ax Mul l e r
say s , “ These two Vedas , the Yaj u r-Veda and th e
Saima-Veda , were , in tru th , wha t they are ca l l ed i n
the Kau sh itaki-brahmana,th e a t tendants O f the R i g
Veda 2
The hymn s of the A tharva-V eda are near ly as nume rou s
as those of th e R i g ; bu t , wi th the except i on O f a few of
the later hymn s of the R i g , i t has l i t t l e i n common wi th
the other th ree Veda s,which are u sed for perform ing the
prescr i bed sac r ifi ce s ; whereas the A tharva teaches ch iefl y
how to appease , to b l e s s , to cu rse , and to rect i fy wha t has
been wrongly done i n the act of sacr ifice . A s ixth par t
O f i t s conten t s i s i n prose,and abou t one-s i xth of i t s
hymn s are fou nd i n the R i g . Its language and s ty l e
i nd i ca te a later age ,and i t is not men t i oned by many
1 Mu i r ’s S ans . T ex ts, pt . i i . , p . 203 .
2 H ist . A zze. S ans. L it., p . 457.
3 Professor Wh i tney remarks,
“ T he greater port ion of
th em (th e hymns) are p la inly sh own,both by th ei r language
and inte rna l ch arac ter,to be of much late r date than the
4 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VED A S .
anc i en t wri ter s i n connect i on wi th the other three .
1 I t
was probab ly emp l oyed at fi rst i n the r i tua l of a d i fferen t
worsh i p .
Each Veda i s d iv i ded i n to Mant ra s and B rahmanas .
The Man tra s are a co l lec t ion of hymns i n wh i ch the
pra i s es of the god s are sung and th e i r b l ess i n gs i nvoked .
The B rahmanas are trea t i ses wri tten i n prose for the u se
of the B rahman s,and con tai n both the l i tu rg i ca l i n s t i tu tes ,
i n wh i ch the ceremon ia l app l i cat i on of the hymn s i s
pre scr i bed,and the A ranyakas and U pan ishad s , or th e
genera l contents of th e oth e r h istor ic V eda (th e R ig), and eventh an its tenth book
, wi th wh ich th ey yet stand nearly connec tedin impo rt and origin. T h e c ondi t ion of th e text a l so in th ose
passages found l i kewise in th e R ig, po ints as d ist inc tly to a
more recent pe riod as th at of th e i r co l lec tion (Mu i r’s S i ms.
T ex ts,-p t . i i . , p .
1 It is not ment ioned in th e n inth ve rse of th e Pu rush aSukta (R .
-V .,x . ,
ne i th er is i t ment ioned in th e fo l lowingpassages in th e Khandogya
-Upan i sh ad : Prajapat i brooded (ormedi tated upon) th e worlds ; and from th em
,so brooded
,h e
drew forth th e i r e ssenc es : F i re from th e earth,A i r from th e
atmosph ere , th e S un from th e sky. H e brooded on th ese th reede it ies , and from th em , so brooded
,h e drew forth th e i r
essences : R ig-texts from F i re
,Yajush -texts from Ai r , and Sama
texts from th e S un. H e brooded on th is tr ip le sc ience , and
from i t , so brooded, h e drew forth its essences : the partic leB li zZIi from th e R ig
-texts ; B huvah from th e Yaju sh-texts Swar
from the Sama-texts . Manu,i. , 23 , repeats th e account given
in th e Khandogya-Upan ish ad, om i tt ing th e fourth V eda (Mu i r’s
Sans. T ex ts, pt . i i . , p . It is,h oweve r
,ment ioned as a
V eda in anoth er passage of th e same Upa zzisli ad, and a lso inth e S atapa tha-B rahmana (M ax M ii ller
,H ist. A na. S ans . L it.
,
pp . 122 and
T H E L ITERATU R E OF T H E VED A S . 5
theo log ica l d i squ i s i t ion s,i n wh ich the sp i r i tua l asp i ra t i on s
gradua l ly deve loped i n th e m i n ds of the more d evou t of
the I nd ian sages,find express i on . I t i s ev iden t , there
fore,tha t the hymn s are the or i gi na l and the mos t essen
t ia l port i ons of th e Vedas tha t th e B rahmana s rose ou t
of th e hymn s,and a re subserv i en t to the i r emp l oymen t
for th e pu rpose of worsh i p ; wh i l e the U pan i shad s g ive
express i on to specu la t i ve i deas of a sp i r i tua l and myst i ca l
cha racter,wh ich
,though d i scern i b l e i n some of the
hymn s and i n th e o ld er B rahmana s , are much fu rthe r
d eve loped and sy stema t i s ed i n these late r trea t i s e s .
2 . T /1e A id /207 5 of t/ze Vedas .
I t has been th e preva len t be l i e f in I n d ia for cen tu r i es
tha t t he Vedas came not from man,bu t from God. And
though the H ymn s are a scr i bed to va r i ou s R i sh i s ,or sa i n ts , whose names th ey bea r , yet the H indu s
have ma i n ta i n ed for ages,and con t inu e to ma i n ta i n ,
tha t the R i sh i s were on ly “ Seers ,” who i n tu i t i ve ly
saw them,or veh ic l es th rough wh ich they were com
munica ted by d iv ine power . H ence many confl ic t i ng
theor ie s of i n sp i ra t i on have been p ropounded , and many
con trad ic tory scheme s for prov i ng the d iv i ne ori g in of
the Veda s have been se t forth . Accord ing to th e
S atapa tha-B rahmana
,and th e Khandogya
-U pan i shad ,Prajap a t i by brood ing over th e th ree e l emen ts , fi re
,a ir
and the sun, p rodu ced from th em re spect ive ly , the R i g
Yaj u r and Sama-Vedas . T he same ori gi n is a sc r i bed
to them by the lawgiver Manu,who doubt l ess bo rrowed
the i dea from the B rahmana s . H e says tha t B rahma,
6 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E V ED AS .
“ for the performance of sacr ifice , m i l ked ou t from
fi re,from a ir
,and from the sun
,the tr i p l e eterna l Veda
,
d i s t i ngu i shed as R i g,Yaju r
,and Sama I n th e Vi shnu
and Bhagavata-Pu rana s , we are to l d tha t the Vedas were
crea ted by the fou r—faced B rahma from h is severa l mou th s ;whi l e i n the Mahabhara ta th e i r or i g i n i s a scr i bed to the
goddess of wi sdom,Sara sva t i
,who i s denom i nated the
“mother of the Vedas The B rihad-aranyaka-U pan i shad
descr i be s them as th e brea th of B rahma ; and the H ar i
V amsa d ec lare s tha t they were produ ced from the Gaya tr i,
the hol i est verse i n th e Vedas . Accord i ng to the n i n th
verse of the Pu ru sha-Sukta of the R i g-Veda,the fi rst
th ree Veda s were der ived from th e myst ica l v ic t im
Pu ru sha . F rom tha t un iversa l sacr ifice were produced
the hymn s ca l l ed R i g,and Saman
,the metre s and th e
Yajush .
” And accord i ng to the A th arva-Veda both the
R i g and the Yaju sh sp rang from t ime . M ost of the
ph i lo sophers argu e w i th mu ch i ngenu i ty i n favou r of the
superh uman or igi n of th e Vedas ; wh i l e a few go so far
as to deny to them any or igi n , and st renuou s ly ma i n ta i n
tha t they have a lways exi sted .
These confl i ct i ng accou nts of the orig i n of the Veda s
c l ear ly show tha t th e be l i ef i n a Book-Reve la t i on i s deep ly
rooted in the re l ig iou s con sc i ou sness of the H i n du s .
S trange to say , however , th ere is bu t l i tt l e in the hymns
themse l ve s to warran t su ch a be l i ef. “ The R i sh i s,
”a s
an anc i en t H i n du au tho r remarks,
“ des i r i ng var iou s
obj ect s , ha stened to th e gods wi th metr i ca l prayers .
”
They represen t them selve s and the i r forefa thers for
they d i st i ngu ish between anc i en t and modern R i sh i s
T H E L ITE RAT UR E OF T H E VEDA S . 7
and between o l d and new hymns— as th e “makers,
” “fabr ica tors and “
genera tors of th e hymn s .
“ These you r
anc i en t exp l o i t s,O Asv ins
,our fa thers have dec lared Le t
u s who are strong i n bold men , vi a/sing a hymn for you ,O
bount i fu l gods ! u tter our offer i ng of pra i se .
” 1 Seek i ng
heaven,th e Ku sikas have made a hymn to thee
,O
I ndra ” 2 “ Thu s have we made a p rayer for I ndra,the
product ive , the v igorou s , as the B h rigu s made a car.
” 3
An acceptab l e and honorific hymn has been u t tered to
I ndra by B rihaduktha , maker of prayers .” “ Thu s
,O
hero,hath Gritsamada
, des i r i n g su ccou r, fas/zioned for thee
a hymn,as men make road s .
” 5 “ To th i s grea t hero,
v igorou s,energet ic
,th e adorab le , unshaken thunderer
,
I have wi th my mou th faér z’
ea/ed cop i ou s and p lea s i ng
prayers,wh i ch had never before ex isted .
” G “ Agn i,do
thou thr ive through th i s ou r p rayer , wh ich we ma/ee
accord i ng to ou r ab i l i ty , accord i ng to ou r knowl edge ; do
thou , therefore , l ead u s to opu l en ce , and endow u s with
r i ght u nderstand i ng, secu r i n g food .
” 7 Th is hymn,
A sv i n s , we have made for you ; we have faérz’
ea ted i t as
the B hrigu s con stru cted a car ; we have decora ted i t as
a br i de for her hu sband , cont i n u i ng th e seri es of our
pra i ses l i ke an unbroken l i n e of descen dan ts . I nd ra,
the w i se R ish i s , both anc i en t and modern,have genera /ed
prayers . Ayasya ,fr i end of a ll men
,cel ebra t i ng
1 R .-V . , i. , 1 17 , 2 5 . Ibid. ,
i i i ., 3 0 , 20 .
3 Ibid . , iv . ,
4 Ibid. , x. , 54 , 6 .
5 Ibid.,i i . , 1 9 , 8 .
6 Ibid ., v i . , 3 2 , 1 .
Ibid. ,i. , 3 1 , 1 8.
8 Ibid . , x. , 39 , 14 .
9 Ibid.
, v i i . , 2 , 29 .
8 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE D A S .
I ndra ,ha th genera ted the fou rth song of pra i se .
F rom the sacred ce remony I sead for t/z a prayer i s su i ng
from my m i n d .
” 2
B u t though the anc i en t R i sh i s know noth i ng of the
art ific ia l theor i e s of in sp i ra t i on wh ich have been ela
bora ted i n later t imes,
and though they genera l ly
represen t th emse lves or th e i r ance s tors as the au thors
of the hymn s,yet i t mu s t not be over looked that they were
not a l together u ncon sc i ou s of h igher i nfluences . Some
of them seem to have h ad a vagu e i dea tha t they
were in sp i red by the god s , and hence speak of the i r
prayers as“ divine u tterances ,
’ “ hymn s generated bythe gods ”
. One S peaks of h i s prayer a s“ god
3 Another says,
“ F rom no othergiven ”
(de-eada tta zi z).
bu t you (O I ndra and Agn i !) do I der ive i n te l l i gence”
;
and another,
“ O I n dra ! gladden me ; decree l i fe for me ;
s/za 7p ei z my [fi le/lef t , l i ke the edge of an i ron i n strumen t .
Wha tever I,longi ng for thee
,now u tter , do thou accept ;
give m e d iv i ne protec t ion .
4 Gotama pray s,Approach
and l isten to ou r prayers ,M aghavan ; s i nce thou ha s t
i n sp i red u s wi th tru e speech , thou art sol ic i ted wi th i t
A nd Vak , th e goddess of speech,says
,
“ By sac r ifi ce
they fo l l owed the pa th of Vak ; th ey found her res i d i ng
i n the R i sh i s ”.
6 I ndra and Varuna ,I have seen
th rough devot ion , tha t wh ich ye formerly gave to the
R ish i s , wisdom ,unders tand i ng of speech
,sacred lore
,
1 R .-V .
,x .
, 67, 1 . Ibid.
,v i i i . , 1 3 , 26.
3 Ibid .,i i i .
, 3 7 , 4 ; iv .
,1 1 , 3 .
4 Ibid .
,v i . , 47, 10 .
5 Ibid.
,i .,
1 . Ibid . , x .
, 71 , 3 .
IO T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE D A S .
Rome 1 when i nvok i ng the Mu ses to a ss i st them i n the
compos i t ion of the i r songs ; bu t i t was probab ly the germ
from wh i ch the presen t doc tr i ne of i n sp i ra t i on grew .
The au thors of the Vedas were from the Ksha t r iya or
k i ngly , as wel l a s from th e B rahman or pr i es t ly , c lass .
V isvam itra,one of the seven great R i sh i s
,
2and the au thor
of th e Gaya t r i ; jamadagn i , th e repu ted fa ther of the
A vata ra (i n ca rna t ion) Parasurama ; D evap i, Madhuch
Chan das,T rasadasyu , Mandhatar, S i b i
, V asumanas ,
Pratardana,and others
,were of the k i ngly c lass . A few
of the hymn s of the R ig-Veda are a scr i bed even to
fema l e s , rea l or imagi nary,as S raddha
,the daughter of
Kama ; and V ak ,the daughter of Ambh rina . V isvavara,
a daughter of A tr i,not on ly composed the twen ty-e ighth
hymn of the fifth Manda la of the R i g-Veda,bu t dis
charged the du t i es of a pr i est,worsh i pp i ng th e god s at
dawn with pra i ses and obla t i on s .
R ish i s and pr i ests marr i ed th e daughters of k i ngs ; su ch
1"
Emrer e V 171» p at , M ofio a ti
OMimrta dé p a r’
gxovo a t ,(
Yp eis yap dea i eo'
r e m ipeo r é r e 70 7 6 r e War/ T a ,
(
H p eis Oé KAe'
os OLOV (fr anc/aw dvde’
n idjuev
Te l l to me now,O ye M uses
,who dwe l l in O lymp ian mans ions
Ye wh o are goddesses present, and know ing a ll th ings wh ichbefa l l men
,
Th ings of wh i ch we may h ear rumours,but neve r ge t accurate
knowledge (Iliad, i i . ,“Musa m ih i causas memora , e tc . 1
Ac cord ing to W i lson’s V ishnu P arana
, p . 264 , th e seven
great R i sh is were— V asistha , Kasyapa , Atri , jamadagni, Gau tama
, V isvamitra and B haradvaja .
T H E L ITER ATUR E OF T H E VED A S . I I
as Chyavana who marri ed S ukanya, the daughter of
S aryata ; and Jamadagn i who marr i ed R enuka, the
dau gh ter of Renu . T h e grea t R i sh i Kaksh ivén marr i ed
the ten daughter s of Raja Svanaya , the son of
B havayavya ,wi th whom he had a large dowry which
he thu s ce l ebra tes : F rom wh ich generou s pri nce
sol ic i t i ng (my acceptance), I , Kaksh ivan ,u nhe s i ta t ingly
accepted one hu ndred necklets , one hundred v i gorou s
s teeds,and one thou san d bu l l s , whereby he has spread h is
imper i shab l e fame through heaven . Ten cha r i ots , drawn
by bay steed s and carry i ng my wives , s tood nea r me ,
given by Svanaya ; and s ixty thou sand cows fol l owed .
F orty bay horses , harnessed to the char i ot s , l ead the p ro
ces s i on i n fron t of one thou san d fo l l owers . ” 1 The hard
and fa s t l i ne s of ca s te were unknown i n those days,and
women occu p i ed a very much h igher pos i t i on than they
do at presen t .
The R i sh i s,l i ke th e anc i en t D ru i d s , were poets and
pr i e sts . They stood between the peop l e and the god s .
They appea sed the la tter wi th offer i ngs,and encou raged
the former wi th songs i n a ll confl i cts wi th the i r enem i es .
They were i n no s en se a scet ics , or Sanyas i s , l i v i ng a
pecu l iar ly holy l i fe in the j ungl e s,apart from wife
,
ch i l d ren , and the good th i ngs of th i s l i fe , as is now gener
a l ly supposed by H i ndu s . B u t they were men the bu rden
of whose songs was tempora l b l e ss i ngs -hea l th,l ong l i fe
,
offspr i ng , r i ch es , ca tt le , food , ra i n and v ic tory . One
R i sh i acknowledge s the sub s tan t ia l g i ft of one h undred
s teed s , and six ty thou sand herd s of pu re catt l e,made to
1 R .-V . ,
i. , 1 26, 2 , 3 , 4 .
1 2 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VED A S .
h im by a Raja,and prays the infmortal de i ty tha t h is
wea l th may be permanen t . 1 Another pray s,B e wi l l i ng
to gran t u s abundan t food wi th ca tt l e , (to gran t u s)
protect i on , p rogeny and v i gou r . M ay that herd of sw i ft
horses wh ich fo rmerly shone among the peop le of
N ah u sha (be gran ted), I ndra , to us . I n th e same
stra i n Va tsa,th e son of Kanva
,addresses the A sv i n s
,
“ De l i gh ters of many , abou nd i ng i n wea l th , bestowers
of r i ches,A sv i ns , su sta i n ers of a ll , approve of th i s m i ne
adora t i on . Grant u s , A sv i n s , a ll r iches tha t may not
bri ng u s shame ; make u s the begetters of progeny i n
du e sea son ; subj ec t u s not to reproach . G i ve , Nasat
yas , food of many k i nds d r i pp i ng wi th bu tter to h im , the
R i sh i Va tsa,who has magn ified you both wi th hymns .
G i ve,A sv i n s
,i nv i gora t i ng food dri pp i ng wi th bu tte r to
h im who pra i se s you ,th e l ords of l i bera l i ty
,to obta i n
ha pp i ness , who de s i re s affluence . Co nfou nders of the
ma l i gnant, pa rtakers of many (obla t i on s), com e to th is
our adora t ion,render u s p rosperou s ,
O heroe s,give
these good th i ngs of ear th to our des i re s . ” 3 Another
R i sh i prays ,“ Gran t u s abundan t trea su res . Gran t
the opu l en ce wh i ch many crave,s tore of heroes , pro
geny,and h i gh renown . Agn i
,most you th fu l of the
gods,send evermore the gi ft of wea l th .
“ 1 And another
boastfu l ly says,Ea rn i ng two hundred cows and two cars
wi th mares,the gi ft of Sudas , grand son of D evavat , and
son of Pijavana ,I wa l k abou t as a pr i est does rou nd a
1 R .-V . , v i i i . , 4 , 1 9 , 20 . Ibid.
,v i i i . , 6, 23 , 24 .
3 Ibid., v i i i . , 8 , 1 2 , 1 7.
1 Ibid . , v i i i . , 24 , 27, 28 .
T H E L ITE RATU R E OF T H E VED A S . 1 3
hou se offer i ng pra i ses . The fou r robust , r ich ly capar i
soned , brown horses of Sudas , the son of Pijavana ,
stand i ng on th e earth,ca rry me ,
son to son , onwa rd
to renown i n perpetu i ty .
” 1 R i sh i S obhari exto l s the
l i bera l i ty of the Raja T ra sadasyu ,who had gi ven h im
fi fty br i des ; and Syava , the l ord of k ine , who had given
h im a presen t of s even ty-th ree cows .2 And R i sh i N odhas
prays ,“ Grant u s
,O Marut s
,du rab l e r ich es a t tended by
poster i ty,
and— mort i fy i ng to ou r en em i es — (r i ches)reckoned by hundreds and thou sands and ever increas
i ng . M ay they who have acqu i red wea l th by p i ou s
ac ts come h i ther,qu i ck ly
,i n the morn ing . I n R .
-V .
,
i v ., 3 2 ,
17 ,2 1 th e worsh i pper a sks I n dra to give h im a
thou sand , yoked horse s,a thou sand ja rs of soma
,hun dreds
of thou sands of cows acknowl edge s tha t h e h ad rece i ved
ten go l den j ars,and u rge s the god not to be spar i ng bu t
to bestow abundant ly i n con form i ty w i th h is cha racter
for l i bera l i ty .
The R i sh i s were on most fam i l iar terms wi th the god s,
and occa s iona l ly adm in i stered a gen t l e rebuke to them
for thei r appa ren t n i gga rd l i n ess to the i r votari es . One
say s , “ I f,I ndra , I were as thou art
,sol e l ord over
wea l th , then shou l d my eu l og i st be posse s sed of ca tt l e .
Lord of m i gh t,I wou l d g i ve to tha t i n te l l i gen t worsh i pper
that wh i ch I shou l d w i sh to give i f I were the posses sor
of catt l e And another says , “ I f,Agn i
,thou wert a
morta l and I an immorta l,I shou l d not abandon thee to
1 R .-V .
, v i i . , 18 , 22 , 23 . Ibid . ,v i i i . , 19 , 3 6 , 7 .
3 Ibid . , i . , 64 , 1 5.
I4 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VED A S .
ma l ed i ct i on or to wretchedness ; my worsh i pper shou l d
not be m i serab l e or d i stre ssed I f I were thou ,and
thou wert I , then thy wishes shou l d b e fu lfi l l ed .
” 1
I n the fifty-fifth hymn of th e seven th Manda la of th e
R i g-Veda,the holy sage V asish tha is represen ted as
hav i ng entered the house of Va runa by n i gh t , in order to
stea l gra in to appea se h is h unger after a fast of three
days,and
,when assa i l ed by the wa tch-dog , a s hav i ng
u ttered a prayer or i ncan ta t i on to make i t s l eep , and so
hav ing gi ven a d i rec t encou ragemen t to th eft . And
R i sh i Ajigarta , th e son of SUyavasa ,for one hundred
cows , sol d h i s son S unasepha to be sacr ificed .
M ax Mul l e r says,
“ In th e R i g-Veda we find hymn s
wh ich the B rahman s them se lves a l l ow to be the compos i
t ion s of the son of a s lave . Kavasha A ilfi sha is the
au thor of severa l hymn s i n the ten th book of the R i g
Veda ; yet th i s same Kavasha was expe l l ed from th e
sacr ifi ce as an impostor and as th e son of a s lave (dasya/z
p a tra ), and he was re-adm i tted on ly becau se the god s
had shown h im spec ia l favou r . Th i s is acknowl edged by
the B rahmanas of the A itarey ins and Kaush i takins , and
i n the Mahabhara ta a l so Kava sh a i s ca l l ed a N i shada ,o r
out-ca s te .
3 . T 7ze Age oy’
t/ze Vedas .
The age of the Vedas can on l y be approxima te ly
a scerta i n ed . The H i ndu s have no h istory and no
1 R .-V v i i i .
,1 9 , 2 5 ; v i i i . , 44 , 3 .
Max M u l ler’s H i st . A ne . Sans. L it. , pp . 58 , 9 .
T H E L ITERATUR E O F T H E VED A S . I S
au th en t ic chronology . L i fe to them has a lways been a
d ream ; an i l lu s i on .
“ The i r struggl es were struggles of
thought ; the i r past the probl em of c rea t ion the i r fu tu re
the prob l em of exi s tence . The pre sen t a l one , which i s
the rea l and l i v i n g solu t i on of the p rob l ems of th e past
and fu tu re , seem s never to have at tracted the i r thoughts
or to have ca l l ed ou t the i r energi es .
’
H en ce they have
no pol i t ica l h i s tory l i ke the Egyp t ian s , th e j ews , the
Baby lon ian s , A ssvrians , Pers ian s , Greeks , and Roman s ;
and no certa i n da te i n the wide range of the i r l i tera tu re ,
except what i s imported from Greek h istory . We lea rn
from Greek wri ters tha t i n the t ime of A l exander th e Great
and h is su ccessors there was a powerfu l k i ng of the
Prasii , S andracottu s or S androcyptu s by name , whose
capi ta l was Pa liboth ra ,on the conflu ence of the Ganges
,
and th e E rannaboas , or Sone , wh i ch is probab ly the same
as the modern Pa tna . H e con trac ted an a l l iance wi th
Se l eucu s N ica tor,
and M egasth enes v i s i ted h i s cou rt
severa l t imes i n th e capac i ty of an ambassador . Th i s
Sandracottu s of the Greeks i s i den t ified wi th the H i n du
ki ng Chandra ru_ta
,the u su rper of the throne of
the N andas,and the founder o f the Mau rya dyna s ty at
Patalipu tra . H e i s supposed to have re igned from B . C .
3 15 to 29 1 . H e was the grandfath er of. Asoka ,u nder
whose au thor i ty Buddh i sm became the S ta te re l ig i on of
I nd ia,i n the m i d d l e of the th i rd cen tu ry .
U nder the preced i ng dynas ty,that of the Nandas
,
B rahman i ca l t rad i t ion s p lace a number of d i s t i ngu i shed
scholars,whose trea t i s es on the Vedas are s t i l l extan t ;
such as, Saunaka ,
A svalayana , Katyayana , Pan i n i , and
1 6 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VED A S .
others . Katyayana is the au thor of two A nnéranzanis ,
or genera l i n dexes— one to the R i g-Veda ,and the other to
the wh i te Yaju r-Veda . H e i s a l so the au thor of certa i n
work s ca l l ed S fi tras S fi tra mean s “ s tr i ng,
and
a ll works wr i tten i n th is s ty l e are noth i ng bu t s tr i ngs of
short sen tences conta i n i ng the essence of B rahman ica l
l ore expres sed i n the mos t conc ise form poss i b l e,and
thu s form i ng a grea t con trast to th e ted iou s pro l i xi ty of
th e B rahmanas . The Satra sty l e of compos i t i on was so
un iversa l ly preva l en t i n I nd ia at one t ime as to mark a
defin i te l i terary era , ca l l ed the S fi tra per i od ”. Accord
i ng to H i n du trad i t i on s Katyayana wa s con tempora ry
wi th K i ng Nanda and h i s su ccessor,YOgananda , a t
Patalipu tra , immed ia te ly before th e u su rpa t ion of Chan
dragupta . H e wa s preceded by A svalayana and h i s
teacher Saunaka,whose works he s tud i ed . H e a l so
corrected and comp l eted the gramma r of Pan i n i , M ax
M ii ller,i n h i s [f istory of A ncient Sanscrit L itera ture, says ,
I f we p lace Katyayana in the second ha l f of th e fou rth
centu ry B . C . ; A sva layana, the predeces sor of Katyayana ,abou t 3 50 ; and Saunaka , the teacher of A sva layana, abou t
400 ; and i f then , con s ider i ng the wr i ters of S fi tras anter i or
to Sau naka and poster i or to Katyayana , we exten d the
l im i ts of the S fi tra per iod of l i teratu re from 600 to 200
B . C . ,we are s t i l l ab l e to say tha t there i s no fact i n
h istory or l i teratu re tha t wou l d i n terfere wi th such an
a rrangemen t ” 1 A l l da tes,however
,previou s to Chan
dragupta are mere ly hypothet ica l .
1 H ist . A ne. S ans . L it., pp . 244 , 5 .
1 8 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VED A S .
sun,hav i ng los t one hand , rece ived a golden one .
Aga i n,in a beau t i fu l hymn of the R i g-Veda
,whose
refra i n is “ Who is th e God to whom we sha l l offer
ou r sacr ifi ce p (Kasnza idevaya navis/za the
au thors of the B rahmanas,unab l e to en ter i n to the
sp i r i t of th e hymn and the yearn i ng of the poet to , know
the tru e God,thought tha t the i n terroga t ive pronou n
or “ who ,mu st be th e God addres sed
,and tha t
wherever the i n terroga t i ve lea occu rs , i t is the same
as Prajapa t i , the “ l ord of crea tu res I n l ike manner
the name Indra,the j up i ter P luv iu s of I nd ia , i s fanci
fu l ly d e r ived from idanzdra,i t seei ng Then there
are an c i en t and modern hymns , hymn s of the fa thers,and hymn s of the son s . M ax Mul l e r ca l l s the former
C/z/zandas , and the la tter M antras , and a ss i gn s a per i od
of two hundred yea rs to each .
The age of the Ved ic wri t i ngs accord i ng to Mul l e r
from whose works mos t of th e pa rt icu la rs i n th i s sec t ion
have been taken— wi l l then be as fol l ows
Satra per iod from B . C . 200 to 600 .
B rahmana 600 to 800 .
Man tra 800 to 1 000 .
Chhandas 1 000 to 1 200 .
Profe ssors Wi l son,Whitn ey
,and M . Barth regard
M ii ller’
s l im i ts for the “ Mantra and “ Chhandas
per i od s as too narrow and D r . H aug , a h igh au thori ty,
cons i ders the Ved ic peri od to extend from B .C . 1 2 00 to
B .C . 2000,and the very oldest hymn s (Mul l e r
’
s Chhandas)
to have been composed B . C . 2400 .
T H E L ITERATUR E O F T H E VED A S . 1 9
4 . T /ze Langnage of t/ze Vedas.
The Veda s were compo sed i n th e San scr i t language ,
wh ich mean s the sacred or.
the pol l'
s/zed tongu e . San scr i t
i s c l osely connected in grammar and vocab u la ry wi th the
Greek , La t i n,Teu ton ic ,
Ce l t ic,S clavon ic , and Zend .
H ence a ll are grou ped together by compa ra t i ve ph i l o
logists u nder one c lass,ca l l ed th e “ A ryan
,or I ndo
Eu ropean These seven languages a re s i sters , ho l d i ng
the same re la t ion to one another as F rench , Span i sh , and
I ta l ian ; and they are re la ted to some pr im i t i ve l ost tongue ,
as th ese Romance languages a re to the La t i n . A com
par i son of the A ryan languages has p laced i t beyond a
doubt tha t the ancestors of th e Greek s , I ta l ian s , German s,
Ce l ts , S clavon ian s , Pers ian s , and H i n du s were a t one
t ime l iv i ng together as one fam i ly wi th i n th e same
prec i nc ts , sepa ra te from the ances tors of the S em i t ic and
Tu ran ian races ; tha t they em i gra ted at d i fferen t t imes
and i n d i fferen t d i rec t ion s — th e fi rs t five towards the
North-west , and the la s t two towa rd s the Sou th and the
Ea s t— from a reg ion i n cen tra l A s ia of wh i ch B actriana
was probab ly the cen tre ; tha t they were or i gi na l ly a
pastora l race ; and tha t they gradua l ly changed the i r
hab i t s as they sett l ed down i n Eu rope,Pers ia and
H i n du stan .
The term s for God , for father , mother , son , daughter ,brother
,s i s ter
,heart s and tea rs
,are i den tica l i n these
languages . Th i s cou l d not have been acc i den ta l,for
they were appe l la t iv es before they were proper names .
The name for God i s der ived from a root dyn ,to sh i ne
,
20 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
and mean s the sh i n i ng one ”
; the term for father i s from
pa ,to protect , and m eans the protec tor of h i s fam i ly ;
mother is from nza , to make or fa sh ion ; daughter i s
der ived from a root dad to m i l k,and mean s “ the l i t t l e
m i l kma i d of the fam i ly th e ori gi na l mean i ng of brother
i s “ he who ca rr i es or , “ he who a s s i s ts and of s i s ter ,“she who pl ease s , or “ con sol es B efore th e A ryan s
parted they h ad names for the fam i ly re la t ion sh i p s wh ich
are expressed i n Engl i sh by the add i t i on of in-law,
as
fath er-in-law ,mother-in-law ,
son-in-law ,daugh ter-in-law ,
brother-in-law ,and s i s ter-in-law ; thu s showing a grea t
advance i n c i v i l i sat ion . They h ad word s for hou se , door ,and windows
,wh ich show that they were not nomads
,
bu t l ived i n fixed abodes . The word for boat or sh i p is
the same i n a ll these languages ; bu t the words for mas t s,
sa i l s,yard s
,are d i fferen t thu s showing that the A ryan s
before the i r sepa ra t i on went on ly i n boa t s wi th oars on
the r ivers of the i r land,the Oxu s and Jaxartes
,and d id
not sa i l anywhere on the ocean . They had hatchet s ,plough s , and m i l l s for gr i nd i ng corn . They cu l t i va ted
bar l ey,and perhaps other cerea l s . They h ad names for
cook i ng and bak i n g ; and they made a d i s t i nc t ion between
raw fle sh and cooked m eat . The names for c l othes and
sewing are th e same among a ll th e Aryan na t i on s ; and
hence i t is ev iden t tha t they were acqua i n ted wi th the art
of weav i ng and sew ing . They were a lso acqua i n ted wi th
s i lver,gol d
,copper
,and t i n . They h ad the same names for
tree, ca tt l e , ox , horse, dog, sheep ,mou se ,wolf, serpen ts , etc .
Max Mul l e r says,
“ I t i s hard ly poss i b l e to l ook at the
ev i dence h i th erto col l ected wi thou t fee l i ng tha t these
T H E L ITERATUR E OF T H E VED A S . 2 1
word s are the fragmen t s of a rea l language once spoken
by a un i ted race at a t ime wh ich the h istor ian has t i l l
la te ly hard ly ven tu red to rea l i se . Yet we have i n our
hands the re l i cs of that d i stan t t ime ; we are u s i n g th e
same word s wh ich were u sed by the fa thers of th e A ryan
race,changed on ly by phone t ic i nflu ences ; nay, we are
as nea r to them i n thought and speech as the F rench and
I ta l ian s are to the anc i en t peop l e o f Rome . I f any more
proof was wan ted a s to the rea l i ty of tha t per i od wh ich
mu st have preceded the d i spers i on of the A ryan race,we
m i gh t appea l to the A ryan numera l s as i rrefragab l e
ev idence of tha t l ong-cont i nued i n te l l ectua l l i fe wh ich
charac ter i se s tha t per i od . H ere is a dec ima l system of
numera t i on,i n i tse l f one of th e most ma rve l l ou s ach i eve
ment s of the human m i n d,ba sed on an abstrac t concep
t i on of quan t i ty , regu lated by a sp i r i t of ph i l osoph i ca l
c la ss ificat ion,and yet conce ived
,ma tu red , and fi n i shed
before the soi l of Eu rope was t rodden by Greek,Roman
,
S lave,or Teu ton .
" 1
5 . T li e Vedas ora l/y transmitted .
When the fou r col l ec t ion s of the Vedas were a rranged
by the i r myth i ca l comp i l e r , when the
B rahmanas were composed,
and probab ly for th ree
hun dred or fou r hundred years afterwa rd s,wri t i n g
was u nknown i n I nd ia . F or had i t been known ,
i t is pretty certa i n tha t some men t i on of i t wou l d have
been made i n Ved i c l i te ra tu re . When read i ng the
1 Chipsfrom a German Workshop, vo l. i i . , pp. 50 , 5 1 .
2 2 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
O l d Testamen t we often meet with word s denot i ng
wr i t ing,read ing , pen and book . I n Exodu s we find
tha t Moses , hav i ng rece ived the ten commandmen ts,
wen t down from th e Mount,
and th e two tabl es
of tes t imony were in h is hand : the tab l es were wri tten
on both the i r s i d es : on the one S i de and on the other were
they wr i tten . And the tabl es were the work of God,
and the wr i t i ng was th e wri t i ng of God . Aga i n,
A nd he took th e book of the covenan t,and read i t i n
the au d i ence of the peop le ”.
2 The Psa lm i s t says,
“ Then sa i d I,Lo
,I come ; in the vo lume of the book i t
is wri tten of me” 3 My tongue i s the pen of a
l
ready
wri ter .” 4 And job exc la im s,
“ Oh tha t my words were
now wri t ten ! Oh that th ey were pr in ted i n a book !
tha t they were graven wi th an i ron pen and l ead i n
the rock for ever .” 5 Su ch words as th ese prove beyond
a dou bt tha t the proph ets of th e O l d Testament,and
th e na t i on s among whom they prophe s ied,were ac
qua inted wi th the art of wr i t i ng . We look i n va i n,
however,i n th e Vedas
,B rahmanas
,and even i n the
S fi tras , for word s denot i ng wri t i ng, read i ng, pen and
book . F or read i ng we have addy eti or ad7ziti, to go over or
to repea t ; for chapters , adlzyayas, l ectu res ; and for books
we have enaranas,or fam i l i e s i n whose memory books
were preserved and ora l ly transm i t ted . I t is ev i dent,
therefore,tha t a ll the l i teratu re of the Veda s was handed
down ora l ly , l i ke the H omeri c poems . Every B rahman
1 E x.
,xxx i i .
,1 5 , 16 .
2 Ibid. , xx iv . , 7 .
3 Ps .,x l . , 7.
‘1 Ibid . , x lv .
, 1 .
5 J ob , x ix . , 2 3 , 24 .
T H E L ITE RATU R E OF T H E VED A S . 23
had to l earn the Vedas by heart du r i ng the twe lve or
more year s of h is s tudent l i fe . The Gu ru , or teacher ,pronoun ced a group of word s , and the pu p i l s repea ted
them after h im . Cae sar says th e same of the D ru i ds .
And long after wri t i ng was i n troduced the B rahman s
were str ict ly forb i dd en to wr i te or read the Vedas . I n
the Mahabharata i t is wri tten ,
“ Those who se l l the
Vedas , and even those who wr i te them . those a l so who
defi l e them,they sha l l go to hel l ” .
Wri ti ng was probab ly known i n I nd ia before th e con
ques t of A l exander th e Great . We find i n the Lo lita
nistora ,a book conta i n i ng the l i fe of Buddha
,which was
t ran s la ted i n to Ch i nese , 76 A . D . , tha t the boy Buddha
knew how to wri te,and is even represe n ted a s teach ing
h i s Gu ru , V isvam itra ,the names of s ixty-fou r Sanscr i t
l etters,j u s t as j esu s i s represen ted i n the “ gospe l of th e
i nfan cy as exp la i n i ng to H is teacher the mean i ng of the
H ebrew a l phabet . We have , however , the more re l iab l e
te s t imony of i n scr i p t ion s that wr i t i ng .was known i n
I nd ia du r i ng the ear ly per i od of Buddh i sm . The inscript ion s of A soka (B . C . 250) on the rocks of Kapurdigiri
near Pe shawa r , Dhou l i in O r i s sa,Girnar i n Guj era t
,
and other p laces , are p roof pos i t i ve of th i s . They are
wri t ten in two d i fferen t cha racters , and ca l l themse lve s
lip i , a wri t i ng,
and D /zarni alzjfii , sacred wri t i ng . The
i n scr i pt ion s of Kapurdigiri are wri tten from r igh t to l eft ,and the l etter s are ev i den t ly of Sem i t i c or ig in
,mo st
c l ose ly connected wi th the A rama ic branch of th e ol d
Sem i t ic or Phoen i c ian a l phabet . The charac ters of the
other i n scr i p t i ons,though wr i t ten from l eft to r i gh t
,Show
24 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
t race s of hav i ng been once wri tten i n the con trary direc
t i on.Thi s
,and the imperfect system of mark i ng the
vowel s,poi n t to a Sem i t i c ori gi n ; bu t whether th e wri t i ng
was i n trodu ced from Phoen i c ia by Phoen i c ian traders , or
from an Arama i c character u sed i n Pers ia or Baby lon , i s
not yet sett l ed . D r . Bu rne l l , j udging from a docket
a ttached to one of the Baby lon ian tab l et s i n the B r i t i sh
Mu seum,conc luded that i t was i n trodu ced from th e
lat ter . 1 H owever , i t i s certa i n tha t th ere i s no trace of
the devel opmen t i n I nd ia of an or ig i na l i n dependen t
system of wri t i ng .
2
I t i s wel l known tha t th e Phoen i c ian s had commerc ia l
i n tercou rse wi th I nd ia from th e ear l i e st t imes . Sol omon ’
s
sh i p s of Ta rsh i sh , manned by Phoen i c ian seamen,sa i l ed
to the sou th and west of I nd ia, and imported thence
peacocks , apes,and i vory , wh ich are ca l l ed i n H ebrew
tnlelzi—ini , leoplz ini , slzenlzaoo-ini , horn s of tee th .
3T oleei i s
the ol d Tam i l word for a peacock , and i s s t i l l u sed for a
peacock’s ta i l ; leap/z i s a word wi thou t etymo l ogy i n the
Sem i t ic languages,bu t is nea r ly i den t i ca l i n sound wi th
the San scr i t name for ape, leap i . The word i n th i s form
has been fou nd a l so in Egypt ian h ieroglyph i c s of the
seven teen th centu ry B . C . ; thu s showing,not on l y the
ea r ly occupa t i on of I nd ia by the A ryans, bu t thei r i n t i
mate commerc ia l i n tercou rse wi th the West l ong before
1 A cademy for J une 17, 1882 .
2 D r . B urne l l , E . S . I. Paleography ,chap . i. , and M ax M u l ler’s
S cience of Language, I st series, pp. 208, 9 .
3I K ings, x.
, 22 .
26 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
the commerc ia l i n tercou rs e of th e Phoen i c ian s,and the
pol i t i ca l i n tercou r se of th e Pers ian s , whose a l phabet i s
traceab l e to a S em i t ic orig i n , tha t the H i n du a l phabet
m i gh t have been i n troduced from the same sou rce .
The Greek wri ters,N earchus (B .C . 3 25) and Megas
thenes (B .C . both dec lare tha t the H i ndu s had no
laws and no books ; bu t the former says tha t they wrote
on a sort of cotton c l oth or paper , and the la tter tha t they
had m i l e s tones a t a d i s tance of ten s tad ia from on e
another,i n d i ca t ing the rest i ng-p laces and d i stances .
M ax Mul l er conc ludes,therefore
,tha t “wri t i ng was known
to the H i ndu s before A l exander’s conquest , bu t tha t th ey
had n ot then begun to u se i t for l i terary pu rposes— the
B rahmans not havi ng got over the i r prej ud ice aga i n s t
the u se of l et ter s as the med ium of preserv i ng and com
mun icat ing the i r sacred books”
. And D r . Bu rnel l says ,Wri t i n g was
,certa i n ly
,l i tt l e u sed i n I nd ia before B .C .
250
6 . l e Genera l C/zaracter of Vedic Litera ture.
The genera l s ty l e and cha racter of Ved i c l i teratu re
shou l d not be j udged from the qu ota t i on s and doctr i nes
wh ich appear i n th i s book . I t h as been my endeavou r to
c l ear away the ru bbi sh,and br i ng to l i ght th e prec i ou s
gems of tru th wh i ch lay embedded among much tha t is
pueri l e and unmean i ng . Though the Mantrap ort ions of
the Veda s con s i s t of hymn s or metr ica l verses,i t i s
pa i n fu l ly obv i ou s , to any one read i ng them ,e i ther in
the orig i na l or i n tran sla t i on s,that they have bu t very
l i t t l e poetry , u nderstand i ng by tha t word lofty concept ion s
T H E L ITERATUR E OF T H E VED A S . 27
and s tr ik i ng thoughts expre s sed i n cha s te , measu red
language . The hymn s abound i n ted iou s repet i t i on s
and puer i l e i deas , wh ich form a grea t contrast to th e ea sy
flow and e l eva ted concept i on s of the sacred poetry of the
H ebrews . Thei r on ly charm l i e s i n the sma l l rays of
l ight wh ich they th row on the mos t anci en t thoughts,
hab i ts,and confl ic t s of the H i n du A ryan s . The B rah
mana port i on s are more d i sappoi n t i ng s t i l l . I cannot
descr i be them better than i n the words of Profes sor Max
Mul l e r : “ The genera l charac ter of these works (B rah
manas) i s marked by sha l l ow and i n s ip i d grand i l oqu en ce ,by pri est ly conce i ts
,and an t i quar ian pedan try Aga i n
,
These works deserve to be stud i ed as th e phys i c ian
stud i es the twadd l e of i d i ots and the rav i ngs of madmen .
They wi l l d i sc l o se to a thoughtfu l eye the ru i ns of faded
grandeu r ; the memor i es of nob l e asp i rat ion s . B u t l et
u s on ly t ry to tran s la te thes e works i n to our own
language,and we sha l l fee l a s ton i shed tha t human lan
guage and human thought shou l d ever have been u sed
for such pu rp o ses .
” 1 Aga i n,he says respect i ng the
Upg nishadS— wh i ch u ndoubted ly form the bes t port i on s
of the B rahmanas,and wh ich i n h i s [fl ooert Lectures
he pronoun ced u nr iva l l ed,not on ly i n th e l i tera tu re
of I nd ia,bu t i n the l i te ra tu re of the wor l d
,
“ They ”
(the d i ffi cu l t i es of tran s lat i ng them)“con s i s t
i n the extraord i nary number of pa s sages wh ich seem
to u s u tte r ly mean ingl e s s and i rra t i ona l,or
,at a ll
even ts , so far-fe tched tha t we can hard ly be l i eve that the
1 H ist. A ne. Sans. L i t., p . 3 89 .
28 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
sam e au thors who can expres s the deepest thoughts on
rel ig ion and ph i l o sophy wi th c l earness , nay ,with a ki nd of
poet i ca l e l oquence,cou l d have u t tered i n th e same breath
su ch u tter ru bb i sh . Some of the sac r ific ia l tech n i ca l i t i es,
and the i r ph i losoph i ca l i n terpreta t i on s , with wh i ch the
U pan i shad s abou nd,may perhap s i n t im e as sume a
c l earer mean i ng,when we sha l l have more fu l ly mas tered
the i n tr i cac i e s of th e Ved ic ceremon ia l . B u t there w i l l
a lways rema i n i n th e U pan i shad s a va s t amount of
wha t we can on ly ca l l mean ingl e s s ja rgon,and for the
p resence of wh ich i n the se an c i en t m i n es of thought I , for
my own pa rt, fee l qu i te u nab l e to accou nt . ” 1
The Mantras,th e ol dest port i on s of Ved ic l i tera tu re
,
are by far th e most i n terest i ng and i n struc t i ve . The
B rahmanas and U pan i shad s,though la ter in t ime
,S how
con s i derab le d ec l i n e i n thought and s ty le . H ow can
th i s be accoun ted for on the theory of “ Evolut ion ” or
U pwa rd p rogress” 9
1 S acred B ooks of the E ast,vo l. xv . , p . 19 .
CH A PT E R I I .
T H E T H EOLOGY O F T H E V E D A S .
Al l men yea rn afte r th e gods .— H 0M E R .
T he world th rough its w isdom knew not God. PAUL .
S 1 : T li e N unzoer of t/ze Gods.
I n some H ymn s the number of the god s is g iven as
th i rty—th ree . Ye god s,who are e l even i n heaven
,
who are e l even on earth , and who are e l even dwel l i n g
wi th gl ory i n m id-air,may ye be p l eased wi th th i s
ou r sacrifice .
” 1 We have probab ly a rem i n i s cen ce
of th i s number in th e th i rty-th ree R a tus of the Z end
Avesta , an i n tere st i ng fact,i n d ica t i ng tha t before th e
separa t i on of the I nd ian s from th e I ran i an s , con s iderab l e
progres s had been made i n po lythe i s t ic not i on s . Whi le ,
however , u nder the i nfluence of Zoroa s ter , a s trong
react i on ea r ly set i n aga i n s t po lythei sm i n I ran,a new
impu l s e was given to i t by the gorgeou s scenery and
d ivers ified c l imate of I nd ia . H ence,i n th e R i g-Veda
,
we see the number of th e god s gradua l ly and a lmos t
impercept i b ly i n creas i ng . Agn i is invoked to br in g “ the
1 R .-V . , i . , 1 3 9 , 1 1 .
H aug’
s E ssay s on the Parsees, 3 rd edi t ion .
3 0 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
th ree and th i r ty gods wi th thei r wives ” 1 The A sv i n s
are“assoc ia ted wi th a ll the thr i ce e l even god s
,wi th the
Waters,the Ma ru ts
,the B h rigus ,
and un i ted wi th the
Dawn and the S un ,dr i nk the Soma A nd “
a ll these
god s,th r i ce e l even in number
,are i n th e sec ret of Soma
”.
3
I n another hymn,th ree hu ndred
,th ree thou sand
,
th i rty and n i n e gods are sa i d to have “ worsh i pped
Agn i I n the A th arva-Veda the Gandharva s , or dem i
gods,a l on e amou nt to six thou sand three hundred and
th i rty-th ree ? The number of Ved i c gods,though large
,
s i nks i n to insign ificance when compa red wi th the tota l
number of H i ndu gods,wh ich the trad i t ions of the presen t
age give , viz ., taree lzundred and tlzirty
-taree millions
2 . T /ze N a ture of t/ze Gods .
The gods are S poken of i n the R i g-Veda as the “ former
and the la t ter,
” the “ ol d and the “ young ”. The “ for
mer are the gods of Poetry,and the “ la t ter the gods
of Ph i losophy . The ch ief charac ter i s t i c s of the “ former ”
are concrete or Phys ica l,and of the “ lat ter ab stra ct
or M etaphys ica l . We sha l l con s i der them u nder these
des i gnat i on s .
(1 ) P/zysica l Gods.
A l l the god s i n th i s c lass appea l , more or l ess , to the
sen ses,and hence are ca l l ed “ sem i-tangi b l e by Pro
fessor M ax Mu l l er i n h is [J uan Lectures.
1 R .-V .
,i., 45 , 2 ; i i i . , 6 , 9 .
2 Ibid. , v i i i . 3 5, 3 .
3 Ibid., ix . , 92 , 4 .
4 Ibid. , 9 , 9 .
5 A .-V .
,x i . ,
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VED A S . 3 1
The fi rs t of th ese i s the sky i n its va r i ou s a spect s and
u nder var i ou s names . The sky i s u ndoubted ly the ol dest
obj ect of worsh i p i n the Veda , and one of its oldes t names
as sac/z i s Dyau s ;1a name iden t ified wi th the Greek
Z ens,and the La t i n j u i n j upi te r . Dyau s is ca l l ed P i ta r
,
F a ther ; and the compound D yaushpitar is a lmost as
mu ch one word as j up iter or Z euspa ter . D yau sh p ita r,
H eaven-F ather , or B r igh t F a ther , rem i n d s us both of
mi-rep fut d’
w 6 e’
v r ois o i’
ipa vois," Our F a ther , who art i n
heaven ” 2and of na Os raw (barr ow,
“ th e F a ther O f
L i gh ts The Sky is a l so ca lled D yau sh p i ta jan i ta :
D yau sh , th e F a ther, the Creator ; and the m i gh ty D yn,
the maker of I nd ra .
5
Dyau s d i d not l ose i t s appel lat ive character i n th e
l i tera tu re of I n d ia as Zeu s d i d i n th e l i teratu re of Greece,
6
and hence d id not occupy the same pos i t i o n of pre
em i n ence among the god s of I n d ia as tha t wh ich Zeu s
occup ied among the gods of Greece . I n dra , h i s son ,became the Zeu s of I nd ia
,and Dyau s had to bow down
before h im , for h i s grea tn ess exceeded the heaven
(Dyaus).7
1 F rom S ansc ri t div or dy u , to sh ine,mean ing
“the brigh t
or“th e sh ining one
”
.
2 M att . , v i . , 9 .
3j ames , i. , 17.
4 R .-V . , iv 1 10 .
5 R .-V .
, iv .,
6 S ome traces of the origina l mean ing of Zeus are supposed
to be found in such words as Z n); 5a ,Zeu s ra ins ; Endia (eu
Z eus , A t o's), fa i r sky ; sub j ove frigido, unde r the co ld sky ; and
sub divo, unde r th e Open sky.
7 R .-V .
,i.,1 3 1 , 1 ; i. , 6 1 , 9 .
3 2 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
V ABH N A , th e Ou ranos1 of the Greeks and the Ahu ra
Maz da 2 of the Pers ians , i s another name for the Sky ,
1Ou ranos , says M ax M u l ler , in th e language of H es iod
is u sed as a name for th e sky ; h e is made or born th at ‘ h e
shou ld be a firm p lace for th e blessed gods’. It is sa id twic e
that U ranos covers eve ryth ing (v . , and that wh en h e bringsth e n igh t, h e stretch ed ou t everywh e re embrac ing th e earth .
Th is sounds a lmost as if th e Greek myth h ad st i l l preserved a
reco l lec t ion of th e etymo logi ca l powe r of U ranos . F or U ranosis th e S anscr i t Varuna ; and derived from a root var
,to cove r ;
V aruna be ing in th e V eda a lso a name of th e firmament . but
e spec ia l ly connec ted w i th th e n igh t and opposed to M i tra , th eday (Ch ips, vol. i i . , pp . 67,
T h e grounds for ident ifying Varuna and A hura-M az da
1 . Tra ces of h is origina l sky na tu re are C learly vi s ib le in th edesc rip t ion of th e bodi ly appearanc e of Ah u ra-M az da . M r. j .
D armesteter says,
“ T h e sove re ign god of Pe rs ia,notwith
stand ing th e Charac te r of profound abstrac t ion wh i ch h e h asac qu ired and wh i ch is refl ec ted in h is name A hura-M az da , th e
omn isc ient Lord ,’
can h imse lf be recogn ised as a god of th e
h eavens . T h e anc ient formu lae of th e l i tan ies sti l l S h ow that h eis lum inou s and corporea l . Th ey invoke th e c reator A huraM az da
,resp lendent , very great , very beau t ifu l , wh i te , lum inou s
seen from afa r ; th ey invoke th e ent i re body of A hura-M az da ,th e
body of Ahu ra wh ich is th e greate st of bodies ; th ey say thatth e sun is h is eye , and th at th e sky is th e garment embro ideredw i th stars
,w i th wh i ch h e arrays h imse l f. L i ke Varuna , l i ke
Zeus , th e l igh tn ing is in h is hands ,‘th e mo l ten brass wh ic h
h e causes to flow on th e two worlds ’
; l i ke th em h e is th e
fath e r of th e god of l igh tn ing.
”
2 . T h e term A sura , sp iri t , wh ich is etymo logi ca l ly th e
same as th e Zend A hura ,is often app l ied to Varuna , not , h ow
ever,exc lus ive ly.
3 4 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S
were prom i n en t . 1 We fi nd a l so tha t th is abstrac t sp i r i tua l
concept i on wa s so c l os e ly connec ted wi th a concrete
mater ia l concept i on tha t th e one cou l d not be separa ted
from th e other ; and hen ce both found expres s i on i n
Varuna . Varu na therefore represen ts both the ma ter ia l
heaven,and the god of heaven .
N ow,wh i l e i t is obv iou s tha t the o l dest nam es for the
H eaven-God among the ancestors of th e A ryan nat i on s
were Dyaus and Varuna,i t i s n ot so obv i ou s under
1 Ahu ra-M az da is represented by Zo roaste r, h is proph et ,as
“th e c reator o f th e earth ly and sp i r i tua l l ife , th e Lord of
th e wh o le un ive rse,in wh ose h ands are all th e c reatures . H e
is th e l igh t and source of l igh t ; h e is th e w i sdom and inte l lec th e is in possess ion of all good th ings, sp i r i tua l and worldly ,such as th e good m ind , immorta l i ty
,h ea l th
,th e best tru th ,
devot ion and pu r i ty, and abundance of every earth ly good .
Al l th ese gifts h e grants to th e p ious man,wh o is uprigh t In
th ough ts , words,and deeds . A s th e ru ler of th e wh o le uni
ve rse , h e not on ly rewards th e good , but h e is a pun ish er ofth e w ic ked at th e same t ime . A l l th at is c reated , good or ev i l ,fortune or m isfortune ,
is h is work ”
(D r. H aug’
s E ssays, p .
3 02 , 3 rd ed i t ion).“Arch i lochus s ings Zeus fath er, as th e god wh o ru les th e
h eavens, wh o watch es th e gu i l ty and unj u st ac t ions of men,
wh o adm in isters chast isement to monsters , th e god wh o
c reated h eaven and earth .
“ T h e old man of Asera knowsthat Zeus is th e fath er of gods and men ; that h is eye sees
and compreh ends all th ings and reach es all th at h e w ish e s .
”
N aus i kaa knows that Zeu s was me rc i fu l wh en sh e addressesth e sh ipwrecked U lysses Zeus h imse lf
,th e O lymp ian,
distributes happ iness to th e good and th e bad , to every one , as
h e p leases . A nd to th ee a lso he probably h as sent th is , and
you ough t by a ll means to bear i t .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VED A S . 3 5
wh ich name the sky was fi rst worsh ipped —Dyau s or
Va runa ? The preva l ence of the root dyu i n the name for
God i n a ll the I ndo-Eu ropean languages , and e spec ia l ly
i n the compounds Dyaus/guitar , Z euspa ter , j upiter ,
1 seem s
to po i n t to th e former ; whereas the pr io r i ty gi ven to
Ou ranos i n the G reek mythol ogy— Zeu s be i ng the grand
son of Ou ranos- and the fac t tha t the I ran ian s , whi l e
c l i n gi ng to Va runa ,rej ected Dyau s , and st i gma t i sed a ll
gods (devas) der i ved from i t as demon s , seem to po i n t to
the la t te r . Can anyth i ng be u rged i n favou r of Varuna
wh ich may tu rn the sca l e There are th ree th ings : (1 )The mora l e l evat i on of cha racte r asc r i bed to h im i s far
more lofty and d iv i ne than tha t ascr ibed to any other
Ved i c god ;1
(2) The eth i ca l con sc i ou sness of s i n man i
fested i n the hymn s addressed to Varu na is far more
frequ en t and i n ten se than tha t wh ich i s foun d i n hymn s
addres sed to Dyaus and later gods ; (3 ) In proport i on a s
we come down th e stream of t im e from Varu na,we find
the mora l charac ter of th e god s deter i ora t i n g,and th e
eth i ca l con sc i ou sness of s i n growi ng weaker and weaker .
These facts seem to tu rn the sca l e i n favou r of Va ru na,
1 Gre e k Zeus and probab ly 96 0 9 , Lat in D ens,Ge rman Z io
Anglo-Saxon T in, L i thuan ian D ien as, W e lsh D a ze .
2 If we comb ine into one th e attr ibutes of sove re ign powe rand maj esty wh ich we find in th e oth e r gods , we sh al l haveth e god Varuna . In oth e r sec tions th e re l igion of th e V edais r itua l ist ic , and at t imes intense ly specu lat ive ; bu t w i thVaruna i t goes down to th e depth of th e consc ience
,and
rea l ises th e idea of ho l ine ss (M . B arth ’
s R eligions of Ind ia ,
pp . 16 , 17)
3 6 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VED A S .
and wa rrant the conc lu s ion tha t he was the ol dest b i stor i
cal god of the u n i ted I ndo-Eu ropean na t i on s .
The p r im i t i ve A ryan s , however , i n con sequ ence of the
col d c l imate in wh ich th ey lived ,
'
h ad l ooked w i th pro
found interest on th e br illiant aspect of th e sky as th e
most p l easan t and adorab le,and gave expre ss i on to i t in
Dyau s . D yauslzpitar , therefore , was a formu la fixed i n
the i r language before th e separa t i on of the Western
branches from the Eastern . The Greeks and Lat in s,
occu py i ng a cou ntry , the c l ima te of wh ich resemb l ed the
one they h ad l eft,c lu ng to tlzis aspect of the H eaven-God
,
and made Zeus—j up iter the i r su preme dei ty . The H indu
Aryans on th e other hand , l i v i ng i n th e hot su l try p la ins
of I nd ia,where the gl ow of heaven is oppress ive and de
struc t ive,wh i l e i ts s torms
, thunder and ra i n are refresh i ng
and fert i l i s i ng,fixed on tais aspect of the sky as the most
beneficen t and adorab l e ; and embod ied i t i n a new god,
I ndra ,a name su pposed to be der ived from a root sign i
fying to“ drop ”
. Dyau s , therefore , before he grew
strong and drama t i c enough to su persede Varuna i n
Ind ia,was supp lanted by I nd ra . B u t the I ran ians
,i n
consequence of some powerfu l s p i r i tua l i nfluence s wi th
wh i ch they came i n contact i n M ed ia,or thereabou t
,
1
c lung to th e abstract concept i on of Varuna and developed
i t i n to a persona l sp i r i tua l B e i ng , separate from na tu re ,wh ich they ca l l ed A snra , Zend A lzura ,
a l i v i ng sp i r i t ; an
ep i th et i n th e Veda denot i ng ch i efly the ab strac t concep
1 S ee D es Origines da Z oroastr isnze, par M . C . de H arlez,
extra i t du j ournal A sia tique, Paris , 1 879-80 .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VED A S . 37
t i on of the H eaven-God . And the name Va runa,or V arana
,
rema i n ed wi th them ,a t fi rst a s expre ss i n g the materia l
heaven on ly,andafterwards representingamyth i ca l region ,
the sea t of a fight between a storm god and a s torm fiend .
The Veda s descr i be Va runa i n the most exa l ted
language . The sun is h is eye,the heaven is h is
ga rment,and th e resound i ng wi nd is h is brea th .
1 H e
stemmed a sunder th e wi de firmament,he l i fted on h igh
the br i gh t and gloriou s heaven,he s tretched ou t , apart ,
th e starry Sky and the ea rth ? H e open ed wi de pa th s
for the sun,and hol l owed ou t channe l s for the r ivers .
3
H e is k ing of a ll , and the “upho lder of order i n the
u n iverse wh ich he ha s made .
4 H is o rd inance s (vra tas),res t i ng on h imse l f a s a moun ta i n , are fixed and unassa il
ab l e . By the i r operat i on the moon wa l k s i n b r ightnes s
and the twink l i ng stars wh ich appea r a t n igh t van i sh
in the morn i n g . H e ha s unbounded contro l over th e
ca lam i t ies of mank i nd,and a thou sand rem ed i es to cu re
a ll d i sea se s . H e i s beau t i fu l i n form,u ndecay ing
,un
conquerab l e,
serene and immovab l e in the m i d s t of
tu rmoi l and tempest ;“ the god whom the scoffers do
not provoke,nor the tormentors of men ,
nor th e p l otte rs
of m isch i ef H e is fu l l o f holy s trength,wi thou t
dece i t,en l i ghten ing the foo l i sh
,and l ead i ng h is wor
sh ippers to wea l th and happ iness .
’
1 R .
-V . , i . , 1 1 5 , 1 i ., 2 5 , I3 ; v i i . , Ibid .
,v i i . , 86 , I .
Ibid i . , 24 , 8 ; n .
, 28, 4 .
4 [ bid i i ., 2 2 . 10 ; i. , 2 5 , 8 .
Ibid.
,i i .
, 28 , 8 .
6 1lu d ,i ., 2 5 ; i. , 24 , 9 ,
10 : A tharva-V,iv .
,1 6 .
3 8 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VED A S .
H i gh up i n h i s empyrean rea lm ,dwe l l i n g i n a pa lace
wi th a th ou sand ga tes,su pported by a thou sand column s ,
he d i scerns th e tracks of th e b i rds tha t fly th rough the
a ir,and the S h ips tha t p l ough the m igh ty deep .
1 H e
knows the twel ve month s,and th e th i rteenth
,or i n ter
ca lary ”
; he is acqua i n ted wi th th e cou rse of th e wi nds ,
and wi th the bri gh t and : m i ghty d iv in i t i e s who res i de on
h igh ? To h im th e darkne ss sh i n eth as the l i gh t “ for
he sees wha t h as been,and what wi l l be done I f a
man stand s,or wa l k s
,or h i de s ; i f he goes to l i e down or
to get u p ; wha t two peop le s i t t i ng together wh i sper,
K ing Va ru na knows i t , he i s there a s th e th i rd . H e
wh o Shou l d fl ee far beyond th e sky, even he wou l d not
be r i d of Varuna the k i ng . H is sp i e s p roceed from
heaven toward s th i s wo r l d ; with thou sand eyes th ey
overlook th i s earth . K i n g Va runa sees wha t i s be
tween heaven and earth,and what is beyond . H e has
cou nted the twink l i n gs of the eyes of men . A s a p layer
throws the d ice,h e sett l es a ll th i ngs .
” 4
Varuna i s th e governor of th e m ora l wor l d— th e con
sc i ences of men . H e ha s given laws wh ich cannot be
broken wi th im pun i ty . H is fa ta l “ nooses stand spread
ou t to ca tch the man who te l l s a l i e bu t “ they pa ss by
h im who te l l s the tru th ”
.
5 H is wra th i s terr i b l e u pon
a ll who comm i t sin and disfigu re h is worsh ip wi th im
perfec t ion s .
‘1 N everthe l ess,he is merc i fu l to the o ffender .
1 R .-V .
,v i i .
, 88, 5 ; i i . , 4 1 , 5 ; i . , 2 5 , 7.
2 Ibid.,i., 2 5 , 8 , 9 .
Ibid . , i . , 2 5 , 1 1 .
4 A .-V . ,iv .
,1 6 .
5 Ibid.
,
6 R .-V .
, i . , 2 5 , 2 ; iv ., 5 .
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 3 9
And hence man, t remb l i ng u nde r th e bu rden of s in
,dares
to approach Va runa and cry,
(1)“ Let me not yet
,O Va runa
,en ter i n to the hou se
of c lay ; have mercy ,A lm i gh ty
,have mercy I
(2)“ I f I go a l ong tremb l i ng
,l i ke a c l ou d d riven by
the wi nd,have mercy
,A lm i gh ty
,have mercy ” 1
(3)“ Through wan t of strength
,thou s trong and
br igh t god , have I gone wrong ; have mercy ,A lm igh ty
,
have mercy I
(4) Th i rst came upon the worsh ipper , though he stood
i n the m i dst of the wa ters ; have me rcy,A lm i gh ty
,have
mercy
(5)“Whenever we men
,O Va ru na
, comm i t an o ffence
before th e heaven ly host ; when ever we break the law
through thought l essnes s,pu n i sh u s not
,O God
,for tha t
offence‘1
H owever the name Va ru na may jar on our ears , there
can be no doub t tha t to the anc i en t A ryan s i t wa s the
mos t sub l ime expres s i on of the Suprem e B e ing , whose
persona l i ty was now fad i ng away from the i r m i n d , and
heaven,the p lace of H is abode , was addre s sed a s H im
se l f. Th i s was not from a deep sen se of con tr i t i on and
unworth i nes s to ca l l H im F a ther,l i ke th e p rod iga l son
when he cr i ed,
“ I have s inned aga i n s t heaven ,”
bu t i n
con sequ en ce of the s i n fu l tendency of man not to reta i n
1 A more l i tera l translat ion of th is verse is given by M u ir :
1 go a long, 0 thunde rer , qu ivering l ike an inflated sk in ‘ ”
etc .
2 R .-V .
,v i i .
,89 . M ax M u l l er’
s trans lat ion .
40 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VED A S .
God i n h i s memory . The A rvan s were now i n tha t
men ta l and sp i r i tua l cond i t i on ,ap t ly descr i bed by Co l e
brook,
“ recogn i s i ng bu t one Sup reme De i ty , yet not
suffic i en t ly d i scr im i na t i ng the c rea tu re from the Crea tor ”
F a th er o f heaven i n the sense of “ God of heaven,
” or
F a th er of l i gh t i n the s en se of “ God i s l i gh t ,”
h ad
become haz y and u ncerta i n and th e a ttr ibu tes or ig ina l ly
a scr i bed to H im were con sequ en t ly tran sferred to H eaven ,
th e p lace of H is abode .
The phys i ca l,i n te l l ec tua l , and mora l a ttr i bu tes of the
De i ty n ever shone so fu llv br i ght ly , and l ov i ng ly i n any
Aryan god a s i n Va runa . A l l subsequ en t gods are bu t
dim reflec t i on s of h im —~ as he was bu t a dim reflec t i on of
the Supreme— reta in i n g i n the Ved i c Age h i s phys i ca l
and i n tel l ec tua l charac te r,bu t a l l owing h is mora l per
fections gradua l ly to grow dimmer and d immer,u n t i l
,
at last,th e mora l character of th e immorta l gods cou l d
not be d i s t i ngu i sh ed from tha t of morta l men .
M ax Mul l er says,
“ The more we go back , th e more
we -exam i n e the ear l i es t germ s of any re l i g i on , th e pu re r
I be l ieve we sha l l find th e concep t i on s of the De i ty
Th is i s as s tr ic t ly t ru e of the re l i g i on s of I n d ia as i t i s
of all other anc i en t re l i gion s . And th i s can hard ly be
accounted for , except on the suppos i t ion tha t man was
orig ina l ly endowed wi th d iv ine knowledge fa r more than
he appea r s to have possessed at the dawn of h i story . F or
h ad the Ved ic A ryan s emerged a t any t im e, by the i r own
exert i on , from a l ow or savage sta te,and gradua l ly r i sen
i n to the h igh concept i on of the Au thor of th e Un i verse,
wh ich fou nd expre ss i on in Varuna , we m i gh t reasonab ly
42 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VED A S .
beyond th e c louds , and beyond the firmament . Ad i t i at
fi rs t wa s probab ly noth i ng more than an ep i thet of Dyau s,
th e sky (dyau/7 aditi/z)1 —more espec ia l ly of tha t pa rt of
the sky whence the dawn comes forth every morn i ng,
and hence the dawn i s ca l l ed “ the face of Ad i t i Myth
o logy , however , soon d i s sected the H eaven-God i n to seven
i nfe r i or de i t i es,correspon d i ng to the Ved i c seven reg ion s ,
or wor ld s,
3 to each of wh ich a god mu s t be a l l otted . Thi s
myth,the root of wh ich we see i n the sacrednes s a ttached
to the number seven,4 began to germ inate before the
I ran ian s and th e I nd ian s separa ted . I n I ran i t grew i n to
the seven Amesh a-S penta s,“ the u ndyi ng and wel l-doi ng
ones,
” with Ahu ra-Ma z da a t the i r head and i n I nd ia i n to
th e seven Ad i tyas,
“ the i nfin i te ones , wi th Varuna a t
the i r head . B u t its growth i n Ind ia d i d not s top here .
I t was n eces sary to c rea te a mother for the Ad i tya s , and
so th e ep i th e t Ad i t i was ra i s ed to the rank of a goddes s ;
and from bei ng the mother of th e bri ght Ad i tyas sh e
eas i ly gl i ded i n to the mother of a ll gods , the common
womb,or sub stratum of all ex istencies .
“ Ad i t i i s the
h eaven ; Ad i t i i s the sky ; Ad i t i is the mother , father ,son ; Ad i t i i s a ll the gods ; Ad i t i is the five c las ses of
men Ad i t i is whatever has been and wha tever sha l l be .
” 5
1 R .-V .
,v .
, 59 , 8 x .,63 , 3 .
'
Ibid .
,i. , 1 1 3 , 1 9 .
3 Ibid .
,ix .
,1 14 , 3 .
4 Ibid. ,v i .
, 74 , 1 ; x .,1 22 , 3 ; x. ,
Ibid .,i.,89 , 1 0 .
Zeus e’
o rw a idiyp , 2 6 139 36 yiy, Z n); 8,
o i/pavo'
s. Zeus“ Ta fzr a war/ T axd) 7 013e 8
’
frrrép‘
r epou (zzE schylu s , F ragment, A nd so th e
Egypt ian goddess N e i th says , “ I am th e th ings that havebeen ,
that are ,and that w i l l be
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 43
The names of the seven Ad i tya s va ry . Accord ing to
R .
-V . ,i i .
,27, I ,
th ey are M i t ra,A ryaman
,Bhaga
,
1 Varuna,
Daksha,An sa ; these and Ad i t i make seven . I n another
passage? Agn i and Sav i ta r are sub st i tu ted for Daksha and
An sa ; and i n the T a itt irya-Aranyaka ,D hatar and I n dra
occu py the p lace s of Ad i t i and Daksha,and V ivasvat
,th e
sun,i s men t i oned as th e e ighth
,wh i ch
,i f i n tended for
JWara ttanda,was ca s t away , accord i ng to R .
-V . ,x . , 72 ,
8 .
N o doubt phy s ica l ly these d e i t i e s had someth ing to
do wi th sola r movemen t s . Probably they were person i
fica t ions of the va r i ou s appearances of Va runa,th e sky ,
cau sed by the d iu rna l and annua l movemen ts of the
sun . Th i s,a t any ra te , is th e exp lana t i on g iven of them
a t a later age ; for we read i n the S atapatha-B rahmana 3
that th e Ad i tya s repre sen t th e twe lve mon th s i n the yea r .
And as the Ad i tya s p/zysica lly are the d i verse man i fe sta
t i on s of Varuna,so they are morally th e reflec t i on of h is
character , and ,in un i on w i th h im
,hol d the same eth ica l
re la t ion sh i p to man as he hol d s persona l ly . They
see the good man .
’ “ They ha te fa l sehood , forgive
s i n s,pre serve from ev i l s p i r i ts , br i dge the pa th s to im
morta l i ty,and u pho l d th e h eavens for th e sake of th e
r ighteou s .
” 5
The names of th ese Ad i tya s,wi th the except i on of
Varuna,are rema rkab le as be i ng abs trac t names of dei t i es
drawn from certa i n re la t i on s of mora l and soc ia l l i fe .
The names of the other gods are ch i efly taken from some
1 S c lavon ic B oga .
‘
1 R .-V v i i . , 50 , 1 . x i . , 6 1 , 3 , 8 .
1 R .-V .
,i i .
, 27, 3 . Ibid .
,i i .
, 27, 4 , 14 .
44 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
prom i n en t phys ica l fea tu re s , such as Dyaus, the“ br igh t
or from th e act i v i t i es of human l i fe,su ch as V isvakarman
,
the “ maker of a ll th i ngs B u t these name s are the
pu re concept i on s of the m ind,i n wh ich the nob l est re la
t i ons of human i n tercou rse are reflec ted . M i tra i s the
fr i end,
” A ryaman the “ bosom fr i end , Bhaga the
l i bera l,Daksha the “ powerfu l or the capab l e
,
”and
An sa the apport i oner or sympa th i ser No won der
then tha t the cry of th e weak, sorrowfu l , and d i stres sed
shou l d a scend to them “ M ay I be con sc i ou s,Ad i tyas
,
of th is you r protec t i on,the cau se of happ iness i n danger ;
A ryaman,M i tra
,and Varu na , may I th rough you r gu i d
ance escape the s i n s that are l i ke p i tfa l l s i n my pa th s
Carry u s , O V asu s , by you r b l e s sed protect ion , as i t
were in you r sh i p , acros s a ll dangers . To our off
spr i ng,to ou r race, and thu s to ou rse l ves , make l i fe
l onger to l i ve ! ye va l ian t Ad i tyas .
“ O M i t ra,A rya
man,Varu na
,and ye Winds
,grant u s an abode free from
sin,fu l l of men
,glori ou s wi th th ree bars .
” 3
I N D R A,the god of the wa tery a tmosphere , of thu nder
1 R .-V . , i i . , 27, 5 . Ibid .
,v i i i .
,1 8
,17, 1 8 .
3 Ibid .,v i i i .
,1 8
,1 8
,
‘ In th e c i rc le of ideas wh i ch found expre ss ion in Adi t i andD a ksha ,
we see a fa int reco l lec t ion o f th e great F i rst Cau se , ora c rav ing to know th e Inv i s ib le , wh o is beh ind a ll th ings and
far beyond h uman ken,whose a ttribu te s sh one forth in V aruna .
S o i t was in Gree c e . Th ough Zeus was ado red as th e S upreme
GOd — (i7rtiu7'wv rap t or— som eth ing more was wanted to sat i sfy
th e c rav ings o f th e sou l and h ence an A lm igh ty F ate (Mo ira)was imagined before wh ic h a ll gods, even Zeus , h ad to bow.
’
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VED A S . 45
and of l i ghtn i ng , th e son of D yu and Pri th iv i,of Pu ru sha
or Prajapa t i , 1 hold s th e same re la t i ve po s i t i on i n th e
mythology of th e Vedas as Zeu s i n tha t of Greece . The
phys ica l mean ing of Dyau s was too tran s parent for th e
c rysta l l i sa t i on of myths,
and th e eth ica l cha rac te r o f
Varuna was too d i v ine for reten t i on i n the corrupt
memory of man . B u t I ndra fu rn i shed u n l im i ted scope
for the wi l d imagina t i on of anc i en t Bard s,st imu la ted by
the most gorgeou s scenery i n th e worl d , to pa i n t i n the
cho ices t co lou rs . H ence h e marks a pe r i od of decadence
i n the re l i g i ou s con sc i ou snes s of the Ved ic A ryan s . H is
a ttr i bu tes are ch iefly , bu t not exc lu s i ve ly , th ose of phys i
ca l superi or i ty ra ther than of sp i ri tua l e l eva t i on and
mora l grandeu r . H e has more to do wi th the a ffa i rs of
the externa l wor ld — wi th the tempora l n ecess i t i e s and
comfort s of man — than wi th the sp i r i tua l a sp i ra t ion s and
eterna l rea l i t i es wi th wh i ch Va runa i s so prom i n ent ly
concerned . I ndra is an omn i poten t man, whereas
Va ru na i s more l ike an omn i poten t God . With the
advent of I ndra the anc i en t pas tora l charac ter of the
A ryan s changed,and th e more sp i r i tua l e l emen ts of the
anc i en t c reed d i sappeared . The peop l e now a s sumed
the more act ive character of warr i ors and conqu erors ,and the i r re l i g i ou s con cept i on s became l e ss eth i ca l and
more sen suou s .
I n the i r e ffort s to find su i tab l e ep i thets to ce l ebra te th e
great ness of I ndra,the o l d R i sh i s exhau s t the language
of the Vedas . H e i s the Su preme God , th e a rch i tec t of
1 R .-V . , iv .
,17, 4 ,
17 x . , 90 , 1 3 ; Sa t. B r.,1 1 ,
46 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
all th ings,su rpass i n g i n power a ll former genera t ion s of
god s and crea tu res,da r i ng i n sp i r i t
,der i v ing h i s power
from h imse l f ; th e c rea tor of the ear th,the sky ,
the sun,
moon and s ta rs ; the ru l er of a ll th ings movab l e and
immovab l e ; the l eader of god s ; th e l ord of the l ofty
S ky, th e l ord of the sacred assemb ly,the lord of the j oy
i n sp i r i ng Soma-j u ice , th e l ord of horse s , of cat t l e , and of
man s i on s . H e i s the p r imeva l , mos t resp lenden t d i v i n i ty ;
m i ghty,wise , true, holy , ever last ing, swift, j oyfu l , void of
fear,l ov ing glory
,ski l l ed in a ll sc i ence
,shepherd of
men , perform er of a hundred sacr ifices ; th e awfu l god ,
whose coun se l s not a ll the god s are ab l e to fru s tra te .
H e i s the cow tha t produce s th e wa ter of l i fe,the grea t
bu l l in the a ir , the be i ng tha t stop s the brea th of l i fe ,tha t dr i ves away d i sea se and a ll hu r tfu l and ma l ic i ou s
foes . H e i s omn i s c i en t and omn i p resen t . H e hears and
sees all th ings (vz'
svanz sr inoti pasya ti).1 “ H e is both
j u st and merc i fu l “ he pun i shes and pa rdon s . H e
hears prayer , and th rough fa i th i n h im the strong
acqu i re spoi l s i n the day of ba t t l e .
”2 H e su rpa sse s
heroes i n h is grea tness ; the ea rth and heaven suffice
not for h is gi rd l e . H e orders th e ea rth to be h i s
garmen t , and,god-l ike
,wears the heaven as i t were a
gaun t l et . 3 S t i l l,wi th a ll these h igh a tt r i bu tes
,he i s
rem i nded tha t he i s not se l f-exi sten t,bu t the son of a
mother . “ When thou,I ndra
,l i ke the dawn
,d idst fi l l
1 R .-V . , 8 , 67 , 5 . War/T a iddm A LOS‘ 6¢ t9a >vrds Ka i. writ/ T a vo rjo a s.
T h e eye of Zeu s wh i ch see s a ll and knows all .”
1’Ibid . , v i i . , 3 2 , I4 .
3 Ibid . ,i . , 1 73 , 6 , 7 .
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 47
both the worl d s,a d iv i ne mother bore thee , th e m i gh ty
monarch of m i gh ty crea tu re s — a grac i ou s mother bore
thee .
” 1
H is persona l appearan ce rep resen ts the A ryan concep
t i on of a handsome man . H e i s large-bod i ed , wi th a
beau t i fu l coun tenance , prom i n en t nose , good l i ps , hand
some ch i n,flowmg ha i r , red beard , l ong a rms , la rge
hand s,and ten fingers poi n t i ng to happ i ness . H is
speech is a s smooth and capt i vat i ng as tha t of the
god of e loqu ence . R ich ly adorned wi th ornamen ts,
wea r ing a crown on h is head and gol den pen dants
i n h is ears,he ri des on horses
,and dri ves i n a
go l den char io t d rawn by two tawny steed s,snort i ng
,
ne igh ing,and i nv i nc i b l e , with go l den manes
,for he i s
both the “ fam ed char ioteer and the “ incomparab le
travel l er 2
The most prom inen t ep i thets app l i ed to h im are
wie l der o f the thunderbo l t ,” “ the s layer of Vritra
the s layer of the Da syu s,
and “ the dr i nker of
Smn a
A s the d i spen ser of ra i n , he i s the“ wie l der of th e
thunderbo l t,
and the “ s layer of V ritra V ritra,or Ah i
,
is the ra i n l e s s sky conce ived of as a demon,the enemy
of man, who has stol en the cows , or the c l ou d s , and shu t
1 R .-V . , x . , 1 3 4 ,
1 .
Ibid., i . , 52 , 8, 1 2 , I 3 ; i.
,i.,8 1 , 5 ; i. , 103 ,
2 ; i i , 1 2 , 1 ; i i i . , 3 2 , 7 ; iv . , 3 0 , 1 ; v i . , 30 , 4 ; v i i . , 3 2 , 16 , 2 2 ,
2 3 ; V l l l . , 2 1 , 1 3 ; v i i i . , 67, 5 ; v i i i . , 87, 2 ; x . , 968 ; x ., 23 , 4 ;
i i i . , 3 1 , e tc . ; and Sama-V eda passini .
48 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
them up i n dark caves n ea r the u t termost ends of the
sky,where they cannot d i s cha rge thei r u dders of fert i l
i s i ng m i l k u pon the pa rch ed and th i rsty earth . Then
the p iou s Worsh i pper imp l ores Indra to re l ease them ,
and s lay the demOn who h ad ca rr i ed them away There
upon I n dra ,gu i ded by h is fa i th fu l dog Sarama
, and
accompan i ed by the Ma ru ts , or s torm-gods,goes after
them ; and no sooner does he hear the i r lowing from afar
than th e ba tt l e beg i n s . The i ron thunderbo l t— the pro
du c t of T vash tri— is hu r l ed,the Ma ru ts roar
,the demon
is s la i n,and th e cows are re l eased to d i scha rge the i r
heavy udders in grea t d rops upon the ea rth . Then the
s i ngers “ bri ng thei r p ra i ses to hero ic I n dra ,as cows
come home to the m i l ker I n th i s respec t he i s
l i ke Pa rj anya,th e L i thuan ian Perkunas
,th e god of
thu nder and ra i n , the generator and nou r i sh er of
p lants and all l i v i ng crea tu re s .
1 A t other t imes he
i s th e br igh t god of day , whose steed is the sun,
and whose cows are th e fi rst rays of the dawn,
d i spel l i ng the da rkn ess of the n ight,and fi l l i ng the
worl d wi th l igh t and j oy ; and,th erefore
,he i s ca l l ed
the “ l i gh ter up of n ights , and the paren t of the
sun”
.
2
The Dasyu s were both the abor ig i na l i nhab i tants of
I nd ia,who res i s ted the A ryan s i n thei r progres s from the
’
I n dus to the Ganges,and the demon s of darknes s and
drough t , the enem i e s of the br i ght god s , such a s V ritra,
N amuch i,Sambara , Ah i , and others . I ndra was now
1 R .-V . ,
v . , 83 .
2 Ibid .,i., 7 , 3 i i i . , 3 4 , 4 .
50 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
who stru ck down V ritra , when he h i d th e wa ters , as a
tree i s s truck by l igh tn i ng— to h im who des i res th i s
Soma, offeg it ; for tha t I n dra des i re s to dr i nk it
'” 1
I dec lare the m i gh ty deed s of th i s m i gh ty one . A t
th e T rz'
leadru/ea fe st i va l,I nd ra drank of the Soma
,and i n
i ts exh i lara t i on he s l ew Ah i . H e propped up the va st
sky i n empty S pace ; he ha th fi l l ed the two worl d s and
th e a tmosphere ? H e ha th u phe l d th e earth and stretched
i t ou t . I nd ra has done a ll th ese th i ngs i n the exh ilara
t i on of the Soma .
” 3
Soma fina l ly wa s de ified , and all the d iv i n e a ttr i bu te s
as cr i bed to the other god s were a s cr i bed to h im . H e
became the c rea tor of a ll th i ngs,fa th er of th e god s , the
ra i n er of b l es s i ngs,and the sav i ou r of men from sin
,as
wel l as“ the embro i l er of a ll th i ngs i n h i s d ru nken
fro l i cs ”. The Sama-Veda says of th i s god,that he
subm i t s to morta l b i rth,and i s “ bru i sed and affl icted
tha t o ther s may be saved Th i s i s the rudes t type of
med ia t i on th rough sacr ifice,of strength th rough weak
ness,of l i fe through dea th .
4
1 R .-V . , i i . , 14 .
Compare J ob , xxv i . , 7 .
“ H e stre tch eth ou t th e north ove rth e empty p lac e , and h angeth th e earth upon noth ing.
”
3 Ibid . ,i i . xv .
,
4 S .-V . , prap . , 5 , 3 ; iv .
, prap ., 45 ; v . , prap . , 3 3 ; i i . , x . , 2 , 6 ; v i . , 4 .
Compare wh at is sa id of D ionysus , th e Grec ian S oma
057 09 96020 1 on éuder a t 966g yeycbs,
65
0 7'
s 7 0 177 01} T d‘
yadi
dudpa’
nrovs
H e , born a god, is pou red ou t in l ibat ions to gods , so thatth rough h im men rece ive good (Mu i r , S . T . , vo l . v . , p .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 5 1
VIS H N U ,a name of the sun
,
1 from vis , to pervade , is
the/ faith fu l fr i end and compan ion of I ndra , both i n h i s
d r i nk i ng bou ts and i n h is confl ic ts wi th V ritra .
“ Yea ,
even when a ll the gods had forsaken h im,fa i th fu l V i shnu
came to h i s he l p .
” 2 Vayu ,the god of the gent le bree z e s
,
is a l so i n h is tra i n . H e dr ives a thou sand s teed s ; h i s
brea th chases away the demon s ; he comes i n the ear l i e s t
morn i ng,as the fi rs t b rea th o f a ir that st i rs i t se l f a t day
break,to j o i n I ndra i n d r i nk i ng the Soma ; and the
au roras weave for h im sh i n i ng ga rmen ts . B u t th e
Maru ts,or Rudras
,s torm-god s
,are pre-em i n en t ly the
con stan t a l l i es and compan i on s of I n dra . They are th e
son s of Rudra,th e god of th e roar i ng tempe s t
, and
Prisni They ri de on spotted s tags (the c l ou d s), wea r
Sh i n i n g a rmou r,and carry spears i n the i r hand s ; no one
knows whence they come nor wh i th er they go ; 3 the i r
vo i ce i s h ea rd a l oud , as th ey come ru sh i ng on , the ea rth
tremb le s and the mounta i n s shake before th em .
‘1 B u t
though they are exceed i ngly tumu l tuou s they are none
the l e s s beneficent . They d i spen se ra i n i n abundan ce
from th e udder of the i r mother,Prisn i
,and havi ng
acqu i red the knowledge of remed i es from th e i r fa the r,
Ru dra , they are ever ready to he l p the s ick and su ccou r
th e affl i cted .
The fo l l owi ng hymn to the Maru ts and I ndra i s from
Max Mul l er’s tran s lat i on of the R i g-Veda Sanh i ta,p . 1 63 .
1 R .-V . ,
i. , 22 , 17 ; i . , 1 54 .
‘1 Ibid v i . , 69 , 1 , 8 ; iv . , 18 , 1 1 .
3 Compare J ohn , l l l . , 8 .
4 Professor Wh i tney , Orienta l L inguistic S tudies.
52 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
H YM N TO T H E MA RUT S AND INDRA .
T H E PROLOGUE .
T kc sacrificer speaks
1 . With wha t sp l endou r are th e Ma ru t s a ll equa l ly
en dowed , they who are of the same age ,and dwel l
i n the same hou se ? With wha t thought s ? F rom
whence are they come Do these heroes s i n g forth
the i r (own) s trength becau se they wi sh for wea l th ?
Whose prayers have the you th s accepted ? Who
has tu rned the Maru t s to h i s own sacr ifi ce ? By
wha t s trong devot i on may we de l i ght them , they
who float th rough the air l i ke hawks
T H E D IA LOGUE .
T /26 M aru ts speak
3 . F rom whence,O I nd ra
,dost thou come a l one ,
thou who art m i gh ty ? O l ord of men ! wha t has
thu s happened to thee ? Thou greetest (u s) when
thou comest together w i th (u s) th e br igh t (Maru ts).
Te l l u s , th en , thou wi th thy bay horses , what thou
ha s t aga i n s t u s .
Indra speaks
4 . The sacred songs are m i n e , (m i n e are) th e prayers
sweet are th e l i ba t ion s ! My strength ri ses , mythunderbo l t is hu r l ed forth . . They ca l l for me
,the
prayers yearn for me . H ere are my horses , they
carry me towa rd s th em .
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 53
T ke M aruts speak
5 . Therefore , i n company wi th our s t rong fri end,
hav i ng adorned ou r bod ie s , we now harnes s our
fa l l ow deer wi th a ll ou r m i gh t for I nd ra,accord i n g
to thy cu s tom,thou hast been wi th u s .
Indra speaks
6 . Where,O Ma ru t s , was tha t cu s tom of you rs tha t
you shou l d j o in me who am a l on e i n the k i l l ing
of Ah i ? I i n deed am terr i b l e,strong
,powerfu l ; I
escape from the b l ows o f every enemy .
T li e jl/ aruts speak
7 . Thou hast ach i eved mu ch wi th u s as compan i on s .
With th e same va l ou r,O hero l et u s ach i eve then
many th i ngs,O thou mos t powerfu l , O I ndra wha t
eve r we,Ma ru t s
,wi sh wi th our hea rt .
Indra speaks
8 . I s l ew V ritra ,O Maru t s
,wi th (I n dra
’
s) m i gh t
hav i ng grown strong through my own v i gou r ;
I who hol d th e thunderbo l t i n my a rm s,I have
made these all-bri l l ian t wa te rs to flow free ly for
man .
T ke M aruts speak
9 . N oth i n g,O powerfu l l o rd
,i s strong before thee ;
no one i s known among the gods l i ke u n to thee .
N o on e wh o i s now born wi l l come n ea r , no one who
has been born . Do wha t has to be done,thou who
art grown so strong .
Indra speaks .
Io . A lm i gh ty power be m i n e a l one , wha tever I may
do,dar i ng i n my heart ; for I i n deed , O Maru t s , am
54 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
known as terr i b l e ; of a ll tha t I th rew down , I , I n dra ,
am th e l ord .
1 1 . O Ma ru ts , now you r p ra i s e h as p l eased me,th e
glori ou s hymn wh ich you have made for me , ye
men ! for me , for I nd ra ,for the powerfu l h ero , as
fr i end s for a fri end,for you r own sake and by you r
own effort s .
I 2 . Tru ly , there they are,sh i n i ng toward s me
,a s sum
i ng b lame l es s glory,assum i ng v igou r . O Ma ru t s
,
wherever I have l ooked for you , you have appeared
to me i n b r igh t sp l e ndou r appear to me a l so now .
T H E EP ILOGU E .
T li e sacr ifi cer speaks
1 3 . Who has magn ified you here, O Maru ts ? Come
h i th er,O fr i en ds
,towa rds you r fr i end s . Ye br i l l iant
Ma ru t s,cher i sh these prayers
,and be m i nd fu l o f
these my r i te s .
14 . The wisdom of Manya has brought u s to th i s ,
that h e shou l d he l p,as th e poet he l p s the performer
of a sacr ifice : br i ng (th em) h i ther qu i ck ly, Maru ts ,
on to the Sage these prayers the s i nger has rec i ted
for you .
15 . Thi s you r pra i se,O Maru t s
,th i s you r song comes
from Mandarya ,the son of Mana , the poet . Come
h i ther wi th ra i n ! M ay we find for ou rse l ve s off
spri n g,food
,and a camp wi th runn i ng wa ter . 1
1 R .-V . ,
i . , 165 .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 55
I n verses 5 to 8 of th is d ia logu e we see traces of r iva l ry
between I ndra and th e Maru ts . They were not a lways
fr i end ly , and th e i r re spec t ive votar i es d i spu ted the i r re la
t i ve c la im s to adorat i on . Aga s tya seem s to have been
the mean s of reconc i l i ng them and of engraft i ng the
worsh i p of the Ma ru ts on that of I ndra .
1 The rema i n i ng
verses,therefore
,S how tha t a comp l ete reconc i l iat i on had
been effected between them .
The M aru ts are ca l l ed Visve-deva lz adru/za/z,all god s
,
devo i d of gu i l e ; 2 and are sa i d to have been ra i sed to the
sphere of th e immorta l s i n con sequen ce of thei r assoc ia
t i on wi th I ndra .
There are som e pas sages i n the Veda i n wh i ch grave
doub ts are expre s sed as to the ex i s tence of I ndra . Thu s
we read,
“ O ffe r p ra i se to I nd ra i f you des i re booty ;
t rue pra i se i f he tru l y ex i s t s ”
. One and another says,
There i s no Indra Who has seen h im Whom
sha l l we pra i s e
Then Indra an swers th rough the poet , “ H ere I am ,
O worsh i pper ; behol d me here “ I n m i gh t I over
come a ll c reatu re s .3 Aga i n , “ The terr ib l e on e of
whom they ask where he i s , and of whom th ey say that
he i s not,he take s away the r iche s of h i s enemy l ike the
s takes at a game . B e l i eve i n h im,ye men ,
for h e i s
i ndeed I ndra .
” 4
The whol e hymn,from wh ich the las t ve rse i s taken
appea rs to be a polem ica l as sert i on of the ex i stence and
1 R .-V . i . , 170 , 17 1 , 4 .
2 Ibid. , i. , 19 , 3 ,
3 Ibid. , V l l l . , 3 .
4 Ibid . , i i . , 1 2 , 5.
56 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
grea tn es s of I ndra aga i n st ga i n sayers . Some may regard
the doubts expressed respec t i ng the exi stence of I nd ra as
a neces sary stage i n the u pwa rd p rogres s of the human
m i nd ” th rough polythe i sm to monothe i sm ; Th i s doubt
l es s is t rue as a genera l law ,bu t i t can scarce ly be app l ied
to th i s case , for on tha t suppos i t ion shou l d we not expect
to see the ex i s tence of oth er god s dou bted ? No such
doubts , h owever, appear i n the R i g-Veda respec t i n g the
ex i s ten ce of other gods . The exp lana t ion therefore mu st
be sought i n th e fac t tha t I n dra was tr iumphant ly su per
sed i ng Varuna i n the cu l tu s ; and , con sequ en t ly , th e most
devou t R i sh i s, unab l e to l ook on pas s i ve ly when the nat i on
was tran sferr i ng its a l l egiance from the o l d to the new god,
endeavou red to stem th e torren t by ca st i ng doubts on h i s
ex i stence . They wou l d have h ad no obj ect ion to adm i t
I n dra to the i r pantheon as a god ; bu t the i r reverence for
Va runa ,h a l l owed by imm emor ia l t rad i t i on s
,was far too
s trong to perm i t them to regard h im as su preme . Who
cannot sympa th i se wi th them F or had not Varu na
been worsh i pped i n the ances tra l home before the fam i ly
broke up never to be reu n i ted aga i n ? H ad not the i r
forefa th ers offered sacr ifi ces to Varuna and su pp l icated
h im with hymn s,wh ich , i n accen ts of adora t ion , rem i n d
u s of th e Psa lm s of Dav i d ? With the p iou s , Varu na
wa s st i l l the god that wen t down to the depth of the
con sc i en ce , tha t sympa th i sed wi th the i r struggles after a
h i gher and hol i er l i fe , tha t best sa t i sfied the crav i ngs of
the i r sp i r i tua l natu re . And wi th such,Varuna rema i n ed
the supreme god for a l ong t ime , even a fter I n dra , by
a hard struggl e,had su perseded h im i n the pub l i c
58 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
a sc r i bed to the strong rubb i ng of th e oranis , or two dry
p i eces of wood , th e ord i nary mode of k i nd l i ng fi re among
a ll pr im i t ive na t i on s . H is b i rth is ce l eb ra ted i n the hymn s
i n th e most glowin g figu rat ive language as the greatest
wonder i n the u n iverse . The ten fingers of the k i n d l er are
ten v i rgi n s who bri ng h im to b i r th ; the two p i eces of wood
are h i s mothers , i n whose lap s he rap id ly grows , andwhom
he then devou rs as they l i e prostra t e on the earth .
1
Agn i i s a“ god among gods ” .
“ H is grea t n es s sur
pa s se s the va s t sky .
” No god i s beyond h i s m i gh t,th e
m igh ty one .
’7H e sees all th i ngs and knows a ll secret s
among morta l s ? H e i s th e l ord,th e wi se k i ng
,the
sage,the fa ther
,th e brother
,the son
,and th e fr i end of
men presen t with a ll,dwe l l i ng i n the i r hou se s
,gua rd i ng
them at n igh t from the demon s of da rkness . H e i s the
younges t of the gods,the i r mes sen ger 3 and invoker on
beha l f of men ,
“ go ing wi se ly be tween heaven and earth,
gods and men ,l i ke a fr i en d ly me s senger between two
ham l e t s H e carr i e s the sacr ifi ces to the god s , and
br i ngs the god s down to the sac r ifices . H e i s both ‘1
1 R .-V . ,
i . , 3 1 , 3 , 4 , 140 ,14 1 ; i i i . , 29 .
2 96 01 3 6’
r e min-c a io a ow.
T h e gods know all th ings”
(H omer).3 T h is ch aracter was a ssumed by Apo l lo in Gree c e .
“ H e
a lone of th e ac t ive gods is in ent i re and unvarying conform i tyw i th th e w i l l of Zeu s , and is h is me ssenger and agent for th e
most important pu rpose s”
(M r . G ladstone , in th e ContemporaryR eview for M arch ,
‘1 B rihaspat i , though somet ime s diffe ringfrom B rahmanaspat i ,is a l so ident ica l w i th h im (R .
-V . , i i . , a l so w i th Indra (R .-V . ,
i i . , 3 0 ,
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 59
B r i haspa t i , the Purhoh ita , or med ia t ing pr i es t , between
god and man ,and B rahmanaspa t i
,the l ord of prayer
becau se he not on ly h ea r s the prayers of the s uppl iant ,
bu t cau ses th e god s a l so to hea r them . H is golden
co lou r,br igh t face
,wh i te ha i r , green mou s tach io s , eyes
fixed on many region s , and voi ce l i ke the Maru t s,are
dwe l t u pon wi th spec ia l de l i gh t .1 With a crown of gl ory
on h i s h ead,he trave l s i n a br i l l ian t car drawn somet imes
by two red horses and somet imes by two b lack or ruddy .
H e i s compa red to a sta l l i on , and is ca l l ed a st rong bu l l,
a red hero,a poet wi th a br igh t tongu e
,the mou th of the
god s , th e produ cer of the three Vedas , th e orda i n er of
sacr ifice , the giver of wea l th , i n te l l i gence , and all happ i
nes s . H e i s a k i nd of anima mundi , a su bt l e pr i nc i p l e ,that pervade s a ll na tu re
,through wh ich p lan ts
,an ima l s
and men are capab l e of reprodu ct i on . H e is one of the
mo s t prom i n en t de i t i e s of the R i g-Veda , becau se he i s
the produ ct of sacerdota l i sm . The hymn s addres sed to
h im are more numerou s than those addre s sed to any
other de i ty except I ndra,and e igh t ou t of the ten Manda la s
of the R i g-Veda beg i n w i th hymn s to h im . Among h i s
frequen t appe l la t i on s are,
“ bel ong ing to a ll men ,
“ bearer of the offer i ng,
’ “all-pos ses s i ng , pu r ifier ,
and “ demon s layer ” ?
1 H e a l so assumes a terr ific form ,wh en
,w i th h is iron tusks
h e puts h is enem ie s in h is mouth and swa l lows th em (R .-V
x . ,
2 R .-V . , vi . , 49 , 2 ; i i . , 1 , 9 ; i. , 59 , 5 ; i . , v i i . , 3 ; i i . , 6 ,
7 ; I., 74 ; v1n . , 3 9 , 6 ; I. , 94 , 1 0 ; v i .
, 5 , 2 ; I., 19 ; “I. ,
29 , 6 ; v. ,1 2 , 6 ; v i . , 1 1 , 2 ; iv . ,
6,1 0 ; v. , 1 , 1 2 ; i. ,
60 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
I n Agn i we see un fo ld i ng them se l ve s th e germ s of the
two grea t i deas so na tu ra l to man— the former of wh ich
a s sumed su ch enormou s proport i ons i n la ter H i n du i sm— viz .
, I n carna t i on and M ed iat i on . Agn i was a Pu rho
h i ta,or H i gh Prie s t between God and man ,
who par
took of th e nature of both . H e was a god dwe l l i ng on
h igh among the immorta l s,and yet he condescended to
sit i n the humb l e hab i ta t i on of men . Agn i,be l oved by
many,pra i s ed by a ll
,i n whose immorta l fi re a ll men
cau se the offer i ng to b laz e , i s th i s morn i ng ou r gu es t .”
“ By word s and hymn s of pra i s e,u t tered wi th a ll my
m i gh t,do I pra i se th ee
,Agn i
,th e gu es t of my sacr ifice .
’
We approach the foe-dest royi ng,anc i ent incarna te Agn i ,
who shone forth most i l lu str i ous ly i n the form of S ru ta
vana,th e son of A rksha .
1 “ K i n d l ed Agn i,by th i s
adorat i on do thou recommend u s to M i t ra,Va runa ,
and
I n dra . Wha tever s i n we may have comm i tted , do thou
exp iate ; and may Aryaman,Ad i t i
,and M i t ra remove i t
from u s” ? O Agn i
,i n thy fr i en d sh i p I am at home .
” 3
SUR YA ,the sun , notwi th s tandi ng h i s i den t ifi ca t i on wi th
Agn i, was worsh i pped as a separa te persona l i ty , u nder
d i fferen t names correspond i ng to it s va r i ou s fu nc t i on s or
appearances , su ch as Sav i tr i , en l i vener ; Pashan , nou r
i sher ; M i t ra ,fr i end
,th e b r igh t sun of th e morn i ng or the
49 , 9 ; v i . , 1 3 , 1 ; v i i . , I , 2 ; iv . , 1 20 ; i i i . , 3 , 1 0 ; x., 5 1 , 3 .
Sama-V eda , i. , p rap . , i . , 9 ; i i i . , 95 , 1 , 5 , 5 , 7 , 6 , 8 , 8 , 2 ; p rap . ,
v i . , 4 , 3 ; p t . i i . , v i . , 7 ; v i i i . , 5 , 14 ; x i i . , 3 ; x iv . ,1 2 .
1 S .
-V . , prap . , i. , 9 , 5 ; 7 , 9 .
R .-V .
, iv . , v i i . , 93 , 7 .
3 Ibid . , v. , 44 ,1 5 .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 61
day ; Vi sh nu ,the sun ,
as s tr i d i ng wi th th ree s teps acros s
th e sky ; A ryaman,Bhaga , Ad i tya ; and th e great attri
bu tes a scr i bed to the othe r gods are asc r i bed to h im a l so .
Accord i ng to Ya ska,a very an c i en t etymol ogi st
,there
are on ly th ree Ved ic god s , viz . Agn i,whose p lace is on
the earth ; I n dra or Vayu , whose p lace is i n the atmo
sphere ; and Sarya,whose p lace i s i n the sky . A l l the
other god s are re so lvab le i n to these,and these aga i n
i n to one . Th i s,however
,is a genera l i sat i on poster i or to
the Ved i c Age . S fi rya ,though the ch i ld of heaven and
earth,is a l so the i r creator
,and even “ the d i v i ne l eader
of the god s ” .
1 The dawn is both h is wife and h i s
daughter,
2and as sh e is a l so the daughter of th e sky ,
she m i gh t b e spoken of as h is s i s ter . I n dra . aga i n,
“
is
represented as havi ng given b i rth to the dawn and the
sun . And from another poi n t of v i ew,the dawn i s
represen ted as hav i ng gi ven b i r th to the sun .
3 S I'
Irya
travel s i n a gol den char i ot “a l ong h i s anc i en t up
ward and downwa rd pa th s,the pa th s wi thou t du s t ,
drawn by one,or seven
,ruddy s teed s (the seven days of
th e week), preceded by the dawn , destroy i ng darkn es s ,and penetrat i n g wi th h i s p ierc i n g glance the act i ve
worl d and the etherea l s ky .
S fIrya ,as th e eye of the a ll-embrac i ng Va ru na ,
appea rs
to have occu p i ed a very h igh p lace i n the anc i en t creed
of the A ryan s . F or th e I ran ian s not on ly worsh i p ped
h im as an emb lem of the Su preme,bu t i n th e o lder part s
1 R .-V . ,i . iv . ,
1 1 ; i. , 160 , 4 ; v i i i . , 90 , I I , 1 2 .
Ibid. ,v i i . , 75 , 5 , 78 , 3 ; iv . , 43 , 2 .
3 Ibid. ,v i i . ,
62 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
of the B rahmana s— to wh ich the Avesta i s re la ted i n
age and conten t s— h e i s often exa l ted above the othe r
dei t i es (prasavita devanani). We are to l d i n th e T a ittiriya
and T andiya B rahmana s tha t th e Devas (H i n du s) and
A su ra s (Pers ian s) d i s pu ted abou t Ad i tya (S un), and tha t
the Deva s won h im . H e i s s t i l l adored by the Pa rsees ,the descendan ts of th e Pers ian s
,as th e pu re s t symbol of
the Su preme , and by the B rahman ica l H i n du s as th e mos t
resp lenden t man i festat ion of H im who i s i nfin i te ly beyond
human ken . To h im th e Gaya t r i i s addres sed , and before
h im m i l l i on s of p i ou s H i n du s bow in adora t i on every
morn i ng . The fo l lowi ng tran s la t i on by Mon ier Wi l l iams
of v n i ., 50, i n the R i g-Veda , i s a beau t i fu l descrip
t ion of the sun :
B ehol d the rays of Dawn , l i ke hera l d s , l ead on h igh
The S un ,tha t men may see th e grea t a ll-knowi ng
The s tars s l i nk off l i ke th ieves , i n company wi th
N i ght,
B efore the a ll-see i ng eye whose beams revea l h i s
p re sence,
G l eam i ng l i ke br i l l ian t flames,to na t i on after na t ion .
With speed beyond the ken of morta l s , thou ,O S un ,
Dost ever trave l on con sp icuou s to a ll .
Thou dost c reate the l i gh t,and with i t dost i l lume
The Un iverse en t i re ; thou r i s es t i n the s igh t of a ll
the race of men,and a ll the host of heaven .
L i ght-g iv i ng Va ru na thy p i erc i n g glance can scan
I n qu i ck su cces s ion a ll th i s s t i rr i ng,act ive wor l d ,
And penetrateth too the broad etherea l s pace,
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 63
M easu r i ng our days and n igh ts,and spy i ng ou t a ll
c rea tu res .
S fl rya , wi th flam i ng l ocks , c l ea r-s i ghted god of day,Thy seven ruddy mare s bea r on thy ru sh i ng car
With these thy se l f-yoked s teed s,seven daughter s of
thy char i ot .
Onward thou dost advance . To thy refu l gen t orb
B eyond th i s lower gl oom and upward s to the l igh t
Wou l d we a scend,O S un
,thou god among the
gods ? ’
I nvoca t i on s to the s ta rs and th e n igh t are not frequen t
i n the Veda s,and th e worsh i p of Chandramas
,the moon
,i s
n ot prom i n en t ; bu t U sha s , th e Dawn,
1and the A sv i ns
,
2
her precu rs i ve rays,
3 are obj ect s of grea t ce l ebra t i on . The
Asv i n s are ever young , handsome , and swi ft a s young
fa l con s . 4 Trave l l i n g i n a th ree-wheel ed triangu lar car,made
by the R lziokus, and drawn by a sses,th ey bestow r i ch
benefi t s on the i r worsh i ppers , and he l p them to overcome
the i r enem i es .5 They are ca l l ed B asras, destroyers , e i the r
of foes or d i seases ; for th ey are the sk i l fu l phys ic ian s of
god s as wel l as men,and as such are N asatyas , n ever
untru e, bu t a lways fa i th fu l . I n the Legends th ey are
represen ted as hav i ng effec ted su ch wonderfu l cu re s as to
1 Greek Lat in uro,We lsh wa zvr , German ost
,E ngl ish
east .
1 Greek axes , Lat in equus .
3 R .-V . , i. , 1 57 , 1 .
‘1 Ibid. , vi i . , 67, 8 ; v i . , 62 , 3 , 5 ; v. , 78 , 77, 3 .
5 Ibid . ,x. , 39, 1 2 i . , 47, 2 ; i. , 34 , 9 .
64 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
cau se the b l i n d to see,the lame to wa l k
,the o l d to become
young , and the d i s tre ssed happy .
1 I t i s supposed tha t
i n the myths of the A sv i n s two d i s t i nc t e l emen ts are
b l ended, viz .
, the cosm ica l and th e h i s tor ica l , the former
represen t i ng the my ste r iou sne ss of the phenomena of
l i ght,and the la tter the hea l i ng art of remote ant i qu i ty .
The fol l owi ng hymn to the Dawn i s con s i dered by
Max Mul l e r a fa i r specimen of the ori g i na l,s impl e poetry
of th e Veda .
“ I t has no referen ce to any sacr ifice , i t
conta i ns no techn ica l express i on s ; bu t i t i s the s impl e
u tterance i n metre of the feel i n gs of an ori enta l , who ha s
wat ched the approach of th e Dawn wi th m i ngl ed de l ight
and awe . I t a l so shows the treacherou sness of poet ica l
language ; how eas i ly i t l eads from devi the br ight,an
ep i thet of th e dawn,to devi , the goddess , the daughter
of the sky , Dyau s 2 (dukitra diva/z)She sh i nes before u s l i ke a you ng wi fe
,rous i ng every
l iv i ng be i ng to go to h i s work . The fi re had to be
ki nd l ed by men ; sh e brough t l i ght by s tr i k i ng down
darkn ess .
She ro se up , S pread i ng far and wide,and moving
towa rd s every one . She grew i n br i gh tness,wea r i ng her
br i l l iant ga rmen t . The mother of the cows (the morn i ng
c l oud s), the l eader of the days , she shone gol d-co lou red ,l ove ly to behol d .
She,the fortu na te
,she who bri ngs the eye of the god
,
who l ead s the wh i te and l ovely steed (of the sun), the
1 R .-V . ,
i . , 1 1 2 , 8 , 1 0 ; i. , 1 16 , 10 .
‘
1 H ist. A nc. S ans. L it. , p . 55 1 .
66 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
wh i ch by i t s cry revea l s to h im h i s fu tu re , as wel l as th e
numerou s c las ses of crea tu res wh i ch th reaten h i s ex i st
ence,rece i ve from h im th e worsh i p of e i ther honou r or
depreca t i on . The P i tr i s , sp i r i t s of d eparted ances tors,
th e Rh ibu s (Greek O rpheu s), th e de ified a rt i san s of the
gods Yama,the god of H ades
,and h i s two terr ific dogs
wh ich guard th e en trance to immorta l i ty ; the sacr ifi c ia l
v ict ims and u ten s i l s , bows , arrows , axes , and drum s , are
a ll invoked . I n short , whatever exc i ted the sen t imen ts
of pa i n or p l easu re , j oy or sadness , confidence or appre
h ension ,found a n iche i n the Ved ic Pan theon .
GOD D E S S E S do not occu py very prom i n ent pos i t i on s i n
the songs of the R i sh i s . Pr i th iv i,
1 the wi fe of Dyau s ,Ad i t i
,and U shas Sarasva t i and S i n dhu ,
wh ich are both
goddes ses and r i vers ; Ganga,S iniva li , and Raka, god
1 T h e earth, prith iv i (broad), is ca l led mata , moth e r ,— corre
sponding to th e Gree k D emeter ,— and H eaven and E arth are
addressed as th e parents of gods and men . At th e sacrific eI worsh ip w i th offe rings H eaven and E arth ,
th e promote rs of
righ teousne ss , th e great , th e wi se , th e ene rget i c , wh o , hav inggods for th e i r offspring,
th u s lav i sh,w i th th e gods , th e ch o ic est
b le ss ings in c onsequ enc e of our hymns. W i th my invocat ions I adore th e th ough t of th e beneficent F ath e r , and thatmigh ty inh erent powe r of th e M oth e r . T h e pro l ific parentsh ave made a ll c reatu re s , and th rough th e i r favou rs h ave con
fe rred w ide immorta l i ty on th e i r offspr ing (R .-V . , i . , 1 59 , 1 ,
T h e re semblance be tween th i s account of th e H eaven and
th e E arth and th at of H es iod is too str i k ing to pass unnot ic ed.
Accord ing to th e T /i eogony ,all gods , men , and an ima l s
sprang from th e un ion of th ese two and h enc e,in h is Works
and D ay s , th e E arth is cal led ‘
yij n dum u pfirnp , th e E arth , th e
mo th er of a ll th ings .
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 67
desses who pres i de at proc rea t i on and b i rth , are invoked .
V arunan i , I nd ran i , Agnayi , A svin i,
and R udras i , th e
w i ve s of th e grea t god s Va runa , Indra , Agn i , Asvins , and
of Ru dra respec t i ve ly , are on ly men t i oned . There are no
part icu la r funct i on s a s s i gned to them ,and th ey do not
occupy pos i t i on s at all corre spond i ng to the h i gh rank of
the i r hu sbands . I t shou l d be men t i on ed to the cred i t of
the Ved ic R i sh i s , tha t th ey pas s over w i th de l icate h i n ts
those myth s re lat i ng to th e amou rs and ma rr iages of the
gods,wh ich mu st have formed the bas i s of a grea t many
represen ta t i on s i n the H ymn s . I n th i s they con tra s t
favou rab ly wi th th e au thors of the B rahmana s,
and
espec ia l ly wi th those of the Ep ic Poems and Pu ranas , in
wh ich the amou rs of B rahma and Sa rasva t i,Vi shnu and
Laksm i,S i va and Parva t i are descr i bed i n the most
voluptuou s term s . Some port i on s of the H ymn s,how
ever,are not fi t for tran sla t i on .
(2) lVIetap /zysica l Gods .
A s the preced i ng c lass con ta i n s the “ former god s ,the gods of Poetry , so th i s c la ss con ta i n s the “ la tte r
,
"
the god s of Ph i l osophy . U n l ike the “ former,these do
not appea l to the sen ses ; there is noth i ng i n na tu re
corre spond i ng to them they are the pu re crea t ion of the
human m i nd,th e re su l t of ab stract i on and gen era l i sa t i on .
The human m i n d is swayed by two imper i ou s tenden
c ies,— the one impe l s i t to connec t effects wi th the i r
cau ses ; the other , to car ry up i t s knowledge i n to un i ty .
Both tenden c i es , i f not i den t ica l i n the i r or ig i n , co i nc i de i n
68 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
th e i r resu l t ; for i n proport ion as we a s cend from cau se
to cau s e,the nearer we approach to ab so lu te u n i ty .
With regard to the second tenden cy,th e ten dency to
genera l i s e and u n i fy our knowledge,S i r Wi l l iam H am i l
ton says , Th i s ten den cy i s one of the most prom i nen t
charac ter i s t ic s of the human m i n d . I t , i n pa rt , or ig i nates
in the imbec i l i ty of ou r facu l t i e s . We are l o s t i n the
mu l t i tude of the obj ect s presen ted to our imagi nat i on ,and i t i s on ly by a s sort i ng them i n c las ses that we can
reduce the i nfin i ty of na tu re to the finitude of m i n d . The
con sc i ou s ego, the con sc i ou s se l f, by i t s na tu re one ,seem s a l so con stra i n ed to requ i re tha t u n i ty by wh i ch i t
is d i s t i ngu i shed , i n everyth i ng wh ich i t rece ive s , and i n
everyth i ng wh ich i t p rodu ces “ We are con
sc i ou s of a scen e presen ted to ou r sen ses on ly by un i t i n g
i t s pa rt s i n to a perce i ved whol e . Percept i on i s thu s a
un i fy i ng act . The imagi na t i on cannot represen t an
obj ec t w i thou t u n i t i n g , i n a s i ngl e comb i nat i on,th e
var iou s e l emen ts of wh i ch i t i s composed . Generalisa
t i on i s on ly the apprehen s ion of the one i n the many,
and language is l i tt l e e l se than a reg i stry of the fact i
t i ou s u n i t i e s of thought . The j u dgmen t cannot affi rm or
deny one not i on of another , except by u n i t i ng the two
i n one i n d i v i s i b l e act of compa r i son . Sy l l ogism i s
s imp ly the un i on of two judgment s‘
in a th i rd . Rea son ,
I n tel l ec t , vofig, i n fine,conca tena t i ng thoughts and obj ects
i n to system ; and ,tend i ng a lways from part icu lar fact s to
genera l laws , from genera l laws to u n iversa l pr i nc i p l es ,
is never sat i sfied i n i t s ascent t i l l i t comprehend (which ,however
,i t can never do) all laws i n a s i ngl e formu la ,
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 69
and con summa te a ll cond i t i ona l knowledge i n the u n i ty
of u ncond i t i ona l ex i sten ce . Nor is i t on ly i n sc i ence
tha t the m i n d des i dera te s the one . We seek i t equa l ly
i n works of art . H ence the m ind ,” says Anaxagora s
,
“ only knows when i t subdues i t s obj ects , when i t reduces
the many to the one ; and “ T h e end of Ph ilosoph x
says Pla to,i s the i n tu i t i on of u n i ty 1
I n obed ience to th i s imper i ou s tendency of the m i nd
to gene ra l i se i t s knowledge,the Ved i c A ryan s began at
a very ear ly peri od to ab stract and c lass i fy the gods .
They d iv i ded them i n to th ree c la sses of (a t fi rs t) equa l
n umber,and ass i gned to them th ree sepa ra te l oca l i t i e s
for the i r abode 2 They then j o i ned together the names
of two god s,shar i ng certa i n fun ct i on s i n common , and
formed a compound wi th a dua l term i na t i on,whi ch com
pou nd they i nvoked as a new de i ty , su ch a s D yavaprith ivi ,
M itravarunau,and Indravayfi . They a l so grou ped the
gods together u nder a common name , V isvadevas .
the a ll-god s,and addres sed prayers and pra i s es to th em
i n the i r co l l ect i ve capac i ty . Advanc i n g a s tep fu rther
i n the i r genera l i sat i on,they perce ived tha t many gods ,
havi ng spru ng from the same sou rce,had a grea t many
a ttr i bu te s and funct i on s i n common . They su spected,
therefore , tha t the i r essen ce , or wha t under l i e s them , i s
one and the same,though var i ous ly named .
“ They
ca l l h im (the sun) I nd ra ,M i tra
,Varu na
,Agn i ; then he
i s the wel l-winged heaven ly Garu tmat ; that wh ich i s
1 L ectures on Metaphy sics , pp . 67 , 8 , 9 .
R .-V . , i. , 1 3 9
-1 1 A .-V . , x . , 9 , 1 2 .
70 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
one,the w i se ca l l i t many ways ; they ca l l i t Agn i ,
Yama,Matarisvan .
” 1 Aga i n,
“Wi se poets make the
beau t i fu l w i nged,though he is one
,man i fol d by words ” 2
The same sen t imen t i s found among the wi se men of
G reece . Kleanth es , i n a hymn to Zeu s,says , “ Mos t
gl or i ous among immorta l s,wi th many names
,A lm i gh ty
,
a lways ha i l to thee,Zeu s ”. And Maximu s T yriu s say s
,
M en make d i s t i ncti on s between the gods . They are
not aware tha t a ll the gods have one law ,one l i fe , the
same ways , not d i verse , not mu tua l ly hos t i l e ; all ru l e ;
a ll are of th e same age ; a ll p u rsu e our good ; a ll have
the same d ign i ty and au thor i ty ; a ll are immorta l ; one
th e i r na tu re, under many names ” 3 Seneca u t ter s the
same sen t imen t i n the word s,
“ Omn ia ej usdem D e i
n om i na,va r i e u tentis sua potesta te A l l name s of on e
and the same god,a s d iverse ly u s i ng h i s power .1
On e poet open ly dec lares tha t the R i sh i s d i d not know
God,and tha t a ll the i r songs are
“ i d l e ta l k ”
.
5 H e
who is ou r F a th er and Genera tor , who , as D i sposer,
knows all r i tes and worl d s,who i s th e one a s s i gner of
names to the god s,to h im have a ll other worl d s recou rse
as the sol u t i on and end of all qu es t i on s . ” 6 “ Tha t wh ich
is beyond the ear th and sky,beyond god s and sp i r i t s :
what ear l i es t embryo d i d the wa ter s hol d,i n wh i ch a ll
the god s were assemb l ed ? Ye know not H im who
produ ced th ese th i ngs . Someth i ng e l se i s wi th i n you
1 R .-V . ,
i .,164 , 46 . Ibid.
,x. ,
1 1 4 , 5 .
3 D iss . , xxx i x . , 5 .
1 Intel. Sy st. Uh . , v i i . , p . 2 3 9 .
5 R .
-V .,x. , 82 , 7.
6 Ibid. ,x. ,
82 , 3 .
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VE DAS . 71
(poly the i sm). The chan ters of hymn s go abou t enve loped
i n m i s t , and u n sa t i sfied wi th ‘ i d l e ta l k ’ ” 1 Another says,
Knowi ng noth i ng myse l f, I ask th e Seers here who
know , tha t I may l earn . H e who estab l i sh ed the s ix
worl d s i s tha t one wh i ch ex i sts i n th e form of the u nborn
B e i ng .
2
A hi gher fl i gh t of abs tract i on we fi nd i n S kamba ,the
su ppor ter ; V isvakarman, the maker of a ll th i ngs ; Praja
pa t i,the l ord of c rea tu re s . S kamba i s an expres s ion of
the abs trac t concept i on of the power wh ich su pports th e
wor l d and both V isvakarman and Prajapa t i were ep i thets
of the sun (Sarya)3 before th ey were ra i sed i n to indepen
d en t de i t i es . N e i ther of th ese , however , was des t i n ed to
rea l i se e i th er the h i ghest abst ract i on of Re l ig i on,or th e
h ighe st abs tract i on of Ph i l osophy .
A t las t an o l d sage fla shed forth a few thoughts
whether as a rem i n i scence or as the gues s of gen iu s
wh ich,by reflec t i on
,ought to have l ed to the recogn i t i on
of one Supreme B e i ng separa te from na tu re . Mu s i ng
on the begi n n i ng of all th i n gs , he goe s back to the
noth i ng wh i ch preceded the work s of crea t ion , and says ,There was then ne i th er nonent i ty (a sad) nor en t i ty
(sad) ; there was no a tmosphere nor sky above . Death
was not then,nor immorta l i ty ; th ere was no d i s t i nc t ion
of day or n ight . Tha t One ’
(tad ekam) breathed ca lm ly
se l f-supported there was noth i ng d i fferen t from , or above
I t . Des i re fi rs t rose i n I t,wh ich was the p r ima l germ
1 R .-V .
,x. , 82 , 5 , 6 , 7.
2 Ibid . , i . ,
3 Ibid . , x. , 170 , 4 ; iv . , 53 , 2 , 54 , 4 .
72 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
of m i nd,and wh ich sages , search i ng wi th the i r i n te l l ect,
have d i scerned i n th e i r hea rt to be th e bond wh ich
connects ent i ty wi th nonent i ty .
” 1
H ere the ex isten ce of on e se l f-ex i s ten t B e i ng i s bol d ly
a s serted . H e ex i s ted before crea t i on . H e exi sted,not
as a grea t pr i n c i p l e or an omn i presen t power,bu t as a
sen t i ent Be i ng , hav i ng a“ des i re ” or “wi l l by wh ich
“ des i re or wi l l ” “ en t i ty was produ ced from non
en t i ty,
” th e worl d from th e dark u n fa thomab l e abyss .
Thi s i s th e neares t approach to monothe i sm perhap s
i n the whol e Vedas ; — the h ighest goa l reached by the
Aryan m i n d . I t seem s s trange,from the pos i t i on of
those who try to accou n t for the concept i on of God on
na tu ra l ground s a l one,tha t
,posses s i ng su ch ideas , and
knowi ng the a tt r i bu tes of the I nfin i te (as ev i denced by
th e descr i pt i on of the phys ica l gods), the o l d bard s d id not
go fu rther , and gra sp the idea of God i n a ll its fu l ness .
B u t i t wa s not to be . I t s eems to be a lways th e fa te of
th e H i ndu th i nker,that h e no sooner abs trac ts the i dea
of God from na tu ra l phenomena ,than he loses s i gh t of
na tu re a l together, and merges all i n God ! H e carr i e s
h i s l ove of u n i ty i n to i t s h ighest fru i t i on , to the abso lu te
i dent i ty of the ego and the non-ego, m i n d and ma tter ,
subj ect and obj ect,the Crea tor and the crea t i on , God and
the u n iverse . H ence polythe i sm and i dea l pan thei sm
are two st ream s,whi ch
,from the ear l i es t t imes , have
run para l l e l i n I nd ia . A s i t was i n th e Ved ic age , so i t
i s now . Polythe i sm i s th e re l ig ion of the i gnorant
l R o' V o , X0 , 1 29 ,
74 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VE D A S .
Who has seen the first-born , when he who has no
bone s form) bare h im who had bones Where was
the l i fe , th e b lood , the sou l (se l f) of the wor l d ? Who
went to ask th i s from any man tha t knew it ? ” 1 H ere
the sou l,the Atman
,of the worl d can on ly mean tha t
se l f-exi s tent,free , i n dependen t s p i r i t , wh ich , though the
R i sh is d i d not grasp i t , i s the l i fe of all l ives , and th e
mov i ng power of all th i ngs . I n th i s sen se the sun is
metaphori ca l ly sa i d to be “ the sou l of a ll tha t moves
and rest s ” 2and l i kewi s e is the wi nd (Vata)
“ the sou l
of all the god s and sou rce of the wor l d (a tma devanam
okuvanasya garoka).3
Thi s i dea of the Sou l,or Sel f
,of the worl d deve loped i n
the B rahmanas and U pan i shads un t i l i t ab sorbed a ll other
i deas and ex istencies ,— u nt i l i t was regarded as the on ly
rea l en t i ty .
“ I n th e begi n n i ng th i s (world) was Se l f
a l one ; th ere was noth i ng e l se wi nki ng . H e thought ,Let me crea te the wor l d s
,and he c rea ted the worl d s . ” 4
A s th e web issues from the sp i der ; as l i tt l e s parks
proceed from fi re ; so from the one Sou l p roceed a ll
brea th i ng an ima l s,
a ll wor l d s,
a ll th e god s,
and all
be i ngs .
5 “ B e i ng i n th i s wor l d , we may know the
world in l i ke manne r a sou l , that conta ineth i t ; and th i s isc a l led Zeu s , be ing th e cau se of l ife to all th ings th at l iveand , th erefore , Zeu s or J up i ter is sa id to re ign over all th ings
(Ph oenuh es, in Cudworth , Int. Sy s. , vol . i . ,
1 R .-V . , i. , 164 , 4 .
2 Ibid . , i . , 1 1 5 , 1 .
3 Ibid . ,x .
, 1 68 , 4 .
1 A itareya-aryanaka Upanishad, 4 ; i . , 1 , 2 .
5 B rihadaryanaka Up , i i . , 1 , 20 ; M undaka Up ,1 , 7.
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 75
Su preme Sp i r i t ; i f there be ignorance of H im then
compl ete dea th en sue s ; those who know H im become
immorta l . ” 1 “ Sou l i s the l ord and k ing of a ll ; a s th e
spoke s i n the nave , so a ll worl d s and sou l s are fas tened
i n the one Sou l . ” 2 ' “ When a person regard s h i s own
sou l as tru ly god,a s the l ord of wha t was and is to be ,
th en he does not wi sh to concea l h im se l f from tha t Sou l .”
“ That Sou l th e gods adore as the l i gh t of l i gh ts , and
a s th e immorta l . ” 3 “ A s flowing r ivers are re solved
i n to the sea ,l os i ng the i r name s and form s
,so the wi se
,
freed from name and form , pas s i n to the D i v i n e Sp i ri t ,which i s grea te r than the grea t . H e who knows tha t
Supreme Sp i r i t becomes sp i r i t .“ “ Tha t d iv i n e S e l f is
not to be gra sped by trad i t i on , nor by understand i ng ,
nor by a ll reve la t i on . H e whom the S e l f choose s , by
h im a l on e i s the S e l f to be grasped . Tha t Se l f
chooses h im as h i s own .
” 5 “ Sages,endowed wi th
med i ta t ion and i n tu i t i on,saw the power of the D i v i ne
Se l f,concea l ed by h i s own qua l i t i e s . ” 6 I n the B rihad
aryanaka U pan i shad 7 the sage Yajnava lkhya te l l s h i s
favou r i te wi fe Ma itreyi , who des i res to become immor
ta l,tha t immorta l i ty con s i sts in perce iv i ng the D iv i ne
Sp i r i t , Atma,the ab so lu te Se l f, as th e on ly exi s tence .
1 B r ihadary anaka Up , 4 , 14 , 4 . S vetasva tara Up , 5 , 6 .
B rihadary anaka Up ,i i . , 5 , 1 5 .
3 B rihadaryanaka , 4 , 4 , 1 5 , 6 .
4 M andaka Up , i i i . , 2 , 5 , 9 .
Katha . U i. , 2 , 23 . S vetasvata ra Up , i. , 3 .
i i . , 4 , 1 3 .
76 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Whosoever looks for the B rahman c la ss e l sewhere
than in the Se l f, shou l d be abandoned by the B rahman
c lass . Whosoever l ooks for the Kshat r iya c lass e l sewhere
than i n the Se l f, shou l d be abandoned by the K shatriya
clas s . Whosoever l ooks for the worl ds e l sewhere than i n
the Se l f, shou l d be abandoned by the wor ld s . Whosoever
l ooks for th e D evas e l sewhere than i n the Sel f, Shou l d be
abandoned by the Devas . Whosoever l ooks for crea tu res
e l sewhere than in th e Se l f,shou ld be abandoned by the
c reatu res . Whosoever l ooks for everyth ing el sewhere
than in the Se l f,shou l d be abandoned by everyth i ng . Th i s
B rahman c la s s,th i s K sha tr iya c lass , these worl ds , these
D evas,these crea tu res
,th i s everyth i ng , a ll i s tha t Sel f.
”
A s all wa ters find the i r centre i n the sea,a ll touches
i n the sk i n,a ll tas tes i n the tongue , all sme l l s i n th e
nose,all col ou rs i n th e eye , all sounds i n th e ear
,all
percepts i n the m i n d,all knowledge i n the h eart , a ll
ac t i ons i n the hands , a ll movemen ts i n the feet , and a ll
th e Vedas i n s peech . A S a lump of sa l t , when
th rown i n to wa ter,becomes d i sso lved i n to water , and
cou l d not be taken ou t aga i n,bu t wherever we taste
th e water i t i s sa l t ; thu s ver i ly , O Ma itreyi , does th i s
great Be i ng , end le ss , u n l im i ted,con s i s t i ng of noth i ng
bu t knowledge,r i s e from ou t these e l emen ts , and van i sh
aga i n i n to them . When he h as departed , there i s no
more knowl edge,I say ,
O M aitreyi' Thu s spoke
Yajnavalkhya .
Then M aitreyi sa i d , H ere thou has t bewi l dered me,
s i r,when thou sayes t that
,hav i ng departed , th ere i s no
more knowledge ”.
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 77
B u t Yajnava lkhya rep l i ed ,“ O M a itrey
’
i,I have sa i d
noth i ng tha t is bewi l der i ng . Th i s i s enough , O beloved ,
for wi sdom .
F or when th ere i s , as i t were , d ua l i ty , th en one sees
the o ther , one sme l l s th e other , one hea rs the other , one
sa lu te s th e other,one perce ives the other , one knows th e
other ; bu t when the Se l f on ly is a ll th i s , h ow shou l d he
sme l l another,how shou l d h e s ee another , how shou l d
he hear another,how S hou l d h e sa lu te anoth e r , how
shou l d h e perce ive another,how shou l d h e know another
H ow shou l d he know h im by whom he knows a ll th i s
H ow,O be loved
,shou l d h e know (h im se l f) the knower ?
“ The a sp i rant mu st l earn the fa l s i ty of p lu ra l i ty , the
fi ct i t i ou s na tu re of dua l i ty i n experi ence , and the sol e
rea l i ty of the super-sen s i b l e and un i tary se l f. H e mu st
crush every sense,and su ppress every thought tha t h is
m i n d may become a m i rror to reflect the pu re,Charac
terless be i ng , though t and b l i ss .” 1
2 . BR A H M A . In the R i g-Veda B rahma, from a root
s i gn i fy i n g force , wi sh , or wi l l , mean s p rayer , or sacred
text,becau se a subt l e i nflu ence was supposed to aecom
pany the u tterance of a sacred form u la,su ffic i en t ly strong
to bend the god s ,and make the act of sac r ifi ce effec tua l ?
And B rahman i n the mascu l i n e mean s,
“ he of p rayer ,
the man who u t ter s prayers,the p r i est , and gradua l ly
1 Gough’s Ph ilosophy of the Upanishads , p . 1 3 8 .
R . V . ,i., 3 1 , 1 8 ; i . , 3 7 , 4 ; i. , 62 ,
1 3 ; i. , i i . , 18 , 7 ;
i i . , 2 3 , i i . , i i i .,
i i i . , iv . ,1 6 , 20-1 ; iv . ,
2 2 ,1 ; v i . , 69 , 7 ; v i i . , v i i i .
, 77 , 4 ; v i i i . , 78 , 3 ; x. , 1 3 , 1 ;
x . , x .
,x . ,
105 , 8 .
78 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDAS .
the B rahman by profess i on .
1 Come , I n dra ,l e t u s make
prayers wh ich magn i fy thee .
” A new
prayer (orah /na nary/a) has been made for thee .
” 2
The prayer (ara/zma ) i s my protec t ing a rmou r .
Vak , the goddes s of speech,says : “ I myse l f make
known th i s , wh ich is agreeab l e both to god s and men .
H im whom I l ove I make terr i b l e,I make h im a
p r i est” 4(krakmanam). I nd ra i s a p r i es t
”
H e i t is whom they ca l l a R i sh i,a pr i est , a p iou s
sacrificer (riskim bra/imananz Agn i i n
R .-V .
,v i . , 1 6 , i s ca l l ed B rahmanaskave ,
wh ich i s ex
p la i n ed mantrasya saadayitar ,
“sou nder or art i cu lator of
prayer .” The pr i es t s (bra/zmanak) magn i fy Ind ra by
thei r pra i s e . B rahma i n the sen se of a god does not
appear i n the R i g , the o l des t Veda ; bu t i n th e A tharva ,
the mos t recen t,he is spoken of as a god “ who dwe l l s
i n th e h ighest p lace , whose mea su re i s th e ea rth , whose
bel ly i s the a tmosphere , whose head is th e sky, and who
i s worthy of a ll reverence ’
.
6 I n the B rahmanas he is
more fu l ly deve l oped,and is spoken of as the “ first
born , the “se l f—exi stent
,the
“c rea tor of heaven and
earth , and th e “ best of the god s
No wonder tha t the anci en t H i n du s,who were so
impres sed wi th myster i ou s powers everywhere , de ified
1 R .-V . ,
I . , 80 ,I ; n . , 2 , 5 ; x . , 85 , 3 ; n . , 3 9 , 1 ; vn .
, 42 , 1 ;
v i i i . , 8 1 , 30 ; i x ., 1 1 2 , 1 ; x . ,
v i i . , 103 , 1 .
Ibid. , v i i i . , iv . , 16 , 2 1 .
3 Ibid. , v i . , 75 , 1 9 .
‘1 Ibid . , x . , 1 25 , 5 .
5 Ibid . ,v i i i .
,1 6 , 7 ; x . ,
107 , 6 .
A .-V .
,x . , 7 , 1 7 , 24 , 3 2 .
7 S atapatha brahmana , v i i i . , 2 1 , 7, 3 .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VED A S 79
the power of p raye r . They h ad a l ready de ified the
Soma j u i ce , i n con sequence of its st imu la t i ng effect,
enab l i n g men to do work beyond thei r na tu ra l strength .
And now tha t they had u nwavering fa i th i n the a lm i gh ty
power of prayer,“ to bend the most i n tractab l e of the
gods to gran t wha tever boon they asked,wha t was more
natu ra l than tha t they shou l d de i fy i t Wha t was more
na tu ra l than to conc l ude tha t th e power wh ich con trol l ed
the gods , and the channe l th rough wh ich all b l ess i ngs
flowed to them se l ve s , mu s t be above a ll other powers ,
mu s t i n fact be “ That One who is above and beyond
a ll exi s tences
Agn i wa s before ca l l ed B rahmanaspa t i,the “ Lord of
prayer,i n two sen ses : he was the hearer of prayer
as a god , and the presen ter of prayer to the gods as
med ia tor or H i gh Pri e st . I n the de ifica t ion of prayer,
B rahmanaspa t i d i sappeared . H is fu nc t i on as the hearer
of prayer was t ran sfe rred to prayer person ifi ed
and h is funct i on as a H i gh Pr i e s t or med ia tor wa s
t ran sferred to the B rahman s , the u tterers Of prayer .
Th i s was th e o ri g i n of bo th the god B rahma,wh ich
now ho l d s the fi rs t p lace i n the H i n du tr iad, and the
B rahman cas te , wh ich ha s ru l ed I nd ia with a rod of i ron
for twenty-s i x centu ri es at l ea s t ! Wha t an awfu l de
grada t i on of rel i g ion to subst i tu te the col d,u n feel i ng
,
metaphys ica l god , B rahma,for the br i gh t
,humane
sympa thet ic Agn i , the “ fa ther,brother
,and fr i end of
all and to exchange the haughty d i sda i n fu l B rahman,
wh o con s id ers h im se l f defi led by con tact wi th any one
be low h im se l f i n the soc ia l sca l e , for the H i gh Pri es t
80 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
who though god , condescended to be the guest of every
one,sm i l i ng on a ll wi thou t d i s t i n ct ion I
B rahma grew and became the supreme god of the
l ea rned . H e gradua l ly absorbed the i dea of Sou l,whether
i nd iv i dua l or un iversa l,and became i den t ica l w i th all
ex istencies . I n the A itareya Upan i shad i t i s sa i d , tha t
Or i g i na l ly th i s u n iverse was i n deed Sou l on ly,noth ing
e l se whatever ex i s ted ”
;1
and th en,i n an swer to the
qu es t i on — “ What i s th i s Sou l ? i t i s s tated,
“ Th i s
i s B rahma ; he i s I n dra ; he i s Prajapat i ; these gods
are he and so are the five p r imary e l emen ts .
Whatever l ive s,or wa l k s , or fl i es , or wha t i s immovab l e ,
all that i s the eye of i n te l l i gence . I n te l l i gen ce i s
B rahma the grea t one .
” 2 A l l th e un i verse i s B rahma ;
from h im i t spr i ngs , i n to h im i t i s d i s so lved ; i n h im i t
brea thes — so med i tate thou wi th a ca lm m i nd .
” 3 “ As,
from b laz i ng fi re,spa rk s , be i ng l i ke u nto fi re , fly forth
a thou sandfold,thu s are var i ou s be ings brought forth
from the Imper i shab l e , and retu rn h i ther “ Lord
of the U n iver se,gl ory to Thee ; Thou art the Se l f of all
Thou art the maker of a ll , th e enj oyer of a ll ; Thou art
l i fe , and the l o rd of a ll p l easu re and j oy .
” 5 H ere Sel f
both d iv i n e and human,as wel l as a ll ex istencies , are
ga th ered up i n B rahma . M ax M iiller says , “ I t was an
epoch i n the h i story of the human m i n d when the iden
t i ty of th e mascu l i n e Sel f and th e neu tra l B rahma was
1 A itareya Up. i i . , 4 , 1 , 1 .
2 Ibid. ,i i . , 6 , 5 , 6 .
3 Khand . Up. , In . ,14 , 1 , 2 .
‘1 M undak. Up. , i i . , 1 , 1 .
5 M a itr . B r . Up. , 5 , 1 .
82 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
ev i den ce tha t B rahma i s the last d iv i n e concept i on of
the Veda s ; and i t is a noteworthy fac t tha t wi th the
d i sappearance of th e concept i on of God as a person
a l i ty,the eth ica l con sc i ou sness of s i n a l so d isappeared .
F or, apart from a persona l God , there can be no S in
as th e tran sgress i on of an obj ect i ve law . Mu ch less
can there be when a man i s rega rded as on ly the fic
t it iou s appearance of one infin i te charac ter l es s en t i ty ,
ca l l ed B rahma,wh ich i s “ ne i th er effect nor cau se ,
ne i ther pa s t nor fu tu re ; whi ch i s wi thou t sou nd,with
ou t tou ch,wi thou t form
,wi thou t d ecay
,withou t smel l
,
withou t begi n n i ng,wi thou t end ”
‘ 1 wh i ch i s “ wi thou t
brea th , w i thou t mind , pu re , h igher than the h i ghes t ,Imper i shab l e ”
.
2 “ I t i s not woman , i t is not man,
nor i s i t n eu ter ; wha tever body i t takes , with tha t i t i s
j o i ned .
” 3
We may su i tab ly c l o se th i s s ect i on in the word s of
D r . Chr i s t l i eb , “ I f the thoughts of the o l d H i n du s d i d
somet imes r i se from the contemp la t ion of var i ou s d e ified
na tu ra l phenomena to that of one pr ima l cau se of a ll
th i ngs , th is cau se was rega rded not as the one God ,
bu t as an impersona l undefined ex i s tence,of wh ich a ll
tha t cou l d be sa i d was,that is not wha t i t i s ; wi th wh i ch ,
therefore,every persona l commu n ion i n prayer wou l d be
imposs i bl e ” .
4 Th i s qu i t e agrees wi th the B rihadaryanaka
1Katha . Up.
,i ., 3 , 1 5 .
2 M undaka Up. , i i . , 1 , 2 .
3 S vetasvatara Up.
,v . 1 0 .
1 Modern D oubt and Christian B elief.
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 83
U pan i shad wh ich says tha t the teach i ng of B rahma i s
N o,N o 1
3 . T he Or igin of the Vedic Concep t God .
To a superfic ia l ob server,the Ved ic gods appea r noth i ng
more than natu ra l phenomena person ified and worsh i pped .
O r,i n the langu age of Professo r M ax Mu l l er , “ They are
masks wi thou t an ac tor,th e c rea t i on s o f man
,not h is
crea tor,they are nom i na
,not n um ina , names wi thou t
be i ngs,not be ings wi thou t names ” . Com pa ra t i ve Ph i l
o l ogy has d i sc l osed the i r or i g i na l phys ica l import , and
the myth s of ages,which h ad c lustered a rou nd them
,
have been sca ttered l ike darkness before the dawn . Let
H i ndu s ponder th i s,and they wi l l be conv i nced tha t
the re l ig i on of the i r ance stors in the far-off Ved ic age
has not been a l together i napt ly denom i na ted “ Phy
S iolatry
And yet , we S hou l d b e do ing i nj u st ice to tha t re l i g i on
by represent ing i t as noth i n g more than Phys io la try
No re l i gi on has ever exi sted wi thou t recogn i s i ng the
supersen suou s or superna tu ra l . Even the l owest fet i sh
worsh i ppers do not worsh i p a common s tone or a com
mon p i ece of bone,bu t s tones and bone s wh ich are
su pposed to pos sess some i nv i s i b l e,su perhuman power .
And so th e Ved ic re l ig i on was not a ll na tu re,bu t na tu re
and the superna tu ra l blended so myster i ou s ly tha t th e
1 B rih . A r . , i i i . ,
84 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
one cou l d not be d i st i ngu i shed from the other. 1 Were
i t a ll na tu re , there wou l d be no room for person ificat i on,
s i nce person ifica t i on is th e a s cr i p t i on of human l i fe and
a ct i v i t i es to obj ect s not natu ra l ly possess i n g th em . The
Ved ic A ryan s , by person i fy i ng and worsh i pp i ng the
obj ects of na tu re , Show tha t they were con sc i ou s of
depende nce u pon , and re la t i on sh i p to , someth ing h i gher
than na tu re . Person ificat ion imp l i e s the knowl edge of
a person , and the person ifi ca t i on of a na tu ra l obj ec t
as an obj ect of worsh ip imp l i es the pos sess i on of the
con cept , more or l ess c l ea r,of wha t we denom i na te God.
The qu es t ion s then ar i s e— Wha t i s th e natu re of th i s
concep t H ow wa s i t formed Wha t was the genes i s
of the i dea of God ? D i d man or ig i na l ly evo lve i t ou t
of h i s i gnorance of the u nknown cau ses of the order and
eccen tr ic i t i e s of na tu ra l phenomena,wh ich st ru ck h im
with wonder and awe ? or from fri gh tfu l dream s , the
resu l t of over-ea t i ng or i s i t th e na tu ra l and i n ev i tab l e
p rodu c t of th e human m i n d when i n con tac t wi th the
externa l worl d E x nihilo nih ilfi t, or , as the H i n du ph i lo
so ph ers pu t i t , N avastuno vastu sidditi ? The cau se mu s t be
adequa te to produ ce the effect . U n l es s man, therefore,
were en dowed wi th the power or facu l ty to conce i ve and
to adore some i nv i s i b l e su perhuman Be i ng, he cou l d no
more evolve the i dea of such a B e i ng from gross ignor
ance,ru de fea rs , or fr ightfu l d ream s , than the dog or the
1 “ T h e se rude bards h ave not ana lysed th e i r consc iousne ssth e mate ria l and th e sp i r i tua l are st i l l b lended togeth e r inth e i r concept ions (J ohnson
’
s A sia tic R eligions).
T H E THEOLOGY OF T H E VEDAS . 85
monkey . What we wan t to know is the or igin of the
facu l ty or th e tendency wh ich i rres i s t i b ly l ead s man to
recogn i se and worsh ip some obj ec t as God . Thi s ten
deney,pre sen t everywhere
,l i ke a weft ru nn i n g th rough
the warp of human h i s tory,expres se s an eterna l fac t ,
viz . , tha t man is constituted a religious being. Thi s t en
deney i s as i n sepa rab l e from h i s natu re a s th e tendency
to express h i s thoughts i n a rt icu la te s peech . H en ce he
grows i n to re l i g i on a s na tu ra l ly and u ncon sc i ou s ly as
he grows i n to manhood . H e no sooner wake s to the
con sc i ou snes s tha t he is a be i ng sepa rat e from na tu re ,than he fee l s h is dependen ce u pon
,and mora l re lat ion
sh ip to , some B e i ng above na tu re,whose sm i l e s are h i s
j oy , whose frown s are h i s woe . Th i s i s the fi r s t sen se
of the Godhead,th e sensus numinis ; “
a sen se sub l ime of
someth i ng far more deep ly i n terfu sed a sense , not th e
resu l t of reason i ng or genera l i sa t i on,bu t an immed ia te
percepti on,as rea l and i rres i st i b l e as tha t of the ego .
I n perce iv i n g the I nfin i te,we ne i th er count , nor
measu re , nor compare,nor name . We know not wha t
i t i s , bu t we know tha t i t i s , and we know i t becau se
we actua l ly fee l i t , and are brough t i n con tac t w i th i t .
I f i t seems too bol d to say tha t man ac tua l l y sees the
i nv i s i b l e , l e t u s say tha t h e su ffers from the i nv i s i b l e ,and th i s i nv i s i b l e is onlv a s pec ia l name for th e I n
fin ite .
” 1 And a s man is con sc i ou s of the ego before
knowi ng what man is,so he i s con sc i ous of the super
na tu ra l before knowing wha t God i s . Th i s is necessa r i ly
1 M ax M u l ler ’s H ibbert Lectures , p . 3 8 .
86 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
a very vagu e and i ncomp lete i dea of the Godhead , so
vagu e as to e lu de defin i t i on,and so i ncomp l ete a s not
even to be named .
1 H erodotu s te l l s u s tha t the Pelas
gian s for a l ong t ime offered prayers and sacr ifices to
the god s w i thou t hav ing names for any one of them ;
and ,accord ing to Ta c i tu s
,the anc i en t Germans wor
sh ipped God as“ that s ecret th i ng known on ly by
reverence and we have seen tha t som e of th e Ved ic
bards expres s the i r con sc i ou s ness of H im by the phra se
The One ” or “ Tha t One '
. A venerab l e o l d B rah
I W i th th e fi rst deve lopment of c onsc iou sness , th e re grows
up , as a part of i t, th e innate fee l ing th at our l ife , natu ra l andsp ir i tua l , is not in ou r power to su sta in or pro long ; th at th ereis One above u s on wh om we are dependent , wh ose ex i stencewe learn
,and wh o se pre sence we rea l i se
,by th e su re inst inct
of prayer . Aga in ,
“ \V e are compe l led by th e c onst i tut iono f our m ind to be l ieve in th e e x i stenc e of an Abso lu te and In
fin i te B e ing,—a be l ief wh ich appears forced upon u s as th e
comp lement of our consc iou sness of th e re lat ive and th e fini te ”
(M anse l’
s B anzpton L ectures , pp . 8 1,
A nd S ir W i l l iamH am i l ton , th ough ma inta in ing th at
“th e abso lute is conce ived
mere ly by a negat ive o f conc e ivabi l i ty ,”
remark s th at,
“ by a
wonde rfu l reve lat ion we are th u s in th e very consc iou sne ss of
our inabi l i ty to conc e ive augh t above th e re lat ive and fin i te,
insp i red w i th a be l ief in th e ex i stenc e of someth ing uncon
dit ioned, beyond th e sph ere of a ll compreh ension A nd
H erbe rt S penc er says , “ B e s ides th at defin i te consc iou snessof wh ich Logic formu late s th e laws
,th ere is a l so an indefinite
c onsc iou sne ss wh ich cannot be formu lated. B e s ides c omp leteth ough ts, and be s ide s th e th ough ts wh ich , th ough incomp lete ,admi t of comp let ion ,
th e re are th ough ts wh ich i t is impossib leto c omp lete , and yet wh ich are st i l l rea l , in th e sense th atth ey are norma l affec t ions of th e m ind (F irst P rinciples, p .
T H E THEO LOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 87
man to l d u s on ce , with fee l i ngs of deep concern , “ I
am very glad that you have come to my v i l lage to-day ,
for you wi l l te l l me abou t tha t ‘ Great One ’ whom all
shou l d worsh i p . I am grea t ly perp l exed abou t H im .
I know tha t H e i s , bu t I d o not know who H e i s,or
where to find H im .
” Then poi n t i ng to th e sun,he sa i d ,
I have been l ook i ng for H im there , bu t cannot find
H im ; and i n th i s i do l,
” po in t i ng to the image of Vi shnu
in th e temp le,
“ bu t H e i s not there . I have searched
for H im i n th i s book —ho l d i n g up the V i sh nu Pu rana“ bu t cannot find H im .
” An d so the anc i en t A ryan s ,
not knowing H im of whose exi s tence they were certa i n,
tr i ed to find H im everywhere in the phenomena of na tu re .
They person ifi ed these ; for an obj ec t of worsh i p mu st be
a person capabl e of knowi ng,of fee l i ng
,and of exerc i s i ng
i nflu ence , to whom they cou l d pray and offer sacrifice .
1
I t is on ly by conce iv i ng H im as a con sc i ou s B ei ng
tha t we can stand i n any re l ig i ou s re la t i on to H im ;
t hat we can form such a repre sen ta t i on of H im a s is
demanded by ou r sp i r i tua l wan t s , i n su ffic i en t though i t
be to sa t i sfy ou r i n te l l ectua l cu r i os i ty .
” 2
B u t though the Ved ic A ryan s were ignoran t of God as
a defin i te B e i ng,separa te from na tu ra l phenomena ,
they
1 Vene rat ion or grat i tude towards any be ing imp l ie s be l iefin th e consc iou s act ion of th at be ing, imp l ie s asc ript ion o f a
prompt ing mot ive of a h igh k ind , and deeds re su l t ing from i t
grati tude cannot be enterta ined towa rds someth ing wh ich is
unconsc iou s (H e rbert Spence r , N ineteenth Century , for ju ly,1 884 )
Manse l’
s B ampton Lectures, pp. 57, 58.
88 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VE DAS .
possessed a remarkab ly accu ra te knowl edge of the ac t i on s
and a ttr i bu tes wh ich pre-em i n ent ly belong to H im . They
ascr i bed to the person ified e l ements of na tu re th e fun c
t i on s of Crea tor , Preserver , and Ru l er ; and the a ttr i bu te s
of I nfin i ty , Omn i potence , Omn isc i ence , Immorta l i ty ,R i ghteou s nes s , H o l i n es s , and M ercy . Thi s knowl edge
i s far more defin i te and exten s i ve than tha t gi ven i n
the sensus numinis . H ow d i d they acqu i re i t ? An
an swer to th i s qu est i on wi l l make c l ea r both the va l i d i ty
of ou r defin i t i on of the “ fi rst sen se of the Godhead
and th e mean s by wh ich i t was deve l oped,so as to
embrace the l ead i ng charac ter i s t ic s of the De i ty . There
are on ly th ree an swers conceivab l e,viz (1 ) They
acqu i red i t by Intu i t i on, (2) by Experi ence , or (3 ) by
Reve la t i on .
1 . D i d th ey acqu i re It by I n tu i t i on We have a l ready
sta ted wha t knowledge of God we conce i ve man capab l e
of acqu i r ing by i n tu i t i on ; viz .,a vagu e and i ndefin i te
i dea of the su pernatu ra l in the na tu ra l , of some Bei n g
above on whom he depend s,
and to whom he owes
homage . B u t who tha t B e i n g i s , and what H is attri
bu tes are , he h as no mean s of knowing .
1 I f th i s be
correc t , i t fo l l ows tha t the an c i e n t A ryans d id not acqu i re
1 T h e re l igiou s sent iment,as Manse! says , “wh ich impe ls
men to be l ieve in and worsh ip a S upreme B e ing, is an ev idenceof H is ex i stenc e , bu t not an exh ib it ion of H is ch arac te r ” . A nd
aga in ,
“ T h e conv ic t ion th at an Infin i te B e ing ex i sts seems
forc ed upon u s by th e man ife st incomp letene ss of our fin i teknow ledge , but we h ave no rat iona l means wh ateve r of determin ing what is the natu re of that B e ing
”.
90 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
A l l these gods are a l i ke Su preme, Crea tors , Preser
vers , Omn i poten t , Omn i sc i en t , B eneficent , Immor ta l .
Among you ,O gods , there i s none tha t i s sma l l
,none
tha t is young ; for a ll are grea t i n deed ” 1 H eaven and
Earth are sa i d to be the pa ren t s of th e gods , not on ly of
the i n fer i or on e s , bu t of the grea t god s , I n dra ,Agn i
, and
Sarya ; and each of these aga in is sa i d to be the Crea tor
of H eaven and Ea rth,as wel l as of a ll th ings v i s i b l e and
i nv i s i b l e . I n dra i s grea te r th an all ; Agn i compre
hend s a ll the god s a s th e c i rcum feren ce of a whee l does
i t s s pokes .
2 S i'
Irya i s the concen tra t i on of a ll power i n
one , the wonderfu l h os t of rays ;” “ the eye of M i t ra ,
sou l of a ll tha t moves or re sts
Va runa i s the l ord of a ll,of H eaven and Earth ; and yet
was nu rsed in th e lap of Ad i t i . Soma“ generates a ll
the god s , and u phol d s th e worl d s H e is the maker
of H eaven and Ear th,of Agn i
,of S I
'
Irya ,of I ndra ,
and
Varuna,Agn i
of “ V isvakarman i s w i s e and pervad i ng ,
C rea tor , D i s poser , F a ther , h ighest obj ect of v i s i on” 5
The Dawn is the “ moth er o f th e gods,eye of all the
earth,l i gh t of th e sacrifice
”.
6 Ad i t i is not on ly the
mother of all the gods,bu t i s i den t i ca l w i th a ll tha t
exi s t s ; and yet Ad i t i i s both the mother and the
daughter of Daksha . Dak sha wa s born of Ad i t i , and
Ad i t i from Daksha . F or Ad i t i was born , O Daksha ,
sh e who is thy daugh ter ; after her the gods were born ,
1 R .-V . ,
v i i i . , 3 0, 12 Ibid. , v. , 1 3 , 6 .
3 Ibid .,i.,1 1 5 , 1 .
4 Ibid . ,ix .
, 96, 5 , 6 .
5 Ibid.
,x . , 82 , 1 , 3 .
6 Ibid.
,1 1 3 , 19 .
T H E TH EOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 9 1
the b les sed who sha re immorta l i ty .
” 1 Then these god s
are mu tua l ly i n terchangeab le . Thou,Agn i , a rt Ind ra ,
art Vi shnu ,becamest M i t ra when k i nd l ed ; i n th ee , the
son of s trength,are a ll the god s .
” 2 I n dra says,
“ I was
Manu,I am th e sun ,
I am the w i se R i sh i Kaksh ivan”
.
3
I t m i gh t be obj ected tha t the co sm ica l func t i on s of th ese
gods are su ffic i en t to a ccou n t for the s im i la r i ty of the i r
descr i p t i on , and the i n terchangeab l en ess of the i r names .
True ; bu t tha t on ly proves tha t the Ved ic Aryan s were
ignoran t of the tru e God ,though they po s ses sed a know
ledge more or l es s c l ea r of H is a t t r i bu te s and func t i on s
I t m i gh t be affi rmed tha t th e persona l i ty of God was
ori g i na l ly apprehended by the sou l , bu t tha t i n cou rse of
t ime i t gradua l ly faded away so as to l eave noth i ng
beh i nd bu t H is a ttr i bu te s . B u t (a) th i s is i ncons i sten t
wi th the su ppos i t i on that man possesse s a power tran s
cending that of the sensus numinis , by m ean s of wh i ch he
d i rect ly perce ives God . F or as l ong as man i s con sc i ou s ,he mu st be con sc i ou s of tha t power ; and i f tha t power
once su pp l i ed h im wi th the knowledge of God and H is
a ttr i bu tes , there i s no reason to conc lude that i t wi l l not
a lways do so . (b) H ad th e Ved ic A ryan s acqu i red the i r
knowledge of the d i v i n e a ttr i bu tes and fu nct i on s by intu i
t i on,and a s sum i ng that that i n tu i t i on imp l i e s a knowl edge
of the d iv i n e Person,and tha t th e men ta l and sp i r i tua l
n ecess i t i e s of man are s im i lar th roughou t th e wor l d , i t
is na tu ra l to suppose tha t all other na t i on s wou l d have
1 R .-V .
,x. , 72 , 4 , 5 . Ibid .
,i i .
,1, 3 ; v .
, 3 , 1 .
3 Ibid .
,iv .
, 26, 1 .
92 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VE DA S .
acqu i red d iv i n e knowledge i n the same way . There is
no fac t , however , better known to the s tuden t s of anc i en t
Rel i g i on s and Mythol ogi es than tha t no i nd iv i dua l s
mu ch l es s na t i on s— when l eft to th emse l ve s , have ever
acqu i red anyth i ng l i ke a c l ea r and certa i n concept i on of
a Supreme Persona l B e i ng d i st i nct from natu re .
“ Even
P la to d i d not make h is way up to the i dea of a d iv i n e ,
se l f-con sc i ou s,Persona l B e i ng
,nor even d i s t i nct ly pro
pounded the qu est ion of the persona l i ty of God. I t i s
tfue tha t Ar i s tot l e ma in ta i n ed more defi n i te ly than P la to
tha t the De i ty m u st be a persona l B e i ng . B u t even for
h im, i t was not an ab so lu te
,free
,c reat ive power , bu t
one l im i ted by pr imord ia l matter ; not the worl d’
s Creator ,bu t on ly one who gave shape to the rude ma ter ia l s , and
so not tru ly absolu te .
” 1
2 . I f the Ved ic Aryan s d i d not acqu i re the i r knowledge
of the d iv i n e func t ion s and a t tr i bu tes i n tu i t i ve ly , d i d they
acqu i re i t em p i r ica l ly ? We acqu i re knowledge by expe
rience , by what we feel , hea r and see . A l l knowledge i s
e i ther produced or occa s i oned by sen se and rea son . And
from one poi n t of v iew there i s noth i ng i n the i n te l l ect
except wha t has pas sed th rough these two avenues . B u t
sen se and rea son , we are to ld , are fin i te,and dea l on ly
wi th fi n i te th i ngs ; and hence whatever t ran scend s these
l im i ts is unknown and u nknowab l e . And as the i dea of
God tran scend s the app reh en s ion of sen se and the com
prehen s ion of rea son , i t i s p ronou nced a mere ha l luc i na
t i on , and th e grand a t t r i bu tes a sc r i bed to H im are sa i d
1 D r. Ch rist lieb’
s M odern D oubt and Chr istian B elief, p . 78 .
T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
impres s i on s .
1 The conclu s ion s of exper i ence are wider
than its da ta . H ence there appea rs to be no a pri ori
reason why th e Ved ic Aryans shou l d not have acqu i red
the i r knowl edge of the d iv i n e a tt r i bu te s and func t ion s by
the impres s i on s of sen se and th e reflect ions of reason
the m i n d i n contac t w i th th e externa l‘
wor l d .
We have seen a l ready how they appa rently acqu i red the
concept of the I nfin i te by con temp lat i ng the bou nd l ess
nes s of the F i rmamen t , from wh ich the dawn and the
sun flashed forth every morn i n g,to wh ich th ey gave
express ion i n Ad i t i .
The regu lar i ty wi th wh ich the heaven ly bod ies move,
the su cces s i on of day and n i gh t, and the per i od ica l re
cu rrence of the sea son s,with i n the sphere of Varu na
,
the H eaven —God ,m i gh t have suggested the i dea tha t he
i s the Ru l er of all th i ngs v is i b l e and i nv i s ib l e,whose
laws , vra tas, are fixed and u nas sa i lab l e .
2
The permanence of the F i rmamen t as con tra sted wi ththe V i s i b l e movemen ts of the sun ,
moon,and sta rs
,the
1 H obbe s ca l l s th e idea of th e Infin i te an absu rd speech ,
becau se we h ave no conc ept ion of anyth ing w e c a l l infinite(L evia than ,
i ., Wh at H e rbert S pence r says of th e
Abso lute is an answer to H obbe s , subst i tut ing th e “ In
fin i te ”for th e “ Abso lu te “ T o say th at we cannot know
th e ‘ Infin i te ’
is by imp l icat ion to affirm th at th e re is an
Infin i te . In th e very den ia l of our power to learn wha t th eInfin i te is , th ere l i e s h idden th e assumpt ion tha t it is, and th e
mak ing of th i s assumpt ion prove s th at th e Infin i te h as been
pre sent to th e m ind, not as noth ing, bu t as some th ing (F irst
P r inciples, p .
2R .-V .
,i i .
,27, 10 ; Y o
, 85 ) 3 ; V ii-a 87a 6 ; 54) 1 8°
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 95
c l ouds,and s torm s , and the changes and bu st l e of th i s
noi sy worl d,m i gh t have orig i na ted th e i dea of U ndecay i ng
(agara), Immorta l (amar ta), or E terna l .1
Aga i n , when contemp la t i ng th e H eaven-God, en throned
h igh above the earth,wi th the sun ,
moon,and s tars , as
eyes penetra t i ng th e darkne ss,and seei n g all that takes
p lace in th e worl d bel ow,wha t is more natu ra l than
tha t they shou l d ca l l h im A sura Visvadevas, the A l l
knowing Sp i r i t,or the Omn i sc i en t 2
Moreover,perce iv i ng tha t l i gh t and form ,
col ou r and
beau ty,emerge every morn i ng
,ou t of a gloom i n wh i ch
a ll obj ec ts seem confounded , the Ved i c A ryans m i gh t
su ppose that i n l i ke manner the br i gh tnes s , order and
beau ty of the wor l d,had spru ng from da rkness
,i n wh ich
the el emen ts of all th i ngs h ad ex i sted i n i nd i s t i ngu i shab l e
chaos .
3 And s i nce i t i s the sun tha t d i sperse s th e dark
ness of the n i gh t, and gives back to man the H eaven
and th e Earth every morn i ng,i t is ea sy to understand
how they m i gh t have conc luded tha t the sun brought
them forth from the ori g i na l chaos, and hence tha t h e is
the i r Crea tor .1
Aga i n , th e brigh t l i ght of th e sun ca l l s men from the i r
s lumber every morn i ng , and with i t s wa rm glow en l i ven s
the worl d , and cau ses the earth to bri ng forth her fru i t s
and so i t i s conce i vab l e tha t the i dea of Preserver o r
En l ivener orig i nated .
5
'
1R .-V .
, v i . , 70 , 1 , 2 . Ibid .
,v i i i .
, 42 , 1 ; v i i . , 60, 3 , 6 ; i. , 50 , 2 , 73Ibid.
,x.
,1 29 .
‘1 Ibid.
,i. , 1 1 5 , 1 ; x.
,170 , 4 .
5 Ibid.
,i.,1 1 5, 1 ; vi i . , 63 , 2 , 4 .
96 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Las t ly , by app ly i ng super la t i ve ep i thets to th e sun,i t
wou l d become suprem e , god among gods, and th e
d iv i n e l eader of a ll the god s and so the concept i on of
Omn i potence m i gh t have been formed .
1
N ow i t i s con ce i vab l e that i n th i s way the fun ct i on s
of Crea tor,Pre server , and Ru l er , and the a ttr i bu tes of
I nfin i ty,Omn i poten ce
,Omn i sc i ence and E tern i ty m i ght
have been emp irica lly acqu i red . And as i t i s na tu ra l to
su ppose tha t a ll the excel lent qua l i t i es of wh ich man i s
con sci ou s a s ex i s t ing i n h imse l f,mu st necessar i ly exi s t i n
the same manner, bu t i n an i nfin i te ly h i gher degree
,i n
the obj ec t of h i s worsh ip , we may conce ive tha t thu s the
mora l a t tr i bu te s of H ol i n es s,J u s t i ce , M ercy , Love and
Goodness a scr i bed to God m igh t have been acqu i red .
When we say tha t i t is conce ivab l e tha t the Ved ic
Aryan s acqu i red the i r knowledge of the d iv i n e a ttr i bu tes
and func t i on s emp irica lly ,we mu s t remember that i t i s con
ceivable by us who a l ready posses s a knowledge of them
and hence bri ng tha t knowl edge to the contemp lat i on of
na tu ra l phenomena . I t was very d i fferent w i th the Ved ic
A ryan s,for th ey
,ex hypothesi, h ad no su ch an teceden t
knowl edge . A l l tha t they possessed was the con sc i ous
nes s of the su perna tu ra l i n the na tu ra l , wh ich they cou l d
n e i ther define,nor separa te from the na tu ra l , and wh ich ,
con sequen t ly ,th ey worsh i pped together wi th the na tura l
as a person . The qu es t ion then a r i ses— I s i t probab le
tha t they , s tart i ng wi th that con sc i ou sness only , e labor
a ted the i r knowledge of the d iv i n e a ttr i bu tes and funct i ons
1 R .-V .
,i., 50 , 10 ; v i i i . , 90 , 1 2 . S ee Profe ssor M ax M il ller
’
s
H ibbert Lectures.
98 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
exaggera ted expres s i on s u ttered i n the ecsta t i c fervou r of
prayer and pra i se— poet i ca l exuberance— for i n that case
i t is not p robab l e that su ch express i on s wou l d have been
ca lm ly co l l ected,and preserved i n su ch large numbers ,
withou t bet ray i ng the con sc i ou snes s of the i r contrad ictory
charac ter i n some note or commen t ” . N e i ther does
i t appea r poss i b l e to refer the i n cons i stency to d i fferen t
epoch s or d i vers i t i e s of worsh i p ; for i t i s u ndoubted ly the
d i st i ngu i sh i ng fea tu re of th e whol e Ved ic theology , wh ich
has been str i k i ng ly expres sed by Professor M ax Mul l er
in the fo l lowi ng word s,
“ Each god’
i s to the m i n d of
the su pp l iant as good as all the god s . H e i s fe l t at th e
t ime as Suprem e and Ab so lu te,i n sp i te of th e neces sary
l im i ta t i on s,wh ich to ou r m i n d a p lu ra l i ty of god s mu st
en ta i l on every s i ngl e god .
(b) I s the posses s i on of the power of abst rac t i on and
genera l i sa t i on,imp l i ed i n the emp i r ica l acqu i s i t i on of the
knowledge of the d iv i n e a ttr i bu te s and func t i on s,con
s i sten t w i th the h istor ical fact tha t th ey never gra sped the
i dea of God as a person sepa ra te from na ture, to whom
a l one these a tt r i bu te s belong ? We have seen that i n
obed i en ce to the imper i ou s tenden cy of the human m i n d,
wh ich leads i t to l ogica l un i ty,the o l d D evas the ol d
gods of natu re,were d i sca rded
,and on ly On e wi thou t
a second affirmed (eka eva advitiyami). We have seen
a l so tha t th e “ One of the U pan ishad s— the Atman or
B rahma— i s noth i ng more than the i ndefin i te ab strac t i on
of B e i ng i n genera l,wi thou t any d i st i ngu i sh ing charac
terist ics to con st i tu te a De i ty .
“ F or how shou l d morta l
man be w i ser than the J nana-Kand,wh ich te l l s u s how
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 99
B rahma is bod i l e s s and act iveless, passiveless , ca lm ,
un
qua l ified , unchanged , pu re l i fe , pure thought , pu re J oy” 1
B rahma is i r res i st i b l e,impa l pab l e
,wi thou t k i nd red ,
wi thou t col ou r , has ne i ther eyes nor ears , ne i ther hand s
nor feet,imper i shab le , man i fes ted i n i nfin i te va r i ety
,
pre sen t eve rywhere , se l f-lum i n ou s withou t and wi th i n
wi thou t or ig i n,wi thou t v i ta l b rea th or th i nk i ng facu l ty
Th i s is not th e un i ty of a l i v i ng be i ng, wh ich under l i es th e
u n i ty of Re l i g i on,bu t the un i ty of thought , wh ich con st i
tu tes the un i ty of Ph i l osophy . The u n i ty of the former
i s Monothe i sm,the u n i ty of the la tte r i s Mon i sm . The
h ighe s t ab stract i on of Re l igi on i s a Persona l God,in
v i s i b l e,yet fe l t ; d i s t i nc t from natu re , yet immanen t i n i t
the Crea tor and Su s ta i ner of all th i ngs,and yet pos ses s i ng
qua l i t i e s wh ich appea l to th e tenderest and nob l e st su s
cept ib ilit ies of the human hea rt . The h ighest ab strac t ion
of Ph i l osophy is a grea t e ssence,an i nfin i te and eterna l
en ergy,from wh ich a ll th ings proceed
,an impersona l
,
neu ter B rahma, the tota l i ty of all ex i s tence . Th i s B rahma
i s not the abstrac t of any on e grou p of thoughts , i deas , or
concept i on s ; i t is the ab stract of a ll though ts,i deas
,or
concept i on s . I t i s ana l ogou s to the word ex istence " i n
Western Ph i l osophy . F or tha t wh ich is common to a ll
thoughts , i deas or concept i on s , and cannot be got r i d of
is wha t we pred i cate by the word“ ex i stence D i s soc iated
,
as th i s becomes,from each of it s modes ,
by th e perpetua l
change of those modes , i t rema i n s an i n defin i te con
1 S ir E dw in Arno ld’s L igh t of A sia .
Mundaka Upanishad , i. , 6 ; i i . , 2 , 3 .
1 00 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
sc iou sness of someth i ng con stan t under a ll modes ; of
be i ng apart from i ts appearances—“ the permanen t e l emen t
i n na tu re of j . S . M i l l . The sages of the U pan i shads
grasped the i dea of exi s tence— of someth i ng con stan t
u nder a ll mode s— which th ey ca l l ed B rahma . B u t they
went fu rther . They den i ed the rea l i ty of all mode s ,regard i ng the world as phenomena l on ly
,and all th i ngs
there i n as fic t i t i ou s emana t i on s from B rahma,l i ke m i rage
from the rays of the sun .
“ A l l l i v i ng th i ngs are on ly
the One S e l f fic t it iously l im i ted to th i s o r that fi ct i t i ou s
m i n d or body,and retu rn i n to the Sel f as soon as the
fic t i t i ou s l im i ta t i on d i sappea rs . ” 1
One cannot i n s i s t too strongly on the d i s t i nc t ion be
tween the h igh est ab strac t i on of Ph i l o sophy and th e
h ighes t ab s trac t i on of Re l ig ion for many em i nen t wr i ters,
by fa i l i n g to apprec ia te th i s d i st i nc t ion , have fa l l en i n to
the error of i den t i fy i ng the Mon i sm of the U pan i shad s
wi th the Monothe i sm of the B i b l e ! H ence thev have
a l together fa i l ed to apprehend the h ighest resu l t of
re l ig iou s and specu lat ive th ough t i n I nd ia du r i ng the
Ved ic age .
B u t l est i t be though t tha t we are exaggera t i ng th i s
d i s t i n ct i on , to th e d isparagemen t of th e sages of the
Veda s,l e t u s quote the fo l lowing m i gh ty word s from
M r . Gough’s P hilosophy of the Upanishads ,2 a most master ly
book on the h ighes t specu la t i on s of the Ved ic Aryan s .
I f we are to use the language of Eu ropean Ph i losophy,
1 Gough’s Philosophy of the Upanishads , p . 104 .
Pp . 4 1 , 42 .
IO Z T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
H ow far such a concept i on of the Su preme B e i ng i s from
the B i b l ica l concept ion ofGod,I n eed not ind i ca te . [ wi sh
to po i n t ou t,however , that , i n so far a s the Ved i c Aryan s
gave up th e i dea of God a s a l iv i n g,energ i s ing
,sympa
th ising P erson ,th ey lost ground from a re l i g i ou s po i n t of
v i ew . F or, as Man se l says , “ Persona l i ty wi th a ll i t s
l im i ta t i on s , though far from exh i b i t i ng the abso lu te natu re
of God a s H e is,i s yet tru er
,grander
,more e l eva t i ng ,
more re l i gi ou s,than th ose barren ,
vagu e , mean i ngl ess
abstract ion s,i n wh ich men babb le abou t noth i ng u nder
th e name of the I nfin i te . Persona l con sc i ou s ex i sten ce ,
l im i ted though i t b e,i s yet the nobl est of a ll exi s tence
of wh ich man can dream ; for i t i s tha t by wh ich all
exi s tence i s revea l ed to h im ; i t i s grander than the
grandest obj ect wh ich man can know for It Is that
wh ich knows,not tha t wh ich i s known .
(c) Is the suppos i t i on tha t the Ved ic A ryan s e labora ted
the d iv i n e a ttr i bu te s and fun c t ion s from the impres s ion s
of sen se and th e reflect i on s of reason cons i stent wi th the
h istor ica l order of thought fou nd i n th e Vedas M an,i n
th e m en ta l , a s wel l as i n th e phys ica l,world
,has to
p roceed s lowly , and conquer everyth ing gradua l ly,by the
“swea t of h i s brow ”
. I f the Ved ic A ryans,there fore
,
thought ou t the d iv ine a ttr i bu te s and funct ions ,i t is
rea sonab l e to suppo se tha t they d id so gradu a l ly ; and we
m i gh t expect to see one concep t fo l l owing another,and
each con cep t i n th e p rocess of evolu t i on , and con sequen t ly
th e fu l ly developed concep t s at the end . The reverse ,
1B ampton L ectures, p . 57.
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 103
however,is the order of thought revea l ed i n the Vedas .
There we fi nd the concept s of the d iv i ne a t tr i bu te s and
funct i on s fu l ly deve loped i n the Man tra s,or oldest por
t ion s of th e Veda s ; wherea s i n the U pan i shads , th e latest
port i on s , they are d i s s i pa ted,one afte r th e other , t i l l
noth i ng i s l eft bu t IVirguna B rahma ,-B rahma
, wi thou t
qua l i t i e s,pred ica tes
,or determ i nat i on s
,— a someth i ng to
be d efin ed by No,N o A t the begi nn i n g we find
H eaven-F a th er ; and at th e end a character l es s Ab strae
t i on
We have seen a l ready tha t th e l oft i est concep t i on of
God,i n conj unct i on w i th the most i n tense eth ica l con
sc iou sness of s i n , fou nd expres s i on i n Varuna , the o l des t
god of the A ryan s ; and that,du r i ng the l ong i n terva l
b etween Varu na and B rahma,that concept ion was
gradua l ly corrupted , unt i l in B rahma i t was l o s t,and
with i t th e eth i ca l con sc i ou sness of S in became wel l
n igh,i f n ot a l together
,ext i n ct . We have no reason to
be l i eve tha t tha t corru pt i on began wi th the Ved ic age ;
bu t , on the contra ry,the re are many i nd icat ion s tha t i t
h ad begu n at a mu ch ear l i er per iod . Both Varuna and
Dyau s , th e most anc i en t gods of the u nd iv i ded A ryan s ,
appear in the o l dest port ion s of th e Veda s a s fu l ly
deve loped mythol ogica l per-son s . Varuna i s assoc iated
wi th the Ad i tya s,and Dyau s is wedded to Pr i th iv i .
N ow,i f Mythology be
,as Professor M ax Mul l er say s ,
a d i sea se of language wh ich presu pposes a hea l thy frame ,
i t is obviou s tha t a l ong t im e was necessarv to confound
the “ god of heaven wi th the ma ter ia l heaven , and to
tran sform th e la tter i n to th e mythol ogi ca l forms wh ich
‘
104 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
find expres s i on in Va ru na and Dyau s . I t i s ev i dent,
then , (1 )That the h igher up to th e sou rce of th e Ved ic
re l i gi on we pu sh ou r i n qu i r i es th e pu rer and s imp l er we
find the concept ion of God ; and (2 ) Tha t i n proport i on
as we come down the s tream of t ime the more corru pt
and comp lex we find i t . We conc lude , th erefore , tha t
the Ved i c A ryan s d i d not acqu i re the i r knowledge of the
d iv i n e attr ibu tes and funct i on s emp ir ica lly ,for i n that
case we shou l d find at the end what we now find at the
beginn i ng . H ence we mu s t seek for a theory wh ich wi l l
accou nt a l ike for the acqu i s i t ion of tha t knowledge,
the God-l i ke concept ion of Va ru na,and for tha t gradua l
depravat ion wh ich cu lm i nated i n B rahma .
3 . A nd wha t theory wi l l cover these fact s as wel l as
th e doctr i n e of a “ Prim i t i ve Reve la t i on 1 I f we adm i t,
1 T h e o ldest re cord of man in Genes i s repre sents h im a s
created in th e image of God ,and h o lding inte rcou rse w i th h is
Creator as a son w i th h is fath e r . A nd th e tradi t ions of a ll
nat ions test ify to a go lden age in th e far-off past , wh en men
l ived happ i ly in converse w i th God . M ax MUIler says,
“ It is
a c onstant saying amongAfri can t r ibes , th at‘ former ly H eaven
was nearer to men th an i t is now ; th at th e h igh e st God , th e
Creator , H imse lf, gave formerly le ssons of w i sdom to human
be ings ; bu t that afte rwards H e w i thdrew from th em ,and
dwe l ls now far from th em in H eaven ’
. T h e H indus say th e
same (R .-V .
,i . , 1 79 , 2 ; v i i . , 76 , and th ey , a s we l l as th e
Gree k s , appea l to th e i r ance sto rs, wh o h ad l ived in c lose rc ommun i ty w i th th e gods , a s th e i r au th or i ty on wh at th eybe l ieve abou t th e gods (H ibbert L ectures, p . A nd th e
D u ke of Argyl l says , th at “ E verywh ere in th e imaginat ionand tradi t ion of mank ind th ere is p re served th e memory and
th e be l ief in a pa st bette r than th e p resent . It is not easy to
1 06 T H E TEACH I NG OF T H E VEDA S .
had been bestowed upon them,and d i s sec ted the I nfin i te
One i n to many fin i te one s,giv i ng a cha racter i s t ic to each .
1
O r , i n the words o f Scr i p tu re,
“ They changed the tru th
of God i n to a l i e,and worsh ipped and served th e c rea tu re
more than the Crea tor,who i s b l essed for ever ” 2
Th i s be i ng the case,we mu s t be l i eve that
,when app ly
i ng the d iv i ne a tt r i bu tes to the person ified el emen ts and
forces of na tu re,the Ved ic Aryan s were u s ing language
1 “ If we negle ct a garden p lant , th en a natu ra l princ ip le of
dete riorat ion come s in,and Ch anges i t into a worse p lant .
A nd i f we negle c t a bird,by th e same impe riou s law i t w i l l
be gradua l ly ch anged into an ugl i e r b i rd. Or if we neglec ta lmost any of th e domest ic an ima l s, th ey w i l l rap idly revertto w i ld and worth less forms aga in .
“M an is no excep t ion to th is law. If a man neglec t h imse lf fora few years
,h e wi l l change into a worse man and a lower man .
If i t is h is body th at h e neglec ts, h e w i l l dete riorate into a w i ldand best ia l savage— l i ke th e dehuman i sed men wh o are dis
covered somet ime s upon desert is lands . If i t is h is m ind, i t w i l ldegene rate into imbec i l i ty and madness . If h e negle c t h is consc ienc e ,
it w i l l run off into law le ssne ss and v i ce . Or,last ly
,i f i t
is h is sou l , i t must inev i tably atrophy, drop off in ru in and decay
(Prof. D rummond , N a tura l L aw in the Spir itua l World , p .
U nder th e operat ion of th is law,i t is possib le for th ose wh o
h ave been bl essed w i th O ld Testament R eve lat ion to become so
degraded as to lose a ll know ledge of God. M r . A. S . Anand,th e
agent of th e N at iona l B ib le S oc iety of S cot land for N orth Ch ina ,met th e descendants of some J ews in H onan
,wh o cou ld not
give h im th e fa inte st idea of wh at th ey be l i eved ”.
“Th ey seemto h ave ent ire ly given up th e i r o ld worsh ip , h ave lost a ll knowledge of th e God of Israe l
,and h ave noth ing bu t th e memory of
what th ey onc e were to di st ingu ish th em .
”T h e ir forefath ers
entered Ch ina du ring th e H an D ynasty,B .C . 200 to A . D . 2 20 .
R omans,I., 25 .
T H E THEOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . I O7
the fu l l mean i ng of wh ich they d id not understand . Th i s
is sel f-ev iden t ; for had they u nders tood its fu l l mean ing,
they wou l d have been consc i ous of the contrad ic t i on in
vo lved i n a sc ri bi ng infin i te a ttr i bu tes to more than one
be i ng . The language is an echo of a pu rer worsh i p i n
the pr imeva l home . I t is app l ica b l e to the tru e God
a l one . I t has no mean i ng when app l i ed to any one , or
any th i ng e l se . I t is the language of monothe i sm ,and
monothe i sm wa s the “pr im i t ive re l i g ion
Professor H . H . Wi l son says , “ There can be no
dou b t that the fundamen ta l doc tr i n e of the Veda s i s
monothe i sm 2 A nd Professor Max Mul l e r , i n h i s IIistory
of A ncient Sanscr it L itera ture, says , “ There i s a mono
the i sm tha t precedes the po lythe i sm of the Veda .
The idea of God,though never en t i re ly l ost , had been
c l ouded over by error . The names given to God h ad
been changed to gods,and the i r rea l mean ing had faded
away from the memory of man . M . Ado l phe P ic tet , i n
the second volume of h i s great work, Les Or igines Indo
E uropéennes , gives i t a s h i s Op i n i o n , tha t the re l i g i on of
the und iv ided A ryan s was “a monothe i sm more or l ess
vaguely defined ”. And both Pic te t and Mu l l er ma i n ta i n
tha t t race s of the pr im i t i ve monothe ism are v i s i b l e i n the
1 T o say th at pr im i t ive man was too low down in th e sca le o f
evo lut ion to rec e ive re l igiou s conc ept ions , su ch a s th e doc trineo f a “
pr im i t ive reve lat ion imp l ie s , is no va l id obj ec t ion aga instth e th eo ry. F or man must h ave a lways posse ssed th e ch iefc h aracte rist i c wh ich dist ingu ish e s h im from a ll oth e r c reature s ,v iz .
,mind
, t h e power o f th ink ing,o r , as Loc ke says
,of h av ing
genera l ideas .
E ssay s, vo l. i i . , p . 5 1 .
1 08 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Vedas tha t t he remembrance of a God, one and i nfin i te ,breaks th rough the m i st of an i do la trou s phra seol ogy
l i ke the b lu e sky tha t i s h i d den by a pass i ng c l oud ”.
Baron Bun sen,i n h i s God in IIistory ,
says,
“ The so
ca l l ed Na tu re-myth o l ogy i s not the or i g i na l e l emen t i n
re l igi on , as many now-a-days seem once more d i sposed
to a s sume,who th i nk they can d i spen se wi th all ph i lo
soph ica l cu l tu re . Re l i g i on can no more than Language
have been the produc t of a m i sunders tand i ng . I t is a
con trad ic t i on to a ll the laws of though t to imagi ne tha t
the necessa ry u n iversa l expres s i on of the re l igi ou s con
sciousness can be a mere men ta l fa l lacy . H ow cou l d
both Re l i gi on and Language be u n iversa l , and deve l op
them se lves organ ica l ly , i f they were not based u pon
rea son ? Mythology has spru ng up gradua l ly ou t of a
poet ic,ch i l d l i ke
,yet deep ly s i gn ificant p layi ng of the
m i n d wi th metaphors . B u t a fterward s u sage,l egend
,
myst i ca l teach i ng,have crys ta l l i sed wha t was at fi rst
n o th i ng more than a s im i l e,wh i l e i ts rea l e s s ence comes
to be no longer unders tood or is on ly seen u nder a
myst ica l or d i s torted aspect .
I s i t not ph i l osoph ica l ly t ru e that poly the i sm presup
poses monothei sm ? “ I s i t t rue,
as many seem to
suppose, tha t polythe i sm is o lde r than monothe i sm Is
i t no t l i ke ly tha t the s imp l e be l i ef is ol der than the more
comp l ex Can th e concept many p recede the concep t
one ? Is not p lu ra l i ty the aggrega te of u n i ts ? Wha t
i s the developmen t of thought as seen in ch i l d ren ? Is
i t not from one to two,from the s i ngu lar to the p lu ra l ,
from the s imp le to e comp l ex,from un i ty to d ivers i ty ,
I I O T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
of gods,a ll a s s i gn to them th e h ighest p lace And
aga i n,
“ The anc i en ts a ss i gn ed to the god s heaven and
th e space above,becau se i t was a l one eterna l
I n th e Theo logy of the Veda s , we have a record of
regress ra ther than of p rogress , of deter i ora t i on ra ther
than of im provemen t , i n the concept i on of God. And
th i s i s j u s t wha t m i gh t be expected when du e weight
is gi ven to th e “ F a l l,
and the con sequ en t tendency to
rebel aga inst God,wh ich entered human natu re . Thi s
fac t of sin i s over l ooked by many who wri te on the
O r igi n and Growth of Re l i gi on , and th e con sequence
is tha t th ey presen t u s wi th a car icatu re and not wi th
th e rea l portra i t . N o one can portray the O r i g i n and
Deve l opmen t of Re l ig i on wi thout g iv i ng due p rom inence
to the “ F a l l,th e effects of wh i ch are strewn l ike
wi thered l eaves everywhere . Thi s fact a l one can account
sa t i s factor i ly for th e deprava t i on of the concept God i n
a ll known Re l ig i on s . I t is sca rce ly necessary to po i n t
ou t to th e readers of the O l d Testament h ow pers i stent ly
the J ews ma ter ia l i sed the sp i r i tua l concept i on of God ,
commun ica ted to them by Abraham , Moses , and the
Prophets . That F et i sh ism ,the l owest sub-stage in M .
Com te’s fi rst law of rel i g i ou s Evolu t ion , i s not a p r ima ry,
bu t a corrupted , fo rm of a pu rer fa i th , has been amp ly
proved by Profes sor M ax Mul l er i n h i s IIibber t Lectures.
And “a ll th e great re l ig i on s of the worl d wh ich can be
t raced to the teach ing or i nfluence of i nd i vi dua l men
have stead i ly dec l ined from the teach i ng of the i r fou nders.
Whether we now stu dy wha t is he l d by the d i sc ip l es of
Buddha ,of Con fuc iu s , or of Zoroaster , i t is the same
T H E TH EOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . I I I
resu l t . Whenever we can arr i ve a t the or i g i na l teach ing
of the known founders of re l ig i ou s systems,we find tha t
teach i ng u n i form ly h igher , more sp i r i tua l , than the teach
i ng now . The same law has a ffected Chr i st ian i ty,wi th
th i s d i fference on ly , tha t a l one of a ll th e h i stor i ca l re
ligions o f the worl d,i t has h i therto shown an unm istak
ab l e power of perenn ia l rev iva l and reform . B ut we
know that th e proces s of corru pt i on had begun i t s work
even i n the l i fet ime of the Apost l e s ; and every Chu rch
in Chr i stendom wi l l adm i t the genera l fact , a l though each
of them wi l l gi ve a d i fferen t exp lana t ion of i t . Mahomed
an ism , wh ich is th e las t and la test of a ll the h i stor ica l
re l ig i ons of the worl d,shows a st i l l more remarkab l e
phenomenon . The corru pt ion i n th i s case began not on ly
i n the l i fet ime bu t i n the l i fe of the prophet and founder
of tha t re l i g ion . Mahomed wa s h im se l f h is own most
corrupt d i sc i p l e . In the ear l i est days of h i s m i ss i on he
was best as a man and grea test as a teacher . H is l i fe
was pu rer and h i s doctri n es more sp i r i tua l when h i s vo ice
was a so l i tary vo ice c ry i ng in th e wi l dernes s , than when
i t was j o i n ed i n choru s by th e vo ice s of many m i l l i on s .
I n h i s ca se th e progres s of deve lopmen t i n a wrong
d i rec t i on was s i n gu la r ly d i st i n ct , and very rap id .
The h i story of re l i gi ou s thought ev erywhere shows tha t
the tendency of man ,when l eft to h im se l f, i s to degrade
the concept ion of God ,and to s i n k i n to po lythe i sm . There
i s no ev i dence whatever of a polythe i s t ic peop l e,when l eft
to them se l ves,work i ng the i r way up to a m onothe i s t i c
re l igi on .
1 T h e D u ke o f A rgyl l , in th e Contempora ry R eview for
CH A PT E R I I I .
T H E COSMOLOGY O F T H E VE DAS .
In th e beginning God c reated th e h eaven and th e earth .
GEN E S I S .
8 1 . Vedic Cosmology not one Connected N arra tive.
The cosmology of the Veda s i s not on e connected
narra t i ve,l i ke tha t of the B i b l e , bu t many narra t ives
,
or h ints, given by d i fferen t poet s at d ifferen t t imes,ex
tend i ng over a per i od of many cen tu r i e s . The R i sh i s,
i n a t tempt i ng to con stru ct a cosmo logy,or i n reproduc i n g
the a lmost forgo tten trad i t ion s of th e c rea t i on handed
down from th e ances tra l h ome,n ecessa r i ly gave the i r
own concept i on s,more or l ess colou red , accord i ng to
the i r i nd iv i dua l i d i osyn cra s i e s and the ex igency of poet ic
language , wh i ch , accord i ng to H i n du not i on s , con s i st s not
so mu ch i n tru th as i n rasa,flavou r or sen sa t i on . I t i s
too mu ch,therefore , to expect harmony between the
va r i ous narra t ive s , or even a lways between a ll the sta te
men ts of any one poet in the same narrat i ve . A l l tha t
we can do is to ana ly se th e d i fferen t accou n ts , and poi n t
ou t the fu ndamen ta l concept i on s wh ich underl i e them ,
om i t t i ng what appears e i ther too ob scu re for exp lana t i on ,or too pueri l e for remark .
T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E vED A s.
th e most ac t i ve of the ac t i ve gods,produced th e heaven
and th e ea rth,wh ich are beneficent to all.
” 1 “ Agn i
u phel d th e broad ea rth , he su pported the sky wi th tru e
hymn s .
2 “ I n the begi nn i ng B rahma was the sou rce
of a ll th i ngs . H e c rea ted th e gods and p laced th em i n
th i s world,i n the a tmosphere , and i n the sky .
” 3 R o
h i ta estab l i sh ed heaven and ea rth , by h im th e sky was
supported,by h im the heaven .
” 4
Whi l e all Ved ic cosmologi es agree i n ascr i b ing the
produ c t i on of the un iverse to an omn i potent i n te l l i gen t
bei ng,th ey d i ffer as to th e mode in wh ich he produced i t .
Some represen t i t as th e resu l t of h i s power wi thou t
pre-ex i s t i ng ma tter or c rea t i on , £5 06K din-ow; others , a s
th e resu l t of h is power ac t i ng on eterna l ly pre-ex ist ing
ma tter or c rea t ion, e
’
K and others represen t i t
as a phenomena l emanat i on from the de i ty,71706080 9 .
3 . Crea tion ou t of N othing.
The 1 29th hymn of the tenth book of the R i g-Veda i s
the most st r ik i ng i l lu s tra t ion of th i s . (1 ) There was
th en ne i ther nonen t i ty nor en t i ty ; th ere was no a tmo
sphere nor sky above . Wha t enve loped (all) Where ,
i n t he recep tac l e o f wha t (was i t conta i n ed) ?5 Was i t
wa ter , th e deep abyss ? (2) D eath wa s not th en,nor
immorta l i ty ; there was no d i st inct i on of day or n i ght .
1 R .-V . ,
i . , 160 , 4 .
2Ibid . , i . , 67 , 3 .
3 S a t. B r .
,x i .
, 2 , 3 , 1 .
‘1 A .-V . ,
x i i i ., 7 .
5 “ What covered in , and wh ere and wh at gave sh e l ter ?
(GR I FF ITH).
T H E COSMOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . I I S
Tha t One brea thed ca lm ly by i t se l f ; 1 there was noth i ng
d i fferent from I t (tha t one), or beyond I t . (3) Da rkness
there was ; orig i na l ly enve loped i n darkness , th i s uni
verse was u nd i s t i ngu i shab l e wa ter ; ~ the empty (mass)which was con cea l ed by a hu sk (or by noth i ngnes s)was
produced,S i n gl e
,by the power of au s ter i ty (or fervou r).
(4) D es i re fi rs t a rose i n I t,which was the pr ima l germ
of m i n d . Th i s th e wi se , seek ing in the i r heart , have
d i scovered by the i n te l l ec t to be the bond between non
ent i ty and en t i ty . (5 ) The rav wh i ch shot across these
th i ngs- was i t above or was i t be l ow ? The r e were
produ c t ive energ ie s and m i gh ty powers ; na tu re (svadha)benea th
,and energy (praya ti) above . (6) Who knows ,
who here can dec lare , whence has sprung , whence th i s
c rea t i on ? The gods are sub sequ en t to i t s forma t i on ;
who then knows from wha t i t a rose ? (7) F rom wha t
sou rce th i s creat i on arose,and whether (any one) created
i t or not H e who i n the h i gh est heaven is i t s ru l er , he
ver i ly knows , or (even) he does not know .
Thi s hymn carr i es u s back to a t ime l on g before the fi rs t
ver se i n Gen es i s,when there was ne i ther “ nonen t i ty
(asad , Ta p r) b'
v) nor en t i ty (sad , 7 6 by F rom th e in
abi l i ty of the human m i n d to conce i ve a sta te tha t wa s
1 B reath ed wi thout afflat ion , s ingle w i th (svadha) h er whois su sta ined w i th in h im ”
(COLE B R OOKE).B reath ed ca lm ly , se lf-supported (MU I R)B reath ed breath le ss by itse lf ” (M A x M UL LE R).B reath ed ca lmly , se lf-conta ined (M . WILL IAM S).
Th e re was a t ime in wh ich all was darkness and water
(B aby lonian T radition of the Creation).
1 1 6 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
ne i th er noth i ng nor someth i ng,
1 the A tharva 1 V eda i den
t ifies th i s remote nonen t i ty wi th S kamba , a person i
ficat ion of the d i v i n e power wh ich su pports the un i verse ;and the Khandogya Upan i shad doub ts that th ere ever
was a peri od wi thou t ent i ty ? The Vedan t i sts exp la i n
sad as th e Su preme B ei ng man i fes t i ng h imself by c rea t i on
and asad a s mere form s or i l lu s i o n s by wh ich he dece i ves
the sen se s . Wha t th en doe s the poet mean by the phrase,
“ There was then ne i th er nonent i ty nor en t i ty ” Does
he mean to say that th ere wa s n e i ther abso lu te ly ? So
ev i den t ly thought th e sages of the A tharva-Veda ,and
the Khandogya U pan i shad . B u t th i s is a m i s take ; for
he postu la tes the ex i stence of “ tha t One brea th i ng
brea th l es s by I tsel f,
i .e. ,the uncond i t ioned ex i s t i n g
a l one by h i s own i nheren t power,wi thou t th e acc i d en ts
of t ime and space,wh ich are th e cond i t ion s of our l i fe .
3
Does he mean tha t therei
wa s ne i th er rela tively ? Th i s ,doubt l e s s
,is h i s mean i ng ; and i n th i s sen se the phra se
We are utterly unable to rea l ise in though t th e poss ib i l i tyof th e comp lement of ex istence be ing e i th e r inc reased or dim inish ed . W e are unable
,on th e one h and , to conc e ive noth ing
becom ing someth ing, or , on th e oth er,some th ing becoming
noth ing (S ir W . H am i l ton’
s L ectures on M etaphy sics , vol. i i . ,P 3 77)
Mu i r ’s S ans . T ex ts , vol . iv .
, p . 20 , 2nd ed.
3 S o i t is exp la ined in th e S at . B r . ,x . , 5 , 3 , 1 ,
“ In th e beginn ing th i s un ive rse was, as i t we re
,and was not , as i t we re .
Th en i t was on ly th at m ind . Wh erefore i t h as been dec laredby th e R i sh i
,
‘ th ere was th en ne i th er nonent i ty nor ent ity ,’
for th e m ind was, as i t we re, ne i th er ent i ty nor nonent i ty .
1 18 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
water of the th i rd an ac t ion i den t i ca l w i th th e c rea t i ve
act of Gen es i s , i . , 1,wh ich produ ced “ the heaven and
the earth ” i n a chaot ic s ta te . The cau se of th i s acti on
was the determ i na t ion of the Infin i te w i l l . “ D es i re
a rose i n I t,wh ich was the pr ima l germ of m i n d ; i .e. ,
wh ich to u s i s the fi rst man i festat i on of con sc i ou s m i n d .
Th i s the wi se,seek i ng i n thei r heart , have d i scern ed
by the intel l ec t to be the bond between non en t i ty and
en t i ty ; i .e.
,the w i l l of God was the cau se of the
exi sten t spri ng i ng from the non-exi sten t . Th i s i s on ly
another form of the H ebrew expres s i on,
“ And God sa i d ,Let there be and there wa s The same i dea is
expressed i n th e A itareya A ranyaka ,
“ H e th ough t , I
wi l l c rea te world s,thu s he c rea ted these var i ou s worl ds ,
wa ter,l i gh t
,m orta l be i ngs , and th e wa ters ’
. And i n
the A itareya B rahmana ,Prajapa t i was
,i n th e beg in
n i ng,bu t one . H e u ttered the N ivid (a sacr ific ia l for
mu la), and a ll th ings were created . Aga i n , “ The word
is the Crea tor of th e Un i ver s e,the powerfu l one ; for by
the word is a ll th i s made (vaca hidam sarvam kr itam).1
H ow wonderfu l ly th i s language agrees wi th the declara
t i on of the Psa lm i st ,“ By the word of the Lord were
the heavens made ; and a ll th e host of them by the
brea th of H is mou th ”. H e S pake , and i t was d one ;
H e commanded, and they were c rea ted .
” 2 The same
i dea is a l so found among th e I ran ian s and the sem i
c iv i l i sed races of Western Austra l ia . I n the sac red books
of the former,i t is sa i d tha t Ahu ra-Maz da created the
1 S . P . B r . , v i i i . , 1 , 2 , 9 . Ps .
,xxx i i i . , 6, 9 ; c x lvi i i . , 5 .
T H E COSMOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . I I 9
worl d by mean s of the Ya tha-ah z'
i-va iryo'
prayer ; and the
Roman Ca tho l i c m i s s i onar i e s ascerta i n ed tha t th e la tte r
bel ieve i n an omn i poten t Be i ng , who crea ted the heaven
and the earth by brea th i ng,whose name is Motogon .
To c reate the earth , he sa i d ,“ Ear th
,come forth An d
he brea thed,and the ea rth was created . So wi th the
sun,moon , and a ll th i ngs .
” 1
The water and the da rknes s of th i s hymn correspond
to the lhoku vabohu ,
“ wi thou t form and vo id,of Gen es i s
,
and to the chaos of the Greek s . “ Th i s u n iverse was
und i s t i ngu ishab l e wa ter enve loped i n darknes s .
’ I t was
an“ empty or “
shape les s ma s s,
concea l ed by the“ deep abys s
,l ike gra i n i n the hu sk
,bu t brought forth
a s a beau t i fu l worl d by “ the power of au s ter i ty,
” or“ con temp la t ion
,
”as Co lebrooke tran s la tes i t ; i .e.
,by the
m i gh ty wi l l of Tha t One who des ign ed i t . F or “ there
were produc t i ve energ i es and m i gh ty powers svadha ,
na tu re,beneath
,and prayati , energy , above . Yes
,there
was svadha , or chaos , benea th , and there was the m i gh ty“ energy of th e Sp i r i t of God mov i ng on the face of
th e wa ters above,br i nging order from confu s i on
,cosmos
from chaos,and breath i ng forth l igh t and l i fe everywhere ?
1 Max Mul ler ’s H ibbert L ectures, pp . 16 , 17.
2 In th e T a ittiry a Sanhita,v i .
, 4 8 ,we read
,
“Th is worldh ad ne i th er day nor n igh t , bu t was (in th at respec t) undist in
gu ish ed T h e gods sa id to M i t ra and Varuna ,
“ Make a
separat ion . M i tra produced th e day, and V aruna th e
n igh t”
(Mu ir’
s S . T ., vo l. v .
, p . and in th e A itarey a
A ranyaka we read,“ S e lf brooded '
over the wate r ”. F romth e water thu s brooded on
,ma tte r (murti)was born.
I Z O T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
M ax Mul l er and Mon i er Wi l l iam s see i n svadha , be
neath,and p raya ti , above , the fi rs t dim ou t l i ne of the
i dea tha t the Creator wi l l ed to produce the un iverse
through the agency and co-opera t i on of a fema l e pr i n
c iple , an i dea wh ich afterwa rd s acqu i red more S hape in
the su pposed marr iage of heaven and earth . I t i s more
p robab le tha t th i s i dea or ig i na ted i n a misunderstanding of
th i s hymn,or of the trad i t i on on wh i ch i t i s ba sed .
The poet c l oses h i s su b l ime narrat i ve of the c rea t i on
i n an unexpec ted ly sad and d i sappo i n t i ng tone . After
the graph ic desc r i p t i on he has given of the or i gi n of th e
u n iverse,he fin i shes by i n t ima t i ng tha t h e does not
know after all “ from wha t sou rce th i s crea t i on arose,
and whether any one c reated i t or not A l l he can
affi rm with confidence i s,that H e who is i n the h i ghest
heaven is i t s ru l e r,he veri ly knows
,or (even) he doe s
not know Another poet , i n the same me lancholy
st ra i n of i gnorance and uncerta i n ty , a sks , “ Wha t was
the forest,wha t wa s the tree , from wh ich they fa sh ioned
the heaven and the earth ? I n qu i r e men ta l ly,ye sages
,
wha t that was on wh ich he took h i s s tand when estab
lish ing th e wor l d s .1 An d S im i la r ly another poet ,
Which of these two (heaven and earth)was the fi rst ,
and wh ich the las t ? H ow have they been produ ced ?
dec la re,sage s , who knows th i s ?
” 2 Wha t a sad com
men t th i s is on th e words of th e Apost l e Pau l , “ The
worl d by wi sdom knew not God Re l i gi ous tru th s
1 R .-V . ,
x . , 8 1 , 4 . Ibid . , i. , 1 85 , 1 .
3 1 Cor. , i. , 2 1 .
1 2 2 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
I command the devou t a ttent i on of all nob l e sou l s,
O f a ll th e h igh and the l ow of the race of H eimda l l
I te l l the do i ngs of the A l l F ather ,I n the most anc i en t sagas wh i ch come to my m i n d .
There was an age i n wh ich Ym i r l i ved ,When was no sea , nor shore , nor sa l t wave s ;N o earth be low
,nor heaven above ;
N o yawn ing abys s and no gra s sy land .
Ti l l th e son s of Bors l i fted the dome of heaven,
And c rea ted th e vast M i dgard (earth) below ;When the sun of the sou th rose above the mou nta i n s
,
And green gras se s made the grou nd verdant .”
4 . Crea tionfrom P re ex isting M a tter .
(1 ) H iranyagarbh a arose i n the begi n n i ng ; he was
the one born lord of th i ngs exi s t ing . H e estab l i shed the
earth and th i s sky : to wha t god S ha l l we offer our
ob lat i on ? (2) H e who gives breath , who gives strength ,
whose command a ll (even) the gods reverence , whose
shadow i s immorta l i ty,whose S hadow i s dea th : to what
god sha l l we offer ou r ob la t i on (3)Who by h i s m i gh t
became the sol e k i ng of th e breath i n g and winki ng
wor l d,who i s the l ord of th i s two-footed and fou r-footed
(crea t ion) : to wha t god sha l l we offer ou r oblat i on ?
(4 ) Whose grea tn ess the se snowy mou nta i n s , and the
sea wi th th e ra sa (r i ver) dec la re , of whom these snowy
region s,of whom they are th e a rm s : to wha t god sha l l
we offer ou r ob la t i on ? (5) By whom the sky is fiery
and the ea rth fixed,by whom the firmament and the
heaven were estab l i sh ed , who i n th e a tmosphere i s the
T H E COSMOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 1 23
measu rer of aer ia l space : to what god sha l l we offer
ou r ob la t i on (6) To whom heaven and earth,su sta i ned
by h i s succour , l ooked up , t remb l i ng i n m i n d ; over
whom the sun sh i nes : t o wha t god sha l l we offer ou r
ob lat i on ? (7) When the grea t wa ters pervaded the
u n iverse , con ta i n i n g an embryo and genera t i ng Agn i,
th ence arose th e one sp i r i t (asu) of the gods : to what
god sha l l we offer ou r ob la t i on ? (8) H e who th rough
h i s greatnes s behe l d th e wa ter s wh ich conta i n ed power,and genera ted sacr ifice
,who was the one god above
gods : to what god sha l l we o ffer our ob lat i on ? (9)May he not i nj u re u s
,he who i s the genera tor of th e
ea rth , who , ru l i n g by fixed ord i nances,produ ced th e
heaven s,who formed the grea t and br i l l iant waters : to
wha t god sha l l we offer ou r ob la t i on ? (I o) Prajapat i ,no other than thou is l ord over a ll these crea ted th i ngs ;may we obta i n tha t th rough des i re of wh ich we have
i nvoked thee ; may we become mas ters of r iches .
1
M ax Mul l e r says , res pec t i n g th i s hymn , tha t “ the
i dea of one god is expressed wi th su ch power and de
c ision,tha t i t w i l l make u s hes i ta te before we deny to
th e A ryan na t i on s an i n st i n ct i ve monothe i sm'
and
Mon i er Wi l l iam s remarks,tha t “ i t fu rn i shes a good
a rgument for those who ma i n ta i n tha t the pu rer fa i th of
th e H i n du s i s p roper ly monoth e i s t ic“ The whol e of th i s hymn is found repeated i n the
V aja saneyi-Sanh i ta of the Yaj u r-Veda ,and most of th e
1 R .-V . , x .
, 1 2 1 .
H ist. A nc. Sans. L it. , p . 568 ; Indian IVisdonz, p . 23 .
1 24 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
verses recu r i n'
the A tharva-Veda .
” 1 The la s t verse i s
rej ected by mos t cr i t i cs as be i ng the produ ct i on of a la ter
age .
Accord i ng to th i s hymn,the c rea tor , H iranyagarbha ,
arose i n th e begi n n i ng from th e great wa ters wh ich
pervaded the un i vers e,th e “
u nd i st i ngu i shab l e wa ter
of R .-V . ,
x .
,1 29 , 3 , or chaos and so became “ the one
born lord of th i ngs ex i s t ing The i dea is tha t the
pr imeva l wa ters genera ted a go l den embryo,
and that
from th i s “ embryo ” th e c rea tor was born,or took bod i ly
form,i n order to tran sform chaos i n to cosmos ; and
hen ce he is d enom i na ted H iranyagarbha, the“ gol den
embryo,
” wh ich a l so may be tran s lated ,“ th e gol den or
the b r i gh t ch i l d A nd hen ce i t i s sa i d i n th e A tharva
Veda,
“ In th e begi n n i ng,the wa ters produ c i ng a ch i l d
,
brough t forth an em bryo,wh ich
,as i t was com i n g into
l i fe, was enve l oped i n a gol den cover i ng ” ?
F rom th i s i t appea rs (I ) tha t when H iranyagarbha
was born th e un iverse was in a chaot ic sta te , pervaded
wi th wa ter ; (2) tha t h e rose from an embryo genera ted
by the wa ter when the earth was “ voi d and withou t
form ”
; and (3 ) tha t he made the worl d in to i t s present
form from th e ex i s t i n g S hape l es s chaos .“ F or he who
is god above a ll god s e stab l i sh ed the ea rth and the sky ;
he “ formed the br i l l iant wa ters and “ the snowy moun
ta i n s and hence all creat i on un i te in “ dec lar i ng h i s
grea tn ess
1 M u i r ’s Sans. T ex ts , vol. iv . , p . 1 5 .
2 Ibid . ,vol . iv. , p . 16 , mt edi t i on .
1 26 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
beyond the sky, beyond th i s earth , beyond god s and
sp i r i t s ; wha t ear l i est embryo d i d th e wa ters con ta i n , i n
wh ich all th e gods were behe l d The wa te rs con ta i n ed
that ea rl i est embryo i n wh ich a ll th e godswere co l l ected .
One receptac l e re sted u pon the navel of the u nborn,
wherei n a ll the wor l d s stood .
“ Ye know not h im who
produ ced a ll th i ngs . Wha t the ear l i e s t embryo con
ta ined,i n wh ich a ll the god s were col l ected (i na smu ch as
i t conta i ned the i r crea tor , “ the sol e l i fe of th e br igh t
gods ”
)wa s tha t wh ich is beyond the Sky , beyond th i s
earth,beyond god s and S p i r i ts ”— h e who “ produ ced
these th i ngs,
and not he who was produced by them .
H ere , aga i n , the exi stence of the Au thor of the U n iverse
is repre sen ted as sepa ra te from,and i n dependen t of, the
or ig i na l chaos . The same i dea underl i es R .
-V .
,x . , 72 , 6 ,
7 ,“ When
,gods
,ye moved
,agi ta ted u pon those water s ,
then a v i o l en t du st i ssu ed from you ,as from dancers .
When , god s , ye , l i ke strenuou s men,rep l en i shed the
wor l d s,then ye drew forth the sun wh ich was h i dden i n
the (aeria l ocean .
” And a l so the T a it tirya Aranyaka ,
i.,2 3 , 1 , Thi s was wa ter . Prajapa t i was produ ced on a
l otu s l eaf. With i n h i s m i nd des i re a rose,
‘ Let me
7)crea te’
. B es i des,Va runa
,I ndra
,and others
,are re
p resen ted as estab l ish i ng and support i n g the heaven s
above , fix ing and d i rec t i ng the sun i n the Sky ,and
sett i n g l im i ts to the ea rth ; thu s a s sum i n g tha t the
obj ec ts them se lves , i n some shape,were pre-exi s ten t .
I t shou l d b e observed , however , tha t there i s a l egend
i n the S atapath a B rahmana,
1 i n wh ich the pr imeva l wa ters
1.
I.
,1,
T H E COSMOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 1 27
are represen ted a s generat i ng an egg , and the egg br i ngi ng
forth Prajapat i,th e c rea tor of the worl d . I n the beg i n
n ing,th i s u n ivers e was wa ters
,noth i ng bu t wa ter . The
wa ters de s i red ,‘ how can we produ ce ? ’ So say i ng
,th ey
to i l ed,th ey performed au ster i ty . Whi l e th ey were per
form i n g au ster i ty,a gol den egg came i n to exi sten ce .
F rom i t , i n a yea r,a man (p urusha) came i n to ex i s tence ,
who was Prajapat i . H e d i v id ed th i s g’
olden egg . There
was then no rest i ng-p lace for h im . H e therefore floa ted
abou t for the space of a yea r,occu py i ng th i s go l den egg .
I n a yea r he des i red to speak . H e u ttered bhuh ,wh ich
became th i s earth ; bhvah ,which became th i s firmament ;
and svoah ,wh ich became tha t Sky .
” 1
In th i s accou nt,probab ly
,th e au thor of th e primeva l
water s i s over l ooked ra ther than den i ed . F or certa i n i t
i s tha t th i s ma ter ia l i s t ic doctri n e was never popu la r i n
I nd ia . H i n du s of th e Ved ic age be l i eved e i ther i n
crea t i on from noth i ng by the exert i on of d iv i ne power ,or i n crea t i on from chaos afte r the b i rth of the Crea tor
from the “ gol den embryo , or i n c rea t i on as a phe
nomenal emanat i on ; and post-Ved i c cosmol ogies com
b i n e the two fi rs t , wi th the except i on of the Vedan ta ,
wh ich adopts th e la s t .
There i s another l egend i n the Satapatha B rahmana
contrad ic t i ng th i s , i n wh i ch the gods are sa i d to have
made Prajapa t i,tha t h e genera ted th e wa ters ; and
des i r i ng to be reproduced from them,tha t he en tered
the wa ters,when an egg arose .
“ H e pondered on i t .
1 M u i r’s Sans . T ex ts,vo l. iv .
, p . 2 2 .
1 28 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
H e sa i d , ‘ Let there be , l e t there be !’ Aga i n : ‘ Let
th ere be !’
and all th i ngs appeared .
Accord i ng to Manu,th e H arivamsa
,and the Pu rana s
,
th e de i ty was prior to chao s ; he created the pr imeva l
wa ters by a thought , and depos i ted a seed i n them,
wh ich became a go l den egg , resp lenden t as th e sun,in
wh ich he h im se l f was born as B rahma,the progen i tor of
all wor l d s . (5)“ Th i s u n iverse was enve loped i n
da rknes s,unperce ived
,u nd i st ingu i shab le
,u nd i scern i b l e ,
u nknowab l e , as i t were en t i re ly sunk i n s l eep . (6) Then
the i rre s i st i b l e se l f-ex i s ten t l ord,u nd i scerned
,cau s ing
th i s un i vers e w i th the five e l emen ts and a ll other th ings
to become d i scern i b l e, wa s man i fe sted d i spe l l i ng the
gl oom . (7) H e who is beyond the cogn i sance of the
senses,sub t l e
, u nd i scern i b l e , eterna l , who i s th e es sence
of a ll be i ngs,and i nconce ivab l e
,h im se l f shone forth .
(8) H e,des i r i ng to produ ce var i ou s crea tu res from h i s
own body,fi rs t w i th a thought crea ted the wa te rs
,and
depos i ted i n th em a seed . (9) Th i s (seed) became a
gol den egg,resp l en den t as th e sun ,
i n wh ich he h im se l f
was born as B rahma, the progen i tor of a ll the worl ds .
1
1 Ku lluka ,an o ld commentato r , th us annotates on verse
n ine ,
“ Th at seed became a go lden egg, e tc . T h at seed , byth e w i l l of th e de i ty, became a go lden egg. Go lden ,
i.e . , as i twe re , go lden ,
from th e qua l i ty of pu ri ty attach ing to i t , and
not re a l ly go lden ; for s ince th e au th or p roc eeds to de scr ibeth e format i on of th e earth from one of th e h a lves of its sh e l l ,and we know by oc u lar proof th at th e earth is not go lden ,
we
see th at a mere figure of Speech is h e re emp loyed . In
th at egg H iranyagarbh a was p roduc ed, i .e . , entering into th e
S OUl— Wt l‘ l was invested in a subtle body —of that pe rson by
1 3 0 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
of the god s men t ioned i n them ,such as H iranyagarbha ,
V isvakarman,and Prajapat i . The pr im i t i ve narra t i ve
was e i ther grea t ly obscu red i n th e memory of, or part ly
rej ected by,the p ropounders of th i s theory . Tha t God
produ ced the chao ti c flu i d before H e formed the worl d,
was e i ther forgotten or rej ected , on the ground that i t
was contrary to experi ence to produce someth i ng ou t of
noth i ng . H ence chaos i s represen ted as exi st i ng to
gether w i th , and i n dependen t ly of, the Crea tor ; and the
Creator a s assum i n g d i scern i b l e fo rm i n a“ gol den
embryo in order to fash ion the un iverse . Accord i ng
to th i s theory , H e i s n oth i ng more than the arch i tect or
the maker of th e worl d from pre-exi s t i ng matter . Th i s
wa s a l so the Zend idea of creat i on , and hence th e phrase“ crea ted by Maz da
,i s Maz da-dha ta
,e stab l i sh ed or
arranged by Maz da . An d the firmament ,” th e “ in
fin i te t ime ,”and th e air wh i ch works on h igh
,are ca l l ed
se l f-crea ted
The i dea tha t th e Creator rose from a gol den embryo ,or a “ gol den egg
, p robab ly ori gi na ted i n a dim reco l
l ec t i on of the pr im i t i ve account tha t th e “ Sp i r i t of God
moved on the face of the wa ters ” .
1 F or the H ebrew
verb , recaph , t rans la ted “ moved,
”
mean s to “ flu tter,
” to
hover ,”
and to “ brood ”as of a bi rd over i t s nest .
A s an eagl e st i rreth up her nest , flu ttereth over her
young,
”etc ? The word tran s lated flut tereth here i s
th e same as tha t t ran s lated “ moved i n Gen es i s , i. , 2 .
I f,therefore
,the p rim i t i ve account was
,tha t God
,in
1 Genes i s I 2 .
2 D eu t . , xxx i i . , 1 1 .
T H E COSMOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 1 3 1
fash ion i ng the world,
“ flu ttered or “ brooded over
chao s,l i ke a b i rd over i t s nest
,wha t was more natu ra l
than that,i n th e cou rs e of t ime
,th e s im i l e i n vo l ved i n
the act i on shou l d have been forgotten,and God actua l ly
made to r i se from the “ gol den embryo,or to be b orn
from th e gol den egg , genera ted by the wa ters
And as the Teu ton ic Aryan s carr i ed away to the north
of Eu rope the pr im i t i ve be l i e f respect i ng the crea t i on o f
the worl d,so the Greek A ryan s carr i ed away to the sou th
the more recent , or e labora ted there a S im i lar th eory .
Pla to says,
“ that a ll wi se men , wi th th e except i on of
Pa rmen i des , thought tha t a ll th i ngs proceeded from
wa ter,and that genera t i on wa s a sort of flowi ng mot i on
A r i stophanes g ives the part i cu lars a s fol lows'
F i rst all was chao s ; one confused h eapD arkness enwrapped th e disagre e ing de ep ;In a m ixed c rowd th e jumbl ing e lements we re ,N or earth , nor a ir
,nor h eaven did appear ;
Ti l l in th is h orrid vast abyss of th ings ,T eem ing n igh t , spreading o
’
er h er co ld blac k w ings ,La id th e fi rst egg ; wh ence afte r t ime
’
s due cou rse ,
Issued forth love (th e world’
s pro l ific sou rc e),G l i sten ing w i th go lden w ings ; wh ich flutte r ing o
’
er
D ark chaos, gendered a ll th e nume rou s sto re
O f an ima ls and gods
1 X cios 77V Ka i avg, é’
peBo’
s T e uéAa u Trpc'
b'
r ou Ka i p rapos ebpbs .
I‘
gf d’
, obd’
dim,068
1
obpaubc by e’
pe’
Bovs‘ O,
i n cin eipixn KriMrms
T im-c l. n pé r to r ou bum/enta il 1111
15 f) p eh aurim'
ep os o’
Io'
u.
’
E § ou n ep t t eAAonéI/ a i s‘
c'
bpa t s gfika o r eu"
Epws 6 n odewris .
ET iABwV 11637 01! n r epbyow xpvo a iu eic s duep chxem Oivo ts
067 0 9 86’
xde i n r epdeun p tyeis I/vxicp, Karap r apov ebpbu,’
E ue<ir r evo e ye’
vo g hp e’
r epov, Ka i 7rp63'
r ov 6
’
s qbc'
bs,3 3
d r epou 8 013K or yevos tida l/an on, 7rpw'
Epcos o vuep tfev a’
naura .
T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
H ere n ight and chaos are represen ted as the fi rs t
su bs tances exi st i ng a l on e . They la i d an egg,whence
l ove was produced , — th e “ des i re of R .
-V . , x .
,1 2 9 , 4 ,
and th e “ go lden ch i l d ” of R .-V .
,x 1 2 1 , 1 , and the
Sp i r i t of God” of Gen es i s , i. , 2 ,
—wh ich,flu tter i ng o ’er
da rk chaos,gendered heaven , earth , an ima l s
,and gods .
I t shou l d be s tated tha t H i n du Pund i ts do not be l i eve
tha t th e Vedas con ta i n two or more theor i e s of the
c rea t i on of the wor l d . They ma i n ta i n tha t there i s on ly
one theory , v i ewed from d ifferen t s tandpoi n ts . H ence
th ey exp la i n nonent i ty as a sta te i n wh i ch name and
form (nama and rupa) were not developed , and not an
ab so lu te nu l l i ty l i ke that i nd i ca ted'
in the phrase,
hare’s horn s and H iranyagarbha , born from the “golden
embryo,th ey represen t as the ab stract neu ter B rahma
,
as sum i ng persona l i ty i n th e form of the ma l e B rahma,
i n order to tran sform what was ne i ther nonen t i ty nor“ en t i ty i n to the v i s i b l e u n iverse , hav i ng names and
forms , su ch as ea rth , sky , and water . Th i s , however, i s a
specu lat i on of a later age , when the s imp l e m ean i ng of
the hymn s h ad been forgotten , and the H i n du m i n d
had become profou nd ly affected wi th ph i l osophy .
5 . Crea tion a Phenomenal E mana tionfrom the D eity .
When the sages of the Upan i shad s h ad a tta i n ed the
h ighe st ph i l osoph ica l u n i ty , when they had merged a ll
th e e l ementa l gods , and all exi stences,mater ia l , men ta l ,
and sp i r i tua l , i n one grea t ent i ty , Atnza ,B rahma
,P rana ,
P urusha,or S a t , th ere was no room for a rea l obj ec t ive
crea t ion,such as the two we have a l ready cons i dered .
1 3 4 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
earth ; he i s i n deed the i n ner S e l f of a ll th i ngs .” 1 A s
all spokes are con ta i n ed i n the nave and i n the fe l l oes of
a wheel,a ll be ings and all se l fs are con ta i ned i n tha t
Se l f.” 2
Profe ssor M ax Mul l er , i n h is I n t roduc t ion to vol . i . of
the Sacred B ooks of the E ast , say s , tha t “ Atman was
l ooked u pon at the same t ime as th e sta rt i ng-po i n t of a ll
phenomena l ex i ste nce , the root of th e worl d , the on ly
th i ng tha t cou l d tru ly be sa i d to be,to be rea l and true .
A S the roo t of all tha t ex i st s,the Atman was i d en t ified
wi th th e B rahman,wh ich in San scr i t i s both mascu l i n e
and neu te r,and wi th the S a t , wh ich i s neu ter on ly , -that
wh ich is,or Sa ty
,the true
,the rea l . I t a l one exi s ts i n
the begi n n i ng , and for ever ; i t has no second . Wha t
ever e l se i s sa i d to ex i s t,deri ves its rea l be i ng from the
Sat . H ow th e one S at becom es many,how wha t we
ca l l c rea t i on,which they ca l l emanat ion con
stant ly proceeds and retu rn s to i t , h as been exp la i n ed i n
va r i ou s more or le ss fanc i fu l ways by an c i en t prophets
and poets . B u t wha t they a ll agree i n is th i s , tha t‘ th e whol e creat i on , a ll p lan ts , a ll an ima l s , a ll men ,
are
du e to th e one S at , are u phe ld by i t,and wi l l retu rn
to i t
Th i s theory of crea t i on is the l og ica l ou tcome of
Mon i sm or Panthe i sm . And a s Mon i sm or Panthe ism
is far i n fer io r,from a re l i g iou s po in t of v i ew , to the idea
of persona l gods , however imperfect , so we may remark
1 M undaka Up. , i i . 1 , 4 .
B rihadaryanaka Up. , i i . , 5 , 1 5 .
T H E COSMOLOGY O F T H E VE DA S . 1 3 5
tha t th i s theory of crea t ion is equa l ly i n fer i or to e i th er
of the two older ones wh ich appear i n the R i g-Veda .
The i den t i ty of cau se and e ffect,of subject and obj ec t ,
whi ch appea r s i n the U pan i shads, was made th e funda
men ta l doctr i ne of the Vedanta or non-dua l ph i l osophy ,a ph i losophy the most widely accepted in India at th e
presen t day .
CH A PT E R IV .
T H E A N T H ROPOLOGY O F T H E VE DAS .
Th ere is sure ly a p iec e of div ini ty in u s ; someth ing th atwas before th e e lements
, and owe s no h omage unto th e sun .
”
S IR T HOM AS B ROWN E .
T h e proper study o f mank ind is man .
— POPE .
1 . T he Origin and D ignity of M an .
The Ved ic A ryans were con sc i ou s of a d iv i n e or ig i n .
They fel t tha t they were i n t ima te ly connec ted wi th a
fa ther above, wh i l e they acknowledged tha t th ey S prang
from the earth benea th . Dyaush p itah , pr ith ivi mata ,
D yaush ,H eaven
,i s th e fa ther
,and Pr i th i v i , the broad
earth,is th e mother . “ H ea r u s , I nd ra ,
l i ke a fa ther,
” 1
for “ we have no other fri end bu t thee , 110 oth er happ i
ness,no other fa th er ” 2 Aga i n
,
“ We are th i n e , Magha
van,sa t i s fy th e des i re s of these thy worsh i ppers
M an everywhere is con sc i ou s of a h igher , as wel l as of
a l ower,or ig i n of a genes i s from heaven , as wel l as from
earth . P lato says , Ka i i! y?) abr oiis ufimp ovo a auhxe, dAA’
6 debs H Aa T TwV . And the earth as th e mother brought
1 R .-V . , i . , 104 , 9 . Ibid. , v i i i . , 2 1 , 14 ; v i i . , 2 1 , 9 .
3 Ibid . , i . , 57, 5 ; iv . , 17, 1 8 .
1 3 8 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
wh ich appears i n the San scr i t manas,the Greek navos,
th e Lat i n mens, and the E ngl i sh mind and man . What
to h im),‘ Pre se rve me ; I S ha l l save th ee ’
. (Manu inqu i red),‘ F rom wh at w i l t th ou save me (T h e fish rep l ied),
‘ A floodsha l l sweep away a ll th ese c reatu res ; from i t w i l l I re scue
th ee ’
. (M anu asked),‘ H ow (Sha l l) thy pre servat ion (be
T h e fish sa id, ‘ S o long as we are sma l l,we
are in great peri l , for fish devour fish ; th ou sha l t pre serve me
fi rst in a jar. Wh en I grow too large for th e jar , th en thoush a l t dig a trench ,
and p rese rve me in th at . Wh en I growtoo large for th e trench ,
th en th ou sh a l t c arry me away to th e
Ocean . I sh a l l th en be beyond th e reach of danger .’
S tra igh tway h e became a large fi sh , and sa id, ‘ N ow in such and su ch
a year th e flood wi l l c ome ; th ou sh a l t th erefore construc t ash ip , and resort to me ; th ou sh a l t embark in th e sh ip wh enth e flood ri ses
,and I sha l l de l ive r th ee from i t ’. H av ing thu s
preserved th e fish,M anu carr ied h im away to th e sea . T h en
in th e same year wh i ch th e fish h ad enj o ined , h e const ruc teda sh ip ,
and reso rted to i t . Wh en th e flood rose,Manu
embarked in th e sh ip . T h e fish swam towards h im . H e
fastened th e cable of th e sh ip to th e fish ’s h orn . B y th i s
means h e passed ove r th e north e rn mounta in. T h e fish sa id,‘ I h ave de l ivered th ee : fasten th e sh ip to a tree . B ut le stthe water sh ou ld cut th ee off wh i lst th ou art on th e mounta in ,
as much as th e wate r subs ides,so much th ou sh a l t descend
after i t . ’ H e ac cordingly desc ended as mu ch as th e wate rsubs ided . Wh erefore a lso th is , viz .
,
‘ Manu’
s descent ’ is (th ename) of th e north ern mounta in . N ow th e flood h ad sweptaway a ll th ese c reatures ; so M anu a lone was left h e re .
D es i rous of offspr ing, h e l ived worsh ipp ing and to i l ing in
arduous re ligious r i tes . Among th ese h e a lso sac r ificed wi thth e paka offer ing. H e cast c lar ified butter , th ic kened m i lk ,wh ey and cu rds , as an oblat ion into th e wate rs . Th ence in a
year a woman was produced.
”
T h e name of th e woman thus produced was Ida .
“ F rom
T H E A NTH ROPOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 1 3 9
h igher name cou l d they have given to man than th e
Th inker ” ? And in the ca se of the Aryan na t i on s ,
wh a t name cou l d have been more prophet i ca l ly signifi
can t ? F or have they not been pre-em i n ent ly th e grea t
Th inkers a s wel l as th e grea t ac tors i n every age?
H ave they not far ou t s tr ipped a ll other races i n c i v i l i sa
t ion , i n ph i l osophy , i n a rts,and i n sc i ence ? A re they
not to day the ru l e rs of th e wor l d,and i s i t presumptuou s
to affi rm tha t they are des t i n ed,u nder Prov i dence , to
b i nd all nat i on s together i n the go l den bonds of c i v i l i sa
t i on, commerce , and re l i g i on
_
2 . T he Consciousness of S in .
Professor Weber says,
“ The re l i g iou s no t ion of s in
is want i ng a l together,and subm i ss i ve gra t i tu de to the
god s i s a s yet qu i te fore ign to the Ind ian i n the Ved ic
age”
.
1 M ax Mul l e r , on the other hand , say s , “ The
con sc i ou sness of sin i s a prom i n en t featu re i n th e re l i g i on
of the Veda so i s,l i kewi se
,the be l ief tha t the god s are
Mann and Ida ,we are express ly to ld , th e rac e , known as that
of M anu,i .e. , th e race of men
,was de scended .
”
M anu , according to th e above legend, was th e progen i tor of a ll post-di luv ianmen .
T h e Legend of th e D e luge in th e M ahabharata resemblesth e above w i th some important addi t ions . It state s thate igh t persons were saved from th e wa ters ; th at S eeds of a ll
l iv ing th ings were pre se rved ; and gives th e durat ion of th e
flood as“ for many years It a lso po ints to th e h igh est
peak of “ H imavat (H ima laya) a s th e p lace wh e re th e S h ipwas t ied
,and for wh ich i t was ca l led N aubandha .
1 H ist. of Ind . L it ., p . 3 8 .
1 40 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
ab l e to take away from man the heavy bu rden of h i s
s in And the au th or of the Sacred P oetry of E a rly
R eligions remarks,Of that mora l conv ic t i on
,that mora l
en thu s iasm for goodnes s and j u s t ice , tha t mora l ha tred
o f wrong and ev i l,tha t z ea l for r i gh teou snes s
,that
angu i sh of pen i tence,which h a s e l s ewhere ma rked re
ligiou s poetry , there is s i ngu lar ly l i tt l e trace”
In th e
Ved i c hymn s . The fi rs t of th ese statemen t s i s far too
sweep i n g , th e second is exaggera ted as to th e word“ prom i n en t
, and the th i rd is upon the whol e correc t .
The fact i s , tha t when the A ryan s appea r fi rs t before
u s i n the “ Land of the five r ivers,the i r con sc i ou sness
of sin had become more obtu se than i t was form er ly ; and
hence the bu rden of the i r songs was not,
“ Lord , gran t
u s forg i venes s of s i n s , bu t ,“ gran t us food , progeny ,
wea l th,and v ic tory The fo l l owi ng hymn , addres sed
to I ndra,who was then the i r su preme de i ty , i s a fa i r
spec imen of the sp i r i t pe rvad i ng three-fou rth s of the
Ved i c hymn s
I .
“ Vorac i ou s dr i nker of the Soma j u ice , a l though we
be u nworthy , do thou ,I nd ra
,of bound l es s wea l th en ri ch
u s wi th thou sand s of exce l l en t cows and horses .
2 .
“ Thy benevo lence,handsome and m i gh ty
,l o rd of
food , endu re s for ever . Therefore, I ndra ,of bound l e ss
wea l th enr i ch u s wi th thou sands of excel l en t cows and
horses .
3 . Cast a s l eep (the two fema l e messengers of Yama) ;
l ook i n g at each other,l et them s l eep
,never waki ng .
1 Ch ipsfrom a German Workshop, vo l. i. , p. 4 1 .
1 42 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
thought . ” 1 “ The d iv i n e Sav i tr i t rave l s by an upward
and by a downward path ; he comes from a d i s tance,
remov i ng a ll sin .
” 2 I f we have s i nn ed aga i n s t the man
who loves u s,have ever wronged a brother
,fr i end or
comrade,th e ne ighbou r ever wi th us ,
or a stranger,O
Va runa ,remove from u s the trespass . I f we
,as
gamesters,chea t a t p lay , have cheated , done wrong
u nwi l l i ngly or s inned of pu rpose , cast a ll these s i n s away
l i ke l oosened fetters,and
,Varuna , l et u s be th i ne own
be loved .
” 3 “ Let th ose renown s and those pra ises of
th ine be proved tru e by thy showing mercy on u s , 0
I n dra . S lay u s not for one sin,nor for two
,nor for
three,nor for many , 0 hero .
1 Protect u s , Soma,from
ca lumny ; p reserve u s from S in p l eased wi th our serv i ce ,be our fr i end . Pro long our exi stence ,
A sv in s ; wipe
away ou r s i n s des troy our foes ; be ever ou r a s soc iates .
” 6
M ay ou r s ins be removed or repen ted of ” is the bu rden
of a whole hymn .
7
The A ryan s’
i n fant i l e not i on of s i n i s forc i b ly expres sed
i n the term s wh ich they u sed to denote i t . Those term s
are papa ,
8 from root pat , to“ fa l l , to “ fa l l down
aghas, Gr. ayos, enas and amcha t , from roots s ign i fyi ngi )fi rs t to “ go
,and then to go ast ray
,
“ m iss the ma rk”
IVirr iti , another word for sin,wh ich was a fterward s per
son ified as a power of evi l or destru ct ion , is der ived from
1 R .-V . , iv . , Ibid . ,
i . , 3 5 , 3 ; 1 1 5 , 6 .
3 Ibid .,v .
,85 , 7, 8 .
4 Ibid .,v i i i .
, 45 , 3 3 , 4 .
Ibid .,i ., 9 1 , 1 5 .
6 Ibid .,i . , 1 57 , 4 .
7 Ibid . , i . , 97 .
3 Gr. 7r6‘
r , Lt . pec , We lsh pech , H eb . pasha .
T H E A NTHRO POLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 143
th e same root wh ich y ie l d s r ita i n th e sen se of r i ght ;
and nir-r ita mean s not r i ght,or a devia t ion from the
r i ght pa th . S i n,therefore
,accord i ng to the ear l i e st con
cept ion of the A ryan m i nd , i s a fa l l from a h igher to a
l ower mora l sta te,a dev iat i on from the pa th of du ty , a
m i ss i ng of the ma rk of mora l exce l l ence on ce set before
the menta l v i s i on . The same i dea s are conveyed i n the
Tam i l (Tu ran ian) words T appu ,Tappia
’
am ,and Ka l tam,
S in,fau l t .
Words are foss i l i sed though ts ; and the i r test imony
respec t i ng the ear l i est concept i on s of the human m i n d
is as va luab l e as the te st imony of the rocks re spect i ng
the stru ctu re of an ima l s wh ich have long become ext i n ct .
Wha t a marve l l ou s confi rma t ion of the F a l l of man,
men t ion ed in th e th i rd chap ter of Gen es i s , we have i n
th e word s used for “S in in the Sem i t ic ,
A ryan, and
Tu ran ian languages
I f man,i n d iv i dua l ly and soc ia l ly
,as Evolu t i on i sts te l l
u s,be noth ing more than the produ ct of na tu ra l forces
,
which pu sh h im i rres i st i b ly forward , l i ke a m i gh ty hu rr i
cane,toward s h i gher and more comp l ex forms of l i fe
,
how d id the con sc iousnes s of sin,as a fa i lu re or a fa l l ,
i nvo lv i ng ca lam i ty,or i gi nate ? I f he be the mere ou t
come of i n terna l and externa l forces— of organ i sm and
env i ronmen t— h e may at certa i n stages of h is progres s
be defect i ve,bu t he cannot be a s i nner i n the sen se tha t
he has “ m i s sed the mark of mora l exce l l en ce set before
h im .
“ I t may requ i re thou sand s of years to e l evate
h im to a more comp l ete ex i stence ; bu t he has not fa l l en
from any i d ea!he m i gh t have reached . H e i s on ly,at any
1 44 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
poi n t,wha t the sum tota l of na tu ra l factors wh i ch en ter
i n to h i s be i ng have made h im .
‘
The two concep t i on s of
s i n and of deve lopmen t,i n th i s na tu ra l i s t ic sen se
,cannot
co-exi s t 1 We mu s t,therefore
,e i ther accept the test i
mony of con sc i ou snes s tha t man i s a s i n n er,and rej ect
th e theory of evo lu t ion,wh ich does not recogn i s e tha t
fact ; or accept the theory of evo lu t ion , and rej ect th e
te s t imony of consc i ou sness as fa l se .
B u t s i n i s more exp l ic i t ly represented i n the Vedas as a
voluntary tran sgres s i on of d iv i ne laws .
“ H owever we
break thy laws from day to day , men as we are,0 god
Varuna,do not d e l i ver u s u n to dea th ; nor to the b low of
the fu r i ou s ; nor to the wra th of th e sp i tefu l .” 2 Whenever
we,men , 0 Varuna, comm i t an offence before the heaven ly
host,whenever we break the law th rough thought l es sness
,
pun i sh u s not , 0 God , for that offence .
” 3 May we be
s i n l es s before Varuna,who i s graci ou s even to h im who
has comm i t ted s i n,and may we fo l l ow the laws of Ad i t i .
” 4
S i n was fe l t to be a grea t ca lam i ty,wh ich i s ev iden t
from th e figu re s o f speech u sed to represen t i t . I t i s a
bond or a “rope
” from wh i ch the s i n ner prays to be
re l ea sed .
“ D e l iver u s from s i n as from a rope ; l et u s
obta i n thv path of r i gh teou sness . ” “M ay the th read not
be torn wh i l e I am weav i ng my prayers ; may th e form
of my p i ou s works not decay before i t s season . V ar
una,take all fear away from me ; be k i n d to me , 0 j u st
k i ng ! Take away my sin l i ke a rope from a ca l f ; far
1 Princ ipa l T u l loch , T he Christian D octrine of S in‘1 R .
-V .
,i. , 2 5 , 2 .
3 Ibid . ,v i i . , 89 , 5 .
4 Ibid .,vn . , 87, 7 .
146 T H E TEACH ING OF -T H E VEDA S .
Rudra , waft u s i n Safety over the ocean of sin,repe l a ll
th e assau l ts of the u ngod ly.
” 1
Man, hav i ng a na tu ra l t enden cy to s i n
,is a prey to
temptat i on s . “ I t was not o ur own doi ng 0 Varu na :
i t was neces s i ty (or temp ta t i on), an i n toxica t ing drau ght
po i son , d ice , th ought l es sn ess . The ol d is there to mis
l ead the young ; even s l eep br i n gs u nr i gh teou snes s .“ Le t not on e s i n a fter another
,d i fficu l t to be conqu ered
,
overcome u s ; may i t depa rt a l together with lust . ” 3
“ M ay tha t b laz i ng weapon of you rs , Ma ru ts,be far
from u s,a l though throu gh human infirm it ies we offer
” 4 “Wha tever (offence)we have comm i t tedyou offence .
by wan t of though t aga i n st th e d i v i n e race , by feeb l eness
of u nderstand i ng,by v io l ence
,after the manner of m en
and e i ther aga i n s t gods o r men,do thou ,
O Sav i tr i,
make u s s i n l ess . ” 5
Thi s tenden cy i s not on ly t ran sm i tted by the law tha t
l i ke produ ces l i ke,bu t the s i n s of the fa ther s are in a
myster iou s way impu ted to the i r offspr i n g .
“ Ab so l ve
u s from the s i n s of our fa thers , and from those wh ich
we have comm i t ted with our own bod i es .
” 6 “ Let u s
not su ffer,M i tra and Va ru na
,for offence s comm i tted by
another ; le t u s not,V a su s
,do any act by wh ich you
may be offended .
” 7 “ M ay Agn i free me from the sin
wh ich my mother or fa ther comm i tt ed when I was i n th e
womb .
” 8 I f thou l i e s t there i n con sequ ence of any
I R .
-V . ,i i . , 3 3 , 3 . Ibid . , v i i . , 86, 6 .
3
3 8 , 6 .
1 Ibid .,v i i .
,
5 Ibid . , iv ., 54 , 3 .
‘1 Ibid.
,v i i . , 86 , 5 .
7 Ibid .,v i i . ,
3 T a ittiriya B r . ,In . , 7 , 1 2 , 3 . Mu i r , vo l . v .
, p . 66 .
T H E A NTH R OPOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 1 47
s i n comm i t ted by thy moth er , or thy fa ther , wi th myvo ice I dec lare thy re l eas e and del i ve ran ce from them
a ll.” 1
The effec t of s i n i s to separa te man from God . Do
I say th i s to my own se l f ? H ow can I get un to Varuna
Wi l l he accept my offer i ng wi thou t d i sp l ea su re When
sha l l I w i th a qu i e t m i n d see h im prop i t ia ted I a sk , 0
Varu na,wi sh i ng to know th i s my s i n— I go to ask the
wi se . The sages te l l me the same,
— Varu na is he who
is angry wi th me . Was i t an ol d s i n,0 Va runa
,that
thou w ish est to de stroy thy fr i end who a lways pra i s es
th ee ? Tel l me,thou un conquerab l e l ord
,and I w i l l
qu ickly tu rn to thee wi th pra i s e , freed from Aga in,
Vas i shta exc la ims,
“ Where are those'
friendsh ips of u s
two ? We seek the harmony wh i ch we enj oyed of o ld .
I have gon e,O se l f-susta i n i ng Va runa
,to thy va s t and
spac i ou s hou se wi th a thou sand ga tes . H e who was thy
fr i end , i n t ima te,th i n e own
,and be l oved , has comm i t ted
offences aga i n s t th ee . Let u s not who are gu i l ty reapth e fru i t s of ou r s i n . Do thou
,O wi se god
,gran t protec
t i on to h im who pra i ses thee .
” 3
A s i t i s d i fficu l t for u s,wi th ou r Ch r i s t ian con sc i en ce
,
to u nders tand the prec i se mean ing wh ich th e anci en t
A ryan s a t tached to the word “s in
,l et u s i n qu i re , (1)
Wha t ac t s were n ot , and (2)What acts were,co n s i dered
s i n fu l by them . Th i s a l one wi l l preserve us from the
error of e i ther over-e st imat i ng , or u nder-va lu i ng the i r
mora l sen se .
1 A .-V . , v . , 30 , 4 . M u i r . R .
-V . ,v i i .
,86 , 2 , 3 , 4 .
3 Ibid . ,v i i .
,88 , 5 , 6 .
1 48 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
I . Wha t acts were not con s i dered s i n fu l by the Ved ic
Aryan s .
A r i s tot le says , “ A s men rega rd th e form s,so a lso
they con s i der the l ives,of
'
the god s to be S im i la r to th ei r
own ”. Whatever ac ts , th erefore , a na t i on a ttr i bu tes
wi th approba t i on to it s gods,we may reasonab ly con
c lude,are h i gh ly esteemed by i tse l f. Throughou t th e
Ved i c hymn s,th e i n ebr i ety p rodu ced by quaffing the
Soma-j u ice is ce l ebra ted wi th u n feigned sa t i sfact i on . A l l
the god s are con stan t ly i nv i ted to dr ink of the “ immorta l
st imu lan t (amartyam madam), wh ich i nvigora tes them ,
and i nc reases the i r s trength beyon d a ll pra i se .
“ I n dra
has drunk ; Agn i has drunk . A l l the gods have become
exh i lara ted .
” 1 “ I n dra d ri nk s l i ke a th i rs ty s tag,or a
bu l l roam i ng i n wa terl es s was te .
” 2 And a ll th e effect s
produ ced on man by “strong dr ink are a scr i bed to h im .
I t i s s ta ted i n the A itareya B rahmana tha t,
“ The gods
get d runk,as i t were
,at the m id-day l i ba t i on , and are
con sequ en t ly at the th i rd l i bat ion i n a s ta te of comp l ete
drunken nes s ” ? The Sautramanii wa s a ceremony ap
poi n ted to exp ia te th e evi l e ffects of too free i n du l gence
i n the Soma-j u i ce .
Wine (S ura)was a l so i n u se ; for we read , “ I p lace
the po i son i n the sun,l i k e a wine sk i n or l ea thern bott le
,
i n the house of a vendor of wi n e .
” 4 Wine-b i bbers are
ment i oned i n R .-V .
,v i i i . , 2 1 , 14 .
“ The A sv i n s gave a
hu ndred j ars of wi ne to Kaksh ivan . The Soma
1 R .
2 Ibid . , v i i i ., 66 , 4 .
v i .,1 1 .
4 R .-V .
,i. , 19 1 , 10 .
5 Ibid .,i . , 1 16 , 7.
1 50 T H E TEA CH I NG O F T H E VEDA S .
wh ich a l lude wi th approba t ion to the pos ses s i on of more
than one wife , Powerfu l I n dra , the i r m i n d s adhere to
thee,as a ffec t i ona te w ives to a l ov i ng hu sband In
dra took to h im a ll the c i t i e s as one common hu sband
h is wive s .” “ Thou dwel l est w i th thy glor i es l i ke a
” 3Raja wi th h is wive s. Even po lyandry is h i n ted at i n
the fact tha t th e two Asvi n s h ad one wi fe i n common,
4
and R odasi was the common wife of th e Maru t s ."
The S atapa th a B rahmana,i x . ,
1, 4, 6, d i st i n ct ly avows
the p r i nc i p l e of po lygamy , and expla i n s i t s or ig i n . H e
sacr ifices to the man fi rs t,then to the women . H e
exa l ts th e man i n con sequ ence of h i s v i gou r . H e sac r i
hees to th e man as to one ,and to th e women as to
many .
“ H ence a l so one man h as many wives .
The re-ma rr iage of widows was not con s i dered a c r ime
i n the Ved ic age ,a s i t is now ; and the crue l custom of ch i l d
marr iage ; and th e horr i d r i te of Su tt ee , or widow-bu rn i ng,
1 R .-V . ,
i . , 62 , 1 1 . Ibid . ,v i i . , 3 Ibid .
,v i i . , 1 8 , 2 .
4 Ibid .,i . , 1 19 , 5 .
5 Ibid .
,i . , 1 67, 5 .
6 Mu ir , vo l. v . , p . 458 .
Th e re can be l i tt le doubt th at po lygamy , as we find i tamong th e ea r ly races in th e i r t rans i t ion from th e pastora l toth e agricu l tura l l ife , was c u stomary in India . We read in
H erodotus (v . , 5) th at , amongst th e Th rac ians , i t was u sua l ,afte r th e death of a man , to find out wh o h ad been th e mostbe loved of h is w ives , and to sacr ific e h er upon h is tomb .
M e la (i i . , 2) gives th e same as th e cu stom of th e Getae . H e
rodotus (iv .
, 71) asserts a S im i lar fact of th e S cyth ians,and
Pausan ias (iv . , 2)of th e G re e ks ; wh i le our Teuton ic Mytho logyis fu l l of instances of th e same fee l ing
”
(M . Mul ler’s H ist .A nc . S ans . L it .
, p .
T H E A NTH ROPOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 1 5 1
were then u nknow n .
1 We read i n A .
-V .,x .
, 5 , 27 ,8 ,
When a woman has had one hu sband before,and gets
another,i f th ey presen t the ay
’
a p anchandana offer i ng ,they sha l l n ot be separa ted . A second hu sband dwe l l s
i n the same worl d wi th h i s re-wedded wi fe,i f he offers
the aj a panchandana . And i n the A .
-V ., v . , 8 , 9 , i t i s
s ta ted that , when a woman ha s had two former h u s
bands,not B rahman s , i f a pr i est take her hand (i .e
marry her), i t i s he a l on e who is her hu sband . I t i s a
B rahman on ly tha t is a hu sband , and not a Rajanya or a
Va i sya .
I t appea rs ,from th e fo l l ow i ng verse
,addressed to the
A sv i n s,that i t wa s not an uncommon th i ng for a widow
to ma rry her deceased hu sband’s brother , “ Where are
you by n i gh t , Asvi n s , and where by day? Where do
you a l i gh t Where have you dwe l t Who d raws you
to h i s hou se,as a widow does her b rother-in-law to the
couch,or as a woman does a man The same cus tom
was i n vogu e in the t ime of Manu ,for i t is enacted in
h i s code tha t , “ The dam se l,i n deed
,whose hu sband
sha l l d i e a fter troth verba l ly p l i ghted , bu t before consum
1 “ Th ere is no text to countenanc e laws wh i ch a l low th e
marr iage of c h i ldren and proh i bit th e re-marriage of c h i ldw idows
,and th e unh a l lowed ri te o f bu rn ing th e w idow w i th
th e corpse of her h u sband is both aga inst th e sp iri t and th ele tter of th e V eda ”
(Ch ips from a German I’Vorkshop,vo l . i . ,
p . 3 1 3 )
R .-V . , x . , 402 . Compare D eute ronomy , xxv . , 5 ; Genes is
,
xxxv i i i .
1 52 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
mat i on , h is brother sha l l take i n marr iage accord i ng to
th i s ru l e ” 1
The Ved i c A ryan s cons i dered i t ne i ther a sin nor a
d isgrace for adu l t fema l e s to rema i n at home unmarr i ed,
or for those growing old to marry . We read,
“ A s a
v i rtuou s ma i d en growi ng o ld i n th e same dwel l i ng wi th
her paren ts (c la im s from them her su pport), so came I
to thee for wea l th And the A sv i n s are h igh ly pra i sed
for hav i ng cu red Gosha,th e daughter of Kaksh ivan
,and
g iven her a hu sband when advanced i n years .
3 There
are i nd ica t i on s even tha t women exerc i sed the l i berty of
choos i n g the i r own hu sbands i n those days .
4
The p lu nder i ng and des tru ct i on of the non-A ryan races
was a theme of grea t rej o i c ing . I ndra and Soma , bu rn ,destroy the Rakshasas ; ann ih i late the fool s ; s lay and
ca s t them i n to da rkness,so tha t none of them may ever
thence retu rn . I ndra con sumed the Raksha sa s with
h i s bo l t as fi re a dry fores t ; 6 yea ,
“ he s l ew wi th h i s
bo l t a thou sand,ten thou sand
,a hundred m i l l i on s of the
Dasyu s Destroy every one tha t rev i l e s u s ; s lay
every one tha t does u s i nj u ry ; may all a l i en s per i sh ,”is
th e constan t ly recu rr i ng prayer ?
We fi nd no trace here of the ancien t brotherhood of
1 M anu , i x . , 69 . A nd Gautama (xv i i i . , 4 1) says ,“ A woman
wh ose h usband is dead,and wh o des ires offspr ing, may bare
a son t o h er broth e r-in-law3 R .
-V .,i i . , 3 Ibid . , i. , 1 17 , 7 .
4 Ibid .,x .
, 27 , 1 1 , 12 .
5 Ibid. , v i i . , 104 , 1 , 3 .
Ibid . , vi . , 1 8 , 10 .
7 A .-V . v i i i .
,8 , 7 ; R .
-V . , i i . , 14 , 6 , 7 .
3 R .-V . , x . , 1 02 , 3 ; iv . ,
vu i . , 3 9 ; v i . , 60 , 6 .
1 54 T H E T EACH IN G OF T H E VEDA S .
to “ dr ive away from ou r pa th th e waylayer,the th i ef
,
the robber and I n dra i s en treated not to take advan
tage of u s l i ke a dea l e r ” 1
I l l i bera l i ty toward s one’s own k i th and k i n wa s severe ly
condemned , wh i l e l i bera l i ty was h igh ly pra i sed . H e who
keep s h i s food to h im se l f has sin to h imse l f a l so .
” “ The
wise man make s the gi v i ng of gi fts h is brea s tp la te .
”
The car of bou nty ro l l s on ea sy whee l s .
” The hou se
of the l i bera l man is l i ke a poo l where l o tu ses grow .
The property of the l i bera l man never decays,wh i l e
the i l l i bera l fi nd s no comforter . The givers of g i fts
ab i de a l oft i n th e sky ; the bestowers of horse s l i ve wi th
the sun ; the givers of gol d a t ta i n immorta l i ty ; th e be
stowers of ra imen t pro long the i r l i ves .” 2
Sorcery and wi tchcraft,seduct i on and adu l te ry
,were
denou nced .
Non-performance of re l ig i ou s r i tes ; the rev i l i ng of the
sou l-i n sp i r i ng Soma-ju ice ; d i sobed i en ce to paren t s ; and
wan t of peace and concord i n the fam i ly , were con s i dered
wrong . The fo l lowi ng bened i ct i on from the A tharva
Veda has l ost none of its force and beau ty for domest ic
happ i ne s s by the lap se of th ree thou sand yea rs ,“ I
impart to you concord wi th u n i ty of hea rts and freedom
from ha t red ; de l igh t one i n the other a s a cow i n the
b i rth of a ca l f. May th e son be obed ien t to h is fa ther ,
and of one m i n d wi th h is mother . May the w i fe , a t
l R .-V . ,
i., 42 , 3 ; i . , 3 3 , 3 .
’
Ibid .,x . ,
107 .
Ibid. , v i i . , 104 , 8 , 25 , 5 ; i. , 1 67, 4 ; i i . , 29 , 1 ; x . , 3 4 , 3 ; v i i . ,
T H E A NTHR OPOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 1 55
peace wi th her hu sband , speak to h im hon i ed words .
Let not brothe r ha te brother , n or s i s te r s i s ter ; concord
ant and un i ted i n w i l l , s peak to one another wi th k i nd
word s . ” 1
I t is now ev i den t that the Ved i c A ryan s regarded s in ,
not on ly as a F a l l , bu t a l s o as th e voluntary t ran s
gression of d iv i n e laws en ta i l i n g pu n i shmen t . They
recogn i sed the rea l i ty of both a d i v i ne and a human wi l l .
The gods,of the i r own free wi l l , gave the laws , and men ,
of the i r own free wi l l,broke them . The i r con sc i ou sness
of s in,the refore
,conta i n s (1 ) a knowl edge of d iv i n e laws ,
and (2 ) the volun tary tran sgres s i on of them .
B u t whence th i s knowledge of d iv i n e laws P What is
th e or ig i n of th e i dea of Law a s the mora l standard o f
r igh t and wrong ? M ax Mul l e r,i n h i s f f z
’
béer f Lecmres,
say s , tha t th e i dea of phys i ca l law ,denot i n g the uni
form i ty of na tu ra l phenomena,or ig inated i n the percep
t ion of the “ recu rr i ng retu r n Of day and n igh t,th e
week ly changes of the wan ing and i nc rea s i n g moon,th e
succes s i on of the sea son s,and th e rhythm i c dances of
the star s wh i ch un i form i ty fou nd expre s s i on i n the word
rz
'
z‘
a , r i gh t path or law , and tha t from th i s mm,th e
mora l law , th e r igh t path for man to wa l k i n , was
dedu ced or i n ferred . There seem s to be noth i ng i n the
Vedas to su pport th i s v i ew . The word r im,though
u sed ch iefly to denote ou twa rd cosm i ca l order,is a l so
u sed to denote i nward mora l o rder , and hence the
qu est i on whether the one order i s a dedu ct i on or an
1 R .-V . , v i . , 52 , 2 ; A .
-V . , i i i . , 3 0 .
1 56 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
i n feren ce from the other mu st be sett l ed on grou nd s
other than ph i l o logica l .
N ow,grant i ng tha t s en suou s impres s i on s of the uni
form i ty of natu ra l phenomena d i d p rodu ce the i dea of
phy s i ca l law , in the sen se of the r ight pa th i n wh ich the
heaven ly bod i es shou l d move , how cou l d tha t or i gi na te
the i dea of a r i ght path in a mora l sen se,i n wh ich man
shou l d go P I f i t be affirmed tha t the concept of ou tward
cosm ica l order d i d not produ ce i nwa rd mora l o rder as
su ch,bu t the percept i on of i t ; th en , we ask
,how can
i nwa rd mora l order exi st apart from th e percept i on of
i t ? Is not percep t i on the cond i t i on and ev i dence of its
ex i stence ? Aga in,i f i t be affi rmed that the concept of
o u twa rd cosm i ca l order awakened the la tent sen se of
i nwa rd mora l order,then i t is ev i den t tha t the sense
,or
i dea, was th ere a l ready ; and hence tha t i t was not
der ived from th e mm,the concept of ou twa rd cosm ica l
o rder , wh ich , ex fiypof/zesz’
, was deduced from sen suou s
impress i on s . B efo re man cou l d app ly the w ord mm to
the un i form i ty of natu ra l ph enomena ,he mu st have
known th e mm,the r i gh t pa th ,
and its oppos i te . H e
mu s t have been con sc i ou s of a law wi th i n , or a standard
by wh ich he cou l d j u dge wha t is r i gh t and what is
wrong . The very terms rzg/zz and wrong imp ly th e
possess i on of su ch a s tandard . The mora l law i s in
gra i n ed in the natu re of man,wri t ten
,as the Apost l e
Pau l says,on the hea rt ; 1 and hence fragmen ts of i t are
foun d among a ll nat i on s ; bu t among none more fu l ly than
1 R om .,i i . , 1 5.
1 58 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
wherever man i s fou nd . I t i s the g l ory of Chr i s t ian i ty
that i t h as sa t i sfied that i n s t i n ct by au thori ta t i ve ly ra t i ~
fying th e bel i ef i n immorta l i ty and p lac i n g i t b eyond a
doubt
The i n t ima t ion s of a be l i e f i n l i fe after dea th are not
so numerou s and d i s t inc t i n th e fi rst e ight books of the
R ig-Veda as i n the las t two . They are , however , sufi
‘i
c iently numerou s and d i st i nc t to i n d ica te that su ch a
bel i e f was a prom i n ent fea tu r e i n the re l i g i ou s creed of
the anc i en t A ryan s . A l l the gods are bel i eved to be
immor ta l,and capab l e of conferr i ng immorta l i ty u pon
the i r worsh ippers . Agn i i s sa i d to ren der morta l s im
morta l .1 The same power is a scr i bed to Soma .
2 The
Maru t s are besought to make the i r worsh i ppers immor
ta l ;3
and M i t ra and Va runa are a sked to grant ra i n
wea l th , and immorta l i ty .
4
The fo l l owi ng hymn,addres sed to Soma
,i n the n i n th
book of th e R i g-Veda,con ta i n s a v iv i d d esc r i pt i on of l i fe
after death , expres sed i n beau t i fu l language wi th ch i l d l i ke
confidence :
Where i s eterna l l i ght,i n th e worl d where the sun i s
p laced , i n tha t immorta l , imper i shab l e worl d , p lace me,
O Soma l ”
Where K i ng V aivasvata re i gn s , where th e secret
p lace of heaven i s,where the m i gh ty wa ters are , there
make me immorta l“ W here l i fe i s free i n the th i rd heaven of heaven s ,
IR .-V .
,i. , 3 1 , 7. Ibid .
,i., 9 1 , 1 .
3 Ibid. , v .,
4 Ibid . ,v .
,63 , 2 .
T H E A NT H R OPOLOGY OF T H E V E D As. 1 59
where the worl d s are rad ian t , there make me im
'7)morta l“ Where there i s happ i nes s and de l igh t
,where j oy and
p l easu re res i de,where the de s i re s of our de s i re are
a tta ined,there make me immorta l '” 1
The Ved i c Aryan s rega rded immorta l i ty a s a spec i e s
of apotheos is or de ifica t ion . Those who were made im
morta l became de i t i e s them se l ves,and were i nvoked for
th e same b l ess i n gs as the e l der d e i t i e s be stowed . The
R i bhu s,the th ree son s of S udhanvan
,th e dexterou s
humb l e-m i n ded a rt i san s of the god s, con s tru cted “ the
gl or iou s three-whee l ed car of the Asv i n s “ re stored
the i r aged and i nfi rm pa re nts to you th ”
; and “ d iv i ded
i n to fou r th e n ew sacr ific ia l lad l e wh i ch the d iv i n e
T vash tri had made,for wh ich exh i b i t i on of sk i l l they
obta i ned d iv i n i ty , and “ proceeded on the road of immor
ta l i ty to the a s semb lage of the gods whence th ey are
i nvoked : “ Ye who th rough you r sk i l l have become
god s,and l i ke fa lcon s are sea ted i n th e sky , do ye ,
ch i ld ren of strength,give u s r i ches ; ye , O son s of S ud
hanvan , have become immorta l” 2
The Ved i c doctr i n e of a fu tu re l i fe i s c l ose ly connected
1 R .-V . , ix .
, 1 1 3 . Professor R oth says respec t ing th i s hymn,
If i t were necessary , we m igh t h e re find th e most powe rfu lweapons aga inst th e v i ew wh ich has been late ly rev ived and
proc la imed as new, that Pers ia was th e on ly bi rth p lac e of th e
idea of immorta l i ty ; and that even th e nat ions of E urope hadderived i t from that quarte r ; as if th e re l igiou s sp i r i t of eve ry
gifted race was not able to a rrive at i t by it s own strength”
.
Ibid .
,i i i . , 60, 2
‘
iv . , 3 5 , 8 .
160 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
wi th,and seem s t o have grown up a round , the memory
of the Pi t r i s,or ancestra l fa th ers of fam i l i e s . Though
they h ad depa rted from th i s wor l d,they had not ceased
to l i ve . They a ll occu py d i fferent stages of b l es sedness
i n the ce l es t ia l spheres .
l They have a ll “ obta ined r iches
among the and as“com pan i on s of the gods
,
they are a ll i nvoked,l ike the Roman Ca tho l ic Sa i n ts
,
to be prop i t i ou s to , and to i n tercede for , the i r de
scendants here on earth .
8 I nvoked to these favou r i te
ob la t i on s p laced on the grass , may the F ath ers,the
offerers of Soma,come ; may they hea r us ; may they
i n tercede for u s,and preserv e u s . Do u s no i nju ry
,O
F a thers,on accoun t of any offence wh ich we , after th e
manner of men ,may comm i t aga i n st you . Bestow
wea l th on the morta l who worsh i ps you F a thers,bestow
th i s wea l th u pon you r sons , and now gran t them su sten
ance .
4 Thu s the anc i en t A ryan fa i th i n the cont i nu ed
l i fe of the F a thers , who“ had departed fi rs t
,
”was so
strong as to p lace the doc tr i ne of immorta l i ty beyond a
dou bt . Dea th had not ann ih i lated them ,and hence need
not ann ih i late the i r son s ; and therefore th ey pray to be
added to the peopl e of etern i ty,
” who dwel l i n Va ru na ’s
wor l d of perfect and undying l igh t . Th i s fa i th has never
l o s t i ts ho l d on the H i n du m i n d . I t man i fests i tse l f now
i n the S raddha ceremony,or offer i ng to h is F a ther’s
sp i r i t,wh ich is the mos t so l emn du ty devo lv i ng on every
H i n du son .
1 R .-V .
,x.
,1 5, Ibid .
,i ., 9 1 , I .
3 Ibid .,v i . , 75 , 10 ; v i i . , 3 5 , 1 2 .
4 Ibid. ,x . , 15 , 1 , 2 .
162 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
whol e l egen d i n to one of the myth s of the Dawn,
—Yama,
th e day ,and Yam i
,the n ight . Th i s exp lana t i on
,
’ how
ever , seems too na rrow and exc lu s ive , as i t l eaves no
room for th e exerc i s e of thought and imagi na t ion u pon
the or i gi n , cond i t ion,and des t i ny of the human race .
Su re ly the t ragic el ements of human l i fe,b i rth
,and
dea th , must have tou ched the anc i en t A ryan s as pro
foundly as the r i s i ng and sett i ng of the sun .
The l egend of Yama and Yam i wa s the common
inher i tance o f the H i n du and I ran ian A ryan s before
the i r separa t ion ; and hence we may rea sonab ly i n fer
tha t i t was one of the o r i gi na l trad i t i on s of the p r imeva l
home . The H indu Yama,th e son of V ivasvat , i s the
I ran ian Y ima ,the son of V ivanghat . The H i n du Yama
i s “ the fi r s t man tha t d i ed,th e fi rst tha t departed to
the ce l e st ia l wor ld , and sp i ed ou t the road for many
Consequen t ly he is “ th e a s sembl er of men , th e ki ng
of the departed , who fi rs t found for u s the way to a
home beyond the grave,wh ich sha l l n ot be taken from
u s1
The I ran ian Y ima i s the k i ng and founder of a go l den
age , the mos t glor iou s of men ,du r i ng whose re ign
ne i ther s icknes s , nor age , nor dea th ; ne i ther co l d nor
hea t ; ne i ther hatred nor s tr i fe ex i s ted . B ut after con
t inu ing for some t ime to d i ffu se happ in ess and immor
ta l i ty , he was d i s tu rbed by the powers of darkness ,and so was compe l l ed to wi th draw
,together wi th h is
R .-V .
,x.
,14 .
T H E ANTHRO POLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 1 63
a ttenda n ts,to a more con trac ted s phere 1 The d i fference
between these two legend s i s th i s : th e H i n du Yama is
the k i ng of the b le ssed af ter the i r depa rtu re to the
ce le st ia l worl d ; whereas the I ran ian Y ima i s th e k i ng
of the b l essed in l/zz'
s world,wh o have con t i nu ed to l i ve
wi th h im from th e golden age . Th i s l egend , i n its
origi na l form,probab ly conta i n ed these two vers i ons .
F or the trad i t i on of the fi rs t man tha t d i ed,
” th e one
so l e morta l,mu st necessa r i ly i nc lu de the trad i t ion o f
th e fi rs t man tha t l ived . The I ran ian s emphas i sed the
latte r and the H i n du s th e former . Th i s is eas i ly ex
p la i n ed . The I ran ian s , tormen ted wi th the mora l antago
n isms of good and ev i l , whi ch th ey fel t so keen ly , c lu ng
to the trad i t i on of a golden pas t when these d i d not
1 S im i larly,H esiod in h is ”f orks and D ay s desc r ibes th e
go lden age”
“Wh en gods a l i ke and morta ls rose to birth ,
A go lden rac e , th’ immorta ls formed on earth
Of many-languaged men : th ey l ived of o ld,
Wh en Kronos re ign’
d in h eaven— an age of go ld.
L i ke gods th ey l ived w i th ca lm untroubled m ind ,
F ree from th e to i l and angu ish of our k ind .
N or sad dec rep i t age app roach ing nigh ,Th e ir l imbs unnerved w i th fra i l infi rm i ty ;S t rangers to i l l , thy nature ’
s banque ts proved ,
R ich in earth ’
s fru i ts,and of th e best be loved
Th ey sank to earth as op iate s lumbe r sto leS oft o’
er th e sense , and wh e lm’
d th e w i l l ing sou l .Th e irs was each good : th e gra in exuberant so i lPour
’
d th e fu l l h arve st , uncompe ll’
d by to i l .T h e v i rtuous many dwe l t in common blest
,
A nd all unenvying sh ared what all in peace possessed .
T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
exi s t . B u t the H i n du s , l e s s mora l , more imagi nat i ve,
en tangl ed i n the co i l s of natu re worsh i p , s i gh i ng for
re l i ef,c l ung to the trad i t i on of the fi rs t man tha t d i ed ,
who had opened a way fo r them to the k i ngdom of
l i gh t,whe re a ll the i r sorrows sha l l cea se .
I n Yama,th e Ved i c doctr i ne of a fu tu re sta te finds its
h igh est expre s s i on . The F a thers are not l o st s i gh t of ;but he be i ng the F a th er of th e F athers
,the fi rs t Manu
,
or man , is exa l ted above them ,and rega rded as the i r
supreme ru l er . H e dwel l s i n ce l e st ia l l i gh t i n th e
i nnermost cen tre of heaven .
1 H e grants to the d eparted
both “an abode d ist i ngu i shed by days , and wa ters and
l i gh ts,
and “a l ong l i fe among the gods ” .
2 H e is
a s soc iated wi th th e d iv i n e Varuna ,worsh i pped as a god
,
and “ feasts accord in g to h is des i re on the ob lat i on s ” 3
H e shares h i s grat ificat ions wi th the eager V asish tas ,our anc i en t ancestors
,who presen ted the Soma l i ba t i on .
“
Yama and the F a th er s dwe l l toge ther i n eterna l b l i s s
and the most profound yearn i ng of the i r ch i l d ren was t o
j o i n them when th is l i fe had become ext i nc t . H ence
when the body was be i ng con sumed on the fu nera l pyre,
the fol l owi ng verses were addres sed to the sou l,Depa rt
thou,depart by the anc i ent pa th s to the p lace wh i ther
our ear ly fa thers have departed . There sha l t thou see
th e two k i ngs Yama,and th e god Va runa
,exu l t i ng i n
i ndependen t power . M eet the F athers , meet wi th Yama ,
meet with the recompen se of the sacr ifi ces wh i ch thou has t
1 R .-V . , i x. , 1 1 3 , 7, 8 .
“3 Ibid.
,x. , 9 , 1 1 .
3 Ibid .
,x .
,x .
,1 5 , 8 .
4 Ibid . , x . ,1 5, 8 .
1 66 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
th e earth,the wa ters , or th e p lants , accord i ng to the i r
severa l affin i t ie s . “ A s for h i s u nborn part,do thou
(Agn i) ki nd le i t wi th thy hea t ; l e t thy flame and thy
lu stre k i nd l e i t,wi th those form s of th i ne
,wh ich are
ausp ic i ou s , convey i t to th e worl d of the r ighteou s 1
The sp i r i t thu s i nvested w i th a lu s tre l i ke tha t of the
gods , soars to rea lms of eterna l l i fe , where i t rece i ves its
anci en t body i n a comp l ete and glor ified form wi thou t
a l imb m i s s i ng .
2 The be l i ef i n th e immorta l i ty of the
sou l,
” says B urnou f,
“ not naked and i nac t ive , bu t l i v i ng
and c l othed wi th a glor i ous body,wa s never i n terru pted
for a momen t ; i t is now i n I n d ia wha t i t was i n those
an c i en t t imes , and even rest s on a s im i lar metaphys ica l
ba s is .
The Ved i c concep t i on of the p l ea su res of heaven is
sen sua l ra th er than sp i r i tua l , M ahomedan ra ther than
Chr i s t ian . The gods themse l ves are not regarded as
possess i n g pu re ly sp i r i tua l na tu res , bu t as subj ec t to the
i n fluence of va r i ou s sensua l a ppet i tes . They de l igh t con
t inua lly i n quaffing th e Soma,and i n th e exh i la ra t ion i t
produ ces ; Yama is repre sen ted as ca rou s i ng wi th the
gods under a t ree ; 4 the Ad i tya s as ea t i ng honey ; 5 and
the F a thers as i n du l g i ng i n fes t i v i ty or revel ry wi th
Yama .
“ I n dra i s sa i d to have a handsome wi fe , and . to
enj oy p l easu re i n h is hou se .
7 The Gandharva s a ssum e
the form o f hand some men,i n o rder to seduce earth ly
1 R .-V . ,
x . ,16 . A .
-V .,1 8 , 2 1 , 24 , 2 5 .
3 La Veda, p . 1 86 .
1 R .-V . ,
x ., 13 5 , 1 .
5 A .-V xv i i i . , 4 , 3 1 .
6 R .-V .
,x . , 14 ,
1 1 .
7 Ibid . ,6 .
T H E A NTH R OPOLOGY oF T H E VEDA S . 1 67
fema l es , though they have the i r own ce l est ia l w ives,
th e A sparases .
1 I f, then , th e p l ea sures of the gods are
regarded as ca rna l and sen sua l,i t is too much to expec t
the anc i en t R i sh i s to imagi n e the p l ea su re s of d eparted
men to be anyth i ng d i fferen t . I t i s d i fficu l t to u nder
s tand , therefore , how Professor Roth cou l d have wr i tten ,What sha l l be the emp loymen t of th e b l e s t
,i n Wha t
sphere sha l l the i r act iv i ty expend i tse l f ? to th i s ques t i on
anc i en t H i n du wi sdom sought n o an swer I t i s d i s t i nct ly
s ta ted i n A .
-V .,i v . , 3 4 , tha t “ i n the ce l est ia l region the
fa i th fu l are prom i sed ponds fi l l ed wi th c lar ifi ed bu tte r
honey,wine
,m i lk , and cu rd s , as wel l as abundance of
sexua l e nj oymen t
Ved ic fu tu r i ty had its heaven,bu t th e i n t ima t i on s tha t
i t had i t s he l l are l e ss numerou s and d i s t i nc t . There
are passages,however
,wh ich show tha t the anc i en t
A ryan s bel i eved i n a p lace of pun i shmen t for th e wi cked .
O therwi se we can scarce ly exp la i n such passages a s
those i n wh ich Yama is rega rded as an Obj ec t of terror .
H e i s sa i d to have two i n sa t iab le dogs , wi th fou r eyes
and wide nos tr i l s,wh ich guard th e road to h i s abode ,
and wh i ch the dead are adv i s ed to hu rry past wi th a ll
poss i b l e speed .
2 These dogs wander among men as h i s
messengers,doubt l ess to summon them to the presence
of the i r master,who i n R .
-V .,x . ,
1 65 , 4 ,is i den t ified
wi th zzzn’
éyu ,dea th , and de scr i bed a s send ing a b i rd , the
h era l d of doom . D el iveran ce a l so i s sough t from th e
bond s of Yama,a s wel l as from those of Va runa .
3
1 A .
-V .,iv . , 3 7 , 1 1 . R .
-V . ,x.
,14 ,
10,1 2 .
3 Ibid .,x .
, 97, 16 .
1 68 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VE DA S .
I t may be obj ected tha t these pa s sages wh ich repre sen t
Yama a s an obj ec t of terror , do n ot prove a fu tu re he l l,
bu t on ly the i n st i nc t ive fea r o f man to d i e . B u t we have
more pos i t i ve ev i dence . M en t i on is made of a p i t (karta),i n to wh ich the ha ted and i rre l i g i ou s are hu rl ed 1
and in to
wh ich I nd ra casts those who offer n o sacr ifices .
“ Th i s
deep abyss has been produced for those who,be ing s i n
ners,fa l se , un tru e , go abou t l i ke women wi thou t brothers ,
l i ke wi cked fema l es hosti l e to th e i r hu sbands . 3 One poet
prays tha t th e Ad i tya s may preserve h im from the de
s troyi ng wol f,and from fa l l i n g i n to the p i t .4 And I ndra
is imp l ored to ann i h i la te th e m i gh t of ma l i gnan t hosts,
and hu r l them i n to the va s t and v i l e p i t . ” 5
The doc tr i n e of a fu tu re sta te of rewa rds and pun ish
men ts i s more d i st i nc t ly tau ght i n the B rahmana s than
i n the Man tra por t i on of the Veda s . Profe s sor Weber
says,
“ I n th e B rahmana s,immorta l i ty
,or at l ea s t l on
gevity ,i s prom i s ed to those who ri gh t ly u nders tand and
prac t i se the r i tes of sacr ifice ; wh i l e those who are
defic i en t i n th i s respec t , depart before the i r na tu ra l t ime
of l i fe to the next worl d,where they are weighed i n a
ba lance ,and receive good or ev i l
,accord i ng to thei r
deed s . The more sac r ifices any one has offered , the
more etherea l i s th e body he obta i n s ; or , as the B rah
mana s exp re s s i t , th e more rare ly does he need to eat .
I n other passages aga i n,i t is prom i sed a s th e h ighest
rewa rd tha t the p i ou s man sha l l be born in th e next
1 R .-V .
,ix . , 73 , 8 .
2 Ibid . , i. , 1 2 1 , 1 3 . ” bid” iv ., 5 , 5 .
‘1 Ibid .,i i .
,29 , 6 .
5 Ibid .,i. , 1 3 3 , 3 .
170 T H E TE ACH ING O F T H E VE DA S .
persona l be ing , a s ta te wh ich may be rea l i sed i n end l ess ly
d i verse forms of be i ng,from tha t of the i n sect to tha t
of the god , bu t a ll of equa l i n stab i l i ty , and su bj ect to
re lapse . I t is im poss i b l e to fix the per i od at wh ich th i s
ol d be l i ef found i n the new metaphys ica l i deas the
med ium favou rab le to i t s expan s ion . B u t i t is certa i n
tha t from the end of the s ixth cen tury,before ou r era
,
when Sakyamun i was med i tat i ng h i s work of sa l vat i on ,
the doctr i ne , su ch as i t appea rs i n the U pan i shads , was
a lmost comp l e te,and appea rs deep ly rooted i n the popu
lar con sc i ence . Withou t th i s point d’
appni the spread of
B uddh i sm wou l d hard ly be i n te l l i g i b l e .
The degrad in g effect of th i s doctr i ne on the H i n du
m i n d i s graph ica l ly d escr i bed by D r . Wi l son i n h i s India
T /zree T /zozzsana’Years Age ,
“ The bri ngi ng of the bru tes
up to the l eve l of man h as brought down man to th e
l eve l of the bru tes . I t has dr iven man ent i re ly from the
apprehen s ion of h is r i ght pos i t i on i n the sca l e of crea t i on .
I t ha s confu sed,compou nded and confounded h im , to h is
grea t d i shonou r,with beasts
,and b i rd s
,and rept i l e s , and
fi shes ; wi th the lowes t i nverteb ra ted an ima l s,and even
wi th vegetab l e organ i sm of every spec i e s and var i e ty .
I am now an i n tel l i gen t man ,bu t soon I may be a
cha t ter i ng monkey ; I am now a tender-hearted woman ,
bu t ere long I may be a raven ing wol f ; I am now a
s tu d iou s boy , bu t next yea r I may be a stu p i d bu ffa l o ;I am now a p layfu l g i r l , bu t a fter my next b i rth I may
be a sk ipp i ng goa t . Tha t qu eru l ou s c row may be my
own deceased fa ther , tha t hungry ca t my own departed
mother,tha t raging bear my qu ondam brother , and tha t
T H E ANTH ROPOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . I7I
c rawl i ng serpen t my la te s i ster . Th i s is the l eg i t ima te
language of metemp sychos i s . Wha t a degrada t i on of
the sub l ime doctr i ne of the anc i en t R i sh i s ! And wha t
a comp lete refu ta t i on of the d i ctum of certa in ph i lo
sophers , tha t the doctr i n e of a fu tu re state has been
gradua l ly evo lved from dream s ! The h igher up we
trace the H i n du A ryan doctr i ne of a fu tu re l i fe , th e more
perfect and sub l ime we find i t ; the l ower down we fo l low
i t , the more degraded and i rra t iona l i t appears .
4 . T ize Origin and Growl/z of Caste.
The word “caste is der ived from the Portugue se
word “casta
,race ; and i s u sed by Eu ropean s to re
present the San sc r i t word s va rna ,co l ou r , and j a/i , t r i be
or c lass . And the three word s easte, narna , ja tz’
,are u sed
to denote the var i ou s c lasses i n to wh ich the H i ndu com
mun i ty is d i v i ded by ha rd and fast l i ne s . wh ich abso lu te ly
bar every en trance from a l ower to a h igher soc ia l grade .
I t i s not mere ly a soc ia l i n s t i tu t i on,defin i ng th e va r i ou s
grades of soc i e ty l i ke rank among other na t ion s , bu t a
re l i g i ou s i n s t i tu t i on,a rad ica l d i fference between man
and man, crea ted by th e D e i ty
,th e preserva t ion of
wh ich i s the most sac red du ty devo lv i n g u pon every
H i n du .
The ru l e s of ca s te are a lmos t i n numerab l e : bu t they
are a ll connec ted more or l e ss wi th (1 ) food and its
prepara t i on, (2) in ter-ma rr iage
,and (3 ) profes s i ona l pu r
su i t s . These fea tu res,however
,were not deve loped i n
1 72 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VE DA S .
the ear l i e s t pa rt of th e Ved ic age .
1 “ There i s no
au thor i ty wha tever i n the hymn s of the Veda for th e
comp l i ca ted sys tem of ca s te ; no au thor i ty for the offen
s ive pr iv i l eges c la imed by the B rahman s ; no au thor i ty
for the degraded pos i t i on of the Sudra s . There i s no
law to proh ib i t the d i fferen t c las ses of the peop le from
l iv i ng together,from eat i ng and dr i nk i ng together ; no
law to p roh ib i t the marr iage of peop l e be long ing to
d i fferen t castes ; no law to b rand the offspr i ng of su ch
marr iages wi th an i n del i b l e st i gma .
” 2 R i sh i s and Pr ies ts,
a s we have seen before,
3 were from the Ksha tr iya,as wel l
as from the B rahman,caste ; su ch a s V isvamitra ,
the
au thor of th e Gaya tr i , and jamadagni , the repu ted fa th er
of Parasu rama, th e great champ ion of the Brahman s .
And B rahman R i sh i s ma rr i ed the dau ghters of K shatr iyas,
or ki ngs . I t i s ev iden t,therefore
,tha t Pr i ests and
R i sh i s.
d i d not con st i tu te a ca s te i n those days , i n
the modern sen se of the term . I n deed,the S atapatha
B rahmana d i st i nct ly s ta tes tha t a ll men a fter the de luge
sprang from M ann and Ida ; and the R i g-Veda ,i n i t s
accou nt of the fi r s t c rea ted pa i r,Yama and Yam i , im
p l i e s the common or ig i n of a ll na t i on s i n the begin n i ng .
1 At th at t ime th e re we re th ree featu res of caste not a s yetdeve loped : 1 st , restr ic t ion of trade or oc cupat ion ; 2nd , object ions to eating w i th peop le o th er th an caste men ; 3 rd , objec
t ions to inte r-marriage (A Lec ture de l ive red by Pundi tS ivanath S astr i , M .A . ,
in M adras,N ov . 1 9 ,
2 M ax Mul le r , Chips from a German Workshop, vol . i i . , pp .
3 1 1 , 2 .
3 S ee p . 10 ,ante.
174 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
even to Man u,d i d not make h im impu re u nder the
c i rcum s tan ces .
1
B u t though modern caste was unknown i n the Ved ic
age , the fou r soc ia l ranks , pr ies ts , wa rr iors , hu sbandmen
and serfs , were recogn i sed before the co l l ect i on of the
R i g-Veda was com p l eted . I n the goth hymn of the roth
book of the R i g-Veda, ca l l ed th e Pu rusha Sukta ,
the fou r
ranks are m en t i oned by the i r techn ica l name s .
“ When
they form ed (or offered up) Pu ru sha (primeva l M a le), i n to
how many parts d id they d i v ide h im ? What was h i s
mou th ? What were h is a rm s ? Wha t were ca l l ed h i s
th igh s and feet ? The B rahman was h is mou th ; the
Rajanya (ki ng)was made h i s arm s ; the Va i sya became
h is th ighs ; th e Sudra was born from h i s feet . Thi s
h i gh ly figu rat i ve hymn proves no more as to the or i g i n
of the fou r castes than i t does as to the ori g i n of the
moon , sun,and wind
,wh ich i t represen ts as hav ing
been produced respec t i ve ly from th e m i nd , the eye ,and the breath of Pu ru sha . I t is in tere st i ng on ly as
showi ng tha t the fou r soc ia l ranks were techn i ca l ly
known in those days . Aga i n , in an address to the
A sv i n s,th e poet says
,
“ F avou r the prayer
favou r the serv ice , k i l l the Rakshasa s , dr ive away the
ev i l favou r th e power (hha tra) and favour the
man ly st rength favou r the cow (o’hena , the repre
sentat ive of property) and favou r the peop l e or hou se2
The exa l ted pos i t i on of the pri esthood , as a profes s i on ,
1 Manu,IO
,106 .
2 R .-V . , v i i i . , 16-1 8.
T H E A NTH ROPOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 175
was a l so acknowledged and the Pri e s t had a lreadv com
menced to a rrogate to h imse l f that supreme power over
a ll othe r c las ses of th e commun i ty wh ich u l t ima te ly
cu lm ina ted i n h is de ifica t ion . Tha t k i ng before whom
ma rches the Pri es t,
1 h e a l one dwe l l s we l l-estab l i shed i n
h is own hou se,to h im the ea rth y ie l ds at a ll t ime s
,to
h im th e peop le bow by th em se l ves .
” The k i ng who
gives wea l th to the Pr i est,tha t imp lo res h is protec
t i on , he wi l l conquer unopposed the treasu res , whether
o f h i s e nem i es or h is fri end s ; h im the god s wi l l p ro
tect .
” 2 H e met,however , wi th determ i n ed res i stance
and r i d icu l e at fi rst,wh i ch i s ev i den t from the fol
lowi ng impreca t i on s,
“ Whosoever,O Ma ru t s , wean s
h imse l f above u s, or sco ffs at the p rayer (bra/mm)
wh ich we have made,may hot p lagues come u pon h im
,
may the sky bu rn up that ha ter o f B rahman s (bra/inla
dais/z)D i d they not ca l l th ee , Soma
, the Gua rd ian of the
B rahman ? d i d they not say tha t thou d id st s h i e l d u s
aga i n s t cu rses ? Why dost thou l ook on when we are
scoffed at ? H u rl aga i n st th e ha ter of the B rahman the
fiery spea r . 3
Accord i ng to Manu,B rahma cau sed the B rahman
,the
Ksha tr iya , th e Va i sya ,and the Sud ra
,to proceed from
h i s mou th,h i s arm
,h is th igh
,and h i s foot ; and some of
these,by inter
-marr iage,and others by negl ect of B rahman i
ca l r i t es , produ ced th e other cas te s . And th i s i s the
1 In th e o rigina l B rahman. R .-V . ,iv . , 50 , 7 , 8 .
3 Ibid .,v i . , 5 1 , 2 , 3 .
1 76 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
preva i l i ng doct r i ne i n I nd ia at the present day .
1 Apart,
however,from th e fact that B rahma
, prayer , was not
d eve l oped i n to a god when the fou r soc ia l d ist i nc t i o n s
of rank were fi rst recogn i sed in th e R i g-Veda,many of
Manu ’
s degraded cas tes are known to be the pre-A ryan
abor ig i na l i nhab i tants of I nd ia ,su ch a s th e D rav idas of
the sou th ; wh i l e others der ive thei r names from cou n
tr i es and profes s i on s , su ch as V a ideh as from V ideha ;
and Venas , mu s i c ian s , from Vena ,lyre . Bes i des
,there
i s no ev i dence tha t Manu ’
s cas te system ever extended
to th e sou th of I n d ia . The A ryan s d id not conquer th e
sou th by force of a rms , as th ey d i d the north , bu t by the
more honou rab l e force of superi or knowl edge and h i gher
c i v i l i sa t i on . They were u nab le , therefore, e i th er to
impose the i r language u pon the abor ig i na l i nhab i tan ts ,
1 T h e fo l low ing is a conc ise statement of th e doctr ine fromth e Jat imala,
“ In th e fi rst c reat ion by B rahma, B rahmans
proc eeded , w i th th e V eda,from th e mouth of B rahma. F rom
h is a rms Ksh atr iyas sprung : so from h is th igh s Va isyas : fromh is foot S udras we re produced ; all w i th th e i r fema le s . T h e
lord of creat ion,v iew ing th em,
sa id ,
‘What sh a l l be you roccupat ion ?
’ Th ey rep l ied.
‘We are not our own masters,
O God,command u s wh at to undertake ’
. V iewing and com
par ing th e i r labou rs , h e made th e fi rst tr ibe superior ove r th ere st . A s th e fi rst h ad great inc l inat ion for th e d iv ine pra ises
(B rahma-veda), th e refo re h e was B rahman . T h e protectorfrom i l l (Kshay ate) was Kshatr iya . H im wh ose profess ion
(Vesa) cons ists in comme rc e , wh ich promotes th e suc cess of
wars,for th e protect ion of h imse lf and mank ind , and in hu s
bandry,and attendanc e on catt le
,h e ca l led Va isy a . T h e oth e r
sh ou ld vo luntar i ly serve th e th ree tr ibes , and th erefore become
a Sudra : h e sh ou ld humble h imse lf at th e i r fee t .
178 T H E T E A c H IN G OF T H E vED As.
h im A ryavarta ,th e abode of the Aryans , extend i ng from
the western to the eastern sea ,and bou nded on th e north
and sou th by the H imalaya and Vindhya m ounta i n s . 1
The A ryan s were then i n a s trange country , i nhab i ted
by a st range,u ncou th peop l e , wh o d i ffered grea t ly from
them se l ves i n colou r , language , re l i g ion , and cu stom s .
These . i n con sequ ence of the oppos i t ion wh ich they
offered to the advance of the con qu erors , are desc ri bed
by them i n th e most od i ou s terms,as dasyas, enem i e s ;
ddsa ,s laves ; ra
'
hs/zasas barba r ian s ; hranyad ,raw flesh
ea te rs ; anr i/a , devoi d of re l igiou s r i tes ; aorahnza , pr i es t
l ess ; anagnz'
tra,n ot keep i ng the sacred fi re ; mad ;
and nzearaa’
enas, worsh i ppers of mad gods . They are
even accu sed of eat i ng human flesh ! Thu s we read ,
The ydtna’hanas who gloa t on the b l oody flesh of
men or horses,and stea l th e m i l k of th e cow , O Agn i ,
cu t off the i r heads wi th thy fiery sword 2 There is no
rea son,however
,to be l i eve tha t th is descr ip t i on of the
aborigi nes by the i r conque r i n g enem i es i s correct ; for
we find that th e grea t B rahman R i sh i , Va s i sh ta , when i n
feud wi th the Raj a R i sh i , V isvam it ra ,i s ca l l ed not on ly
an en emy , bu t a“
ydtnd/zdna or demon . B es i de s,we
l earn tha t these peop l e h ad fort ified c i t i es , fought wi th
weapon s,posses sed much wea l th , were governed by k i ngs .
3
A s m i gh t be expec ted,they opposed the i nvaders of
the i r coun try and the p lunderers of the i r wea l th wi th all
1 M anu ,i i .
, 2 1 , 2 .
2 R .-V . ,
x . , 87 , 2 .
3 Ibid . ,i.,103 , 3 ; x .
,102 , 3 ; v i i i . , 24 , 27 ; i. , 5 1 , 5 ; i i i . , 1 2 ,
6 ; I. , 58, 8 , 9 ; vn .
,104 , 2 .
T H E ANTHR OPOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 1 79
the means a t th e ir d isposa l . B u t th e grea te r phys ica l
s trength and super i or sk i l l of th e A ryan s preva i l ed , and
they h ad to subm i t to a fore ign yoke . H ere , t hen , was the
fi rs t d i st i n cti on of caste , a d i s t i nc t i on both ethn ica l and
pol i t ica l— th e d i s t i nc t ion between fore igners and na t i ves ,between th e conqu erors and th e
'
conqu ered. Th i s d i s
t i nct ion was he ightened by the d i fference of co lou r
exi s t i ng between the two races ; th e former be i ng“ wh i te and the la t ter “ b lack ,
” 1a d i fference st i l l
v i s i b l e between the A ryan s and the non-A ryan s . And
hen ce oarna , colou r , the term u sed by the A ryan s to
mark off the d i fference between them se lves and the
abor igi na l i n hab i tants , came afterward s to be th e genera l
des i gnat ion of a ll d i s t i n ct i ons i n H i n du soc i e ty .
The abor igi na l i n hab i tan ts , who subm i t ted peaceab ly
to A ryan ru l e,were denom i na ted Su dra s
,serfs— in contra
d i st i nc t i on to the A ryans,nob l es The word Sud ra
i s not of San sc ri t ori g i n , and hence mu st have been
imported i n to the A ryan speech from some of the non
A ryan languages . I n th e Vi sh nu Pu rana we find tha t
Sudras and A o/ziras are i n va r iab ly men t i on ed together,
as i f con te rm i n ou s . 2 t ira ,accord i ng to Pto l emy
,
i s a d i s tr ic t above Patta lene on th e I ndu s . The Sudra s ,
therefore , were a peop l e who l i ved i n the same v ic i n i ty
on the banks of the same r i ver,and we re probab ly the
H adro/aoi men t ion ed by M egasth enes , who sen t aux i l ia
r i e s to the Pers ian s before the t ime of A l exander th e
1 R .-V . ,
i. , 100 , 18 ; i i . , 20 , 7 ; i i i . , i i . , 20 , 7.
W i lson’
s V . P .,vo l . ii . , pp . 184 , 5 .
1 80 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Grea t . These , i t is natu ra l to su ppose,were the fi rst
peop l e conqu ered by the A ryan s a fter c ross i n g the I ndu s
and as they gradua l ly conqu ered othe r peopl e,on the i r
march from west to east,they extended th i s des i gna t i on
to them ,as a s i gn both of conqu est and of d i fferen ce of
b lood . A t fi rst the se Sudra s mu st have been of grea t
ass i s tance to the A ryan s and i n recogn i t i on of th i s,they
were not unwi l l i ng to adm i t them to thei r sac r ifices,a s
appears from the fo l lowi ng pas sage from th e S atapa tha
B rahmana , respect i ng the ca l l of th e sacrificers , I f th e
sacrificer be a B rahman , i t i s sa i d ehi , come ; i f he i s a
Va i sya , then i t i s agah i , come h i ther ; when a Raj a
bandhu , i t i s adrava , run h i th er ; wi th a Su dra,i t is
adrana ,run h i th er ” B u t when the A ryan s had ex
tended the i r conqu e sts and con soli da ted the i r power ,the o l d ant i pa thy between the “ whi te compl ex ion ”
and
the “ dark ski n rev ived,and th e Su dras were re l ega ted
to tha t hum i l ia t i ng pos i t i on i n wh ich we find them i n
Manu ’s t ime,when i t was enac ted , “ Let h im (a B rah
man) not give adv ice to a Su dra,nor wha t rema i n s from
h is tab l e ; nor c lar ified bu tte r of wh ich a pa rt has been
offered ; nor l et h im give s p i r i tua l cou n sel to su ch a man ;
nor i nform h im of the l ega l exp ia t i on for h i s sin . Su re ly
he who dec lares th e law to a serv i l e man, and he who
i n struc ts h im i n the mode of exp ia t ing s i n , s i nk s wi th
tha t very man i n to the he l l nam ed A sanznr ita .
” 1
A large number of the abo r i gi na l inhab i tants refu sed
to subm i t to th e Aryan s and fled , l i ke the Wel sh before
1 Manu,iv . , 80 , 8 1 .
1 82 T H E TEACH ING OP T H E V E D A s.
of governmen t . They t i l l the ground and supp ly th e neces
saries of l i fe ; and though the i r ca l l i ng i s humb l er than
tha t of the so ld i er,i t i s equa l ly importan t and neces sary .
Theywere Va isyas, or hou seholders , and one of the des igna
t ion s of the k i ng was Vispa ti,1 the l ord of the Vis. The
neces s i t i e s of soc ia l l i fe compel l ed th e Va i syas to d iv ide
themse lves i n to var i ous profes s i ons and hand ic ra fts .
Carpen ters and sm i th s were necessa ry to make agri
cu l tu ra l imp lemen ts ; mason s to bu i l d hou se s ; weavers
to weave c loth j ewel l ers to make ornamen ts ; merchan ts
to buy and se l l ; and phys ic ian s to a t tend the s i ck . Thu s
gradua l ly rose a ll the d iv i s i on s of the profes s i ona l and
art i san clas ses ; and -as each c la ss not on ly became a
sort of gu i l d to gua rd its own i n teres ts aga i n st every
other c la s s , bu t brought up i t s ch i l d ren i n the same
ca l l i n g,su ch ca l l i ng by degrees became exc lu s ive , and
i t s fol l owers a ca s te .
Con tempo raneou s ly wi th these c las se s , and at fi rs t im
percept i b ly , there grew up another cla s s , the B rahman i ca l
or Pr ie s t ly,dest i ned to a s sume the most awfu l prerogat ives
,
and to exerc i se the most tyrann ica l powers w i th i n th e reach
of man . A t the dawn of h i story , acces s to the god s by
prayer and sacr ifice was the undou bted pr iv i l ege of every
A ryan wi thou t d i st i n ct i on . The fa ther was probably the
fi rs t or foreman,who con du cted the worsh i p
of the fam i ly,and a fter th i s mode l Agni wa s con s t i tu ted
the P a r/zo/zita of the god s . The poet , however , occu p i ed
a pos i t i on so exa l ted from th e ear l i e s t t imes , as to cau se
1 L i thuanian W ié z pat is .
T H E A NTH R OPOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S .
even k i ngs to covet the h igh honou r of bei ng R ajar is/zis,or roya l bard s . N o wonder
,for he i n sp i red the nat i on
wi th odes i n honou r of th e god s ; he prayed for v ic tory
i n the day of ba tt l e,for ra i n i n the t ime of drought
,and
for a ll b l e ss i ngs to the fr i end s of I nd ra ! H is prayer
was apparen t ly an swered . A v ic tory wa s won,or a great
d rough t was removed by abundance of refresh i ng showers .
Then came the war song and th e hymn of pra i s e,D i d
not I nd ra preserve Sudas i n the ba tt l e of th e ten k ings
through you r prayer,O V a sish tas
” 1 “ Thi s prayer of
V isvam itra,of one who h as pra i sed heaven
,and ea rth
,
and I n d ra , preserve s the peop l e of the Bha ra ta s ” 2
The R i sh i D evap i , son of R ish t ishena ,perform i ng the
sacr ifice,and sk i l l ed i n ce l eb ra t i n g the god s
,has l et l oose
the showers of ra i n from th e u pper to the lower ocean .
The wa ters were shu t up by the gods i n the u pper ocean
when l et loose by D evapi , th ey were d i scharged on the
p la i ns .
3 The poet was na tu ra l ly e la ted , and soon began
to be l i eve that there mu s t be some connec t i on between
h i s u tterances and the b les s ings obta i ned . H is ch i l dren
were brought up in th e same profes s ion and in the same
bel i ef. I f not all poets them se lves , they cou l d trea su re
i n the i r memor i es the songs of the i r s i re s— the songs
that had accomp l i shed so much— and repea t them as
c i rcum stan ces requ i red . Occa s i ona l ly orig ina l poets arose ,then n ew songs were added to the l i tera tu re of th e
nat i on ; and a s th i s p rocess con t inued from age to age ,
i t re su l ted i n the p rodu ct i on of a l i tera tu re so enormou s
1 R .-V . ,
v i i . , 3 3 , 3 .
‘
1 Ibid. , i i i . , 53 , 1 2 .
3Ibid. ,
x . , 98 , 5, 6 .
1 84 T H E TEA CH ING OP T H E VEDA S .
as , i n th e absen ce of wr i t ing , to make i t absolu te ly neces
sary for a c la s s of men to devote them se lves en t i re ly to
i t s p reserva t i on and tran sm i ss i on . Add to th i s,tha t
,i n
th e cou r se of t ime , th e language of the Veda ceased to
be u n ders tood by the mu l t i tu de . The old San scr i t of
the A ryan s , hav i ng d ecayed and given b i rth to new
d ia l ects , lay bu r i ed in the hymn s . F rom tha t epoch
San scr i t became a sacred language , and the Veda a
sacred text , wh ich cou l d on ly be taught,
as wel l as
preserved,by a c las s of men set apa rt for the pu rpose .
Thu s or ig i na ted the R i sh i s or Seers,H ebrew roinz , a
C lass of men ha l f prophets and ha l f p r i est s , whose
funct i on i t was to teach,i n sp i re , and l ead th e peop l e .
I t i s not d i fficu l t to u nderstand how such men were
soon reverenced as the best and wi ses t,as th ose who
l i ved neare st to , and on the most fam i l iar terms wi th,
the gods . A p rayer , therefore , u ttered i n beha l f of
any one , or a sacr ifice performed by one of these
R i sh i s , mu st neces sar i ly be deemed more efficac i ou s than
i f u tte red or performed by the head of the fam i ly,or
by the i nd iv idua l h imse l f ; 1 and so the R i sh i gradua l ly
deve loped i n to a Purhoh ita and as power genera l ly grav i
ta te s to th e wisest,espec ia l ly in the ea r l i e s t stages of
soc i e ty,he was endowed wi th supreme powe r
,both pol i t ica l
and sp i r i tua l . Every ki ng m u s t have a Pu rhoh ita as h is
fr i end , cou n se l l or , and m in i s ter . F or “ breath does not
1 T h e fo l low ing sh ow th at th e R ish i and th e Priest or B rahman were ident ica l a t a very early age : R .
-V . , i. , 8 1 ; i . , 164 ,
3 5 ; i i , v .
, 40 , 8 ; i i . , 20 , 4 ; v i . , 2 1 , 8 ; i i . , x . , 95 ,
5 ; vn ., 28 , 2 ; v i i . , 70 , 5 ; i. , 1 77 , 5 .
1 86 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
have l ea rn t the Veda and repea t i t , th ey are human god s
(nzanns/zya/z dew li). And th i s sac r ifice i s twofol d ; ob la
t i on s for the gods,gi ft s for th e human god s , th e B rahman s
,
who have learn t the Veda and repea t i t . With ob la t i on s
he appeases the gods,wi th g i fts the human gods , the
B rahman s , who have l earn t the Veda and repea t i t . Both
god s , when th ey are p l eased, p lace h im i n b l i s s .
” 1
I t is ev iden t then (I ) Tha t there wa s no ca s te proper ly
so ca l l ed i n the Man tra,or o l dest per i od of the Veda ;
and (2) Tha t the fou r soc ia l d i s t i n ct i on s,wh ich subse
quen t ly deve loped i n to ca s te , were noth i ng more in that
ear ly age than fou r soc ia l ranks , wh ich orig ina ted i n th e
neces s i t i e s of soc ia l,pol i t ica l
,and re l i gi ou s l i fe .
I ndeed,the doctr i n e that or ig i na l ly there was bu t one
cas te , i s not a l together forgotten i n th e popu la r l egend s
of the caste-r i dden post-Ved ic age . I n the V ishnu Pu
rana , we read , I n the Krita ,or golden age , there were
no Cas tes , orders , var i et i es of cond i t i on , or m ixtu re of
ca s te s and i n the Bhagava ta Pu rana , that“ There
was former ly on ly on e Veda ,th e sacred monosy l lab l e
Om, the es sence of all speech ; on ly on e god , Narayana ,
on e Agn i (fi re), and one ca ste B hrigu ,i n the Ma
habharata ,says
,There i s no d i fferen ce of cas te s th i s
wor l d,hav i ng been at fi rst c rea ted by B rahma en t i re ly
B rahman ic , became afterward s sepa ra ted i n to ca ste s i n
con sequence of work s . Those B rahman s (l i t . twice-born
men)who were fond of sen sua l p l ea su re s , fiery,i rasc i b le
,
prone to v io l ence , who had forsaken the i r du ty , and were
1 Chipsfrom a German Workshop, vo l. i i . , p . 3 3 7.
T H E A NTH R OPO LOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 1 87
red-l imbed fe l l i n to th e cond i t ion of Ksha t r iya s . Those
B rahman s who der ived thei r l i ve l i hood from k i ne,who
were ye l l ow,who subs i s ted by agricu l tu re , and who
neglected to prac t i se the i r du t i e s , en tered i n to .th e sta te
of Va i sya s . Those B rahman s who were add ic ted to
m i sch i ef,fa l sehood , who were covetou s , who l ived by a ll
k i nd s of work,who were b lack and h ad fa l l en from
pu r i ty , sank i n to th e cond i t i on of Sudras . B e i ng sepa
rated from each other by these works,th e B rahman s
became d iv i ded i n to d i fferen t ca s tes .
CH A PT E R V
T H E SOT E R IOLOGY OF T H E VE DAS .
F ec ist i nos propte r te , e t inqu ietum e st cor nostrumdonec requ ie scat in t e .
— A UGU ST I N E .
T H E term “ Soter io l ogy is u sed i n th i s chapter to
denote a ll the mean s emp loyed by the Ved i c A ryan s to
p l ease the gods and to obta i n happ in es s,both i n th i s
worl d,and i n the wor l d to come .
I . P rayer and P ra ise.
A s far back as we can t race the l i fe of man,we find
the r iver of prayer and pra i s e flowing as na tu ra l ly as i t
is flowing now . We cannot fi nd its begi n n i ng becau se
we cannot find th e beg inn i ng of th e sou l . ” 1 I t is no
exaggera t i on to s ta te tha t no na t i on appea rs at th e dawn
of h i story so fu l l of p rayer and pra ise as th e H i n du
A ryan s . The ir sacred hymn s are ca l l ed Sahtas, Lau da
t i on s and “sacr ifices of the hea rt sweeter than bu tter
and honey to I n dra Yea ,
“ th ey are even ‘
as oxen ,
bu l l s and cow s to Agn i 3 “ The lov i ng pra ises of h is
1 J ohnson’
s Orienta l R eligions, vo l. i. , p . 90 .
R .-V . , v i i i . , 24 , 20 .
3 Ibid .,v i . ,
1 90 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
gods wou l d accept them , for wi thou t fa i th (sradd/za)offer i ngs and p rayers are va i n .
1
Prayer and pra i se are th e spontaneou s expre s s i on of
the fee l i ngs of dependence u pon , and mora l re la t i on sh i p
to, God. The fee l i ng of dependen ce upon some one ,
h i gher and grea te r than h imse l f, na tu ra l ly l ead s man to
pray for the he lp wh ich he needs , and to render thanks
giv i ngs and pra i s e for i t when rece ived . An d the feel i n g
of mora l re la t i on sh i p to God,i n vo lv i n g as i t does th e
con sc i ou sness of sin,na tu ra l ly l eads h im to cry for
pardon and reconc i l ia t i on .
Sacr ifice (Ya/no) is the sou l of Veda . I t i s o l der than
the hymn s , for th ey were composed for i ts ce l ebra t ion .
“ Vi shnu and I ndra made the spac i ou s worl d for the sake
of sacrifice .
” 2 And the “ Lord of crea tu res i n i t ia ted
sacr ifice i n th e begi nn i ng as the mean s by wh ich he
crea ted the un iverse ! The fi rs t act performed by Man u
on h i s descen t from the ark,after the de luge
,was to offer
sacr ifice .
“ Sac rifice i s the axl e of th e worl d’s whee l and
th e fecu nda t ing power of all th i ngs .
” 3 I t i s e terna l and
un iversa l,offered by gods a s wel l as by men .
4
We observe,h owever
,tha t th e sacr ifi ces of th e ear l i es t
Ved ic r i tua l were very mu ch s imp l e r than tho se of the
later ceremon ia l . With the r i se and growth of the
pr i es thood,sac r ifice was deve loped to su ch an exten t as
1 R .-V . , x. , 1 5 1 ; i i . , 26 , 3 Ibid. , v i i . , 99 , 4 .
3 Ibid. ,i. , 164 , 34 , 5.
4 Ibid ., 82 , 90 ,
1 30 .
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 1 9 1
to be con s i dered,not on ly the ch i ef mean s of prop i t ia tmg
and p l eas i n g the de i t i es , bu t the sou rce of gods , men,and
the u n iverse ! By sacr ifice the god s crea ted all th i ngs . 1
By sacrifice they became immorta l .2 By sac r ifice the
anc i en t F a thers,the fi rs t sacrificers, de l ivered the worl d
from chaos,gave b i rth to the sun ,
ki nd led th e s tars,and
became equa l to the greate st of the god s .
3 And by
sacr ifice the i r ch i ld ren are exa l ted to the same s phere of
immorta l i ty and b l es sednes s . “ Thou dost not per i sh,
O sacrificer ! nor thou who offere st l i ba t i on s,nor thou
,
O god ly man !” 4 I nd ra chooses for h i s i n t ima te
fri en d the man who presen ts offer i ngs,bu t des i re s no
fr i endsh i p wi th h im who offers no l iba t i on s .
5 Those
who offer part icu la r sacr ifices “ become Agn i , Va runa ,or
I ndra ,and a tta i n to u n ion and to th e same spheres wi th
these god s re spect i ve ly “ S i n contam i na tes not , diffi
cu lt ies assa i l not ; ne i ther does d i s tress a t any t ime affl ic t
the morta l,to whose sac r ifice I ndra and Va ru na re pa i r .” 7
When th e sac r ific ia li
vict im was cons igned to the fi re,the fol l owi ng formu la was add ressed to i t
,
“ Thou art
th e annu lmen t of s i ns comm i t ted by th e god s . Thou art
the annu lmen t of s i n s comm i tted by the F ath e rs . Thou
art the annu lmen t of s i ns comm i tted by men . Thou art
th e annu lmen t of s i n s comm i t ted by ou rse lves . What
ever s i n s we have comm i t ted by day or by n igh t , thou
art the annu lmen t thereof. Wha tever s i n s we have
1 R .-V .
,x .
, 90 . Sat. B r.,x. , 43 , 1 , 8 .
3 R .-V . , x.
, 88 ; x.,1 3 5 , 1 54 .
4 Ibid. , v i i i . , 3 1 , 16 .
Ibid. ,x.
, 42 , 4 .
6 S a t . B r .,i i .
,6, 4 , 8 . R .
-V v i i .,82 , 7 .
1 92 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDAS .
comm i t ted s l eep i ng or wakin g,thou art the annu lment
thereof. Wha tever s i n s we have comm i t ted knowi ng or
u nknowing,thou art the annu lmen t thereof. Thou art
the annu lmen t of s i n .
1
The most anc i en t d iv i s i on of sac rifice appea rs to have
been in to three c la sses : (1 ) H am'
s, H avir-yaj na ,[ sh ti ,
mea t offer i ngs (2) P asa , P asabana’ha ,
an ima l offer i ngs
and (3 ) Soma , Sannzva adhoara , soma offer ings . We
read i n the Panchav im sa B rahmana : H aniryaj nair , na z
a’
ena imam lakani aohyaj ayanz , anta ri/es/zanz pasamaa’
ah i/Z ,
sanza ir i .e.
,by mea t offer ings the god ly on es
conquered th i s world , by an ima l offer i ngs the m i dd le
region s,by soma O ffer i ngs tha t worl d , or th e h ighest
region s . To th is a fou rth c la s s , Paha -yaj na ,or l i tt l e
sacr ifices , ca l l ed a l so domes t ic offer i ngs (gryaharnza),be i ng pa rt ly mea t and part ly an ima l , was added . Manu
i s sa i d to have sacr ificed wi th a Pa/ea .
2 In Gau tama’
s
c lassificat ion ,
3 P dha-yajna is made the fi rst ch i ef d ivi s i on,
and P asnoand/za i s i n c lu ded i n H aviryaj na . These three
c la sses have seven subd i v i s i on s i n each .
PAKAYA J N A S‘1 were ch i efly offer i ngs of cakes
,soup s
,
gra i n s,fru i t s
,bu t ter
,m i lk
,and hon ey .
°1 Tandya B r. S at. B r. ,i.,8 , 1
, 7 .
3 v i i i 1 8, 20 .
‘1 T h ey conta in ,—A shtaka
,or sac r ifi c es on th e e igh th day
of th e four dark ha lves of th e w inter month s,from Oc tober
N ovembe r to J anuary-F ebruary ; Parvana, sac rifice s on th e
new and fu l l moon ; S riidha , funera l oblat ions ; S rc‘
ivani,A gra
hay ani , Sa itr i, and A svayagi , th e days of fu l l moon , from ju lyAugust , from N ovember-D ecember , from March-Apr i l , and
from S eptembe r-Oc tober . Under th i s h ead natura l ly fa l l th e
1 94 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
R .-V . ,
v i .,I7, 1 1
,Pu shan and Vi sh nu are i nvoked to
dre ss a hu ndred bu ffa l oe s (satanznza/zisharn) to I ndra ; and
i n another p lace the R i sh i Gritsamada exc la im s,
“ Agn i,
descendan t of Bhara ta , thou art en ti re ly ou rs , when
sacr ificed to wi th p regnan t k i n e,wi th barren cows
(raw ) or bu l l s I n the A tharva-Veda ,x i .
,
2, 9 ,we read , Th i ne , O Bhava ,
are th ese five v ict ims,
d iv i ded as cows , horses , men,goat s , and sheep
” The
same sacr ific ia l v ic t im s are men t i oned i n the A i t . B r. ,
book i i .2
S OM AYAjN A s3 derived the i r name from the i n toxi cat i ng
j u ice of the Soma p lant , wh i ch formed the i r ch i ef sub
stance . They were , however , accompan i ed wi th meat
and an ima l o ffer i ngs ; and so corresponded to the mea t
and dr i nk offer i ngs of the jews . Soznayaj nas las t i n g one
day were ca l l ed E /ea/zas , and th ose last i ng more than
one day A hinas . When they las ted more than twe lve
days they were Sa l i ras, or sess i on s . There were Sattras
which lasted severa l month s , a whol e yea r,and even
severa l yea rs ; i n theory th ere were some that la s ted a
thou sand years . B u t,whether short or l ong , the Soma
ceremon i es requ i red e laborate prepara t i on,and en ta i l ed
mu ch expense . N otwi th stand ing , th ey seem to have
1 R .-V .
,i i .
, 7 , 5 .
2 H aug ,vol. i. , 8 .
3 Th ese , conta in ing A gnishtoma ,A ty agnishtoma , Ukthya , S hod
asin, Vajapeya ,
A tiratra,and Aptoryama , are a ll different forms
of th e Somayajna ; varying in th e number of v ict ims sacrificed,but ch i efly in th e numbe r of stomas , or pra ises offered to th ede i t ie s .
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 1 95
been very frequen t at one t ime ; a thou sand,and even
ten thou sands, are spoken of i n th e Veda .
1
Though Gau tama’s c la ss ificat i on of the Ved ic sacr ifi ces
i s th e s imp l es t and commonest , i t fa i l s , equa l ly wi th a ll
other c las s ifica t i on s,to gi ve an adequa te i dea of the i r
number and comp lex i ty : e.g .,bes i des the seven u sua l ly
men t i oned a s con st i tu t i n g th e S enzayaj nas, there are
others far more cost ly , and las t i n g many days , su ch as
the R aj asaya ,the con secra t i on of a un i versa l k i n g
,the
the sacr ifice of a horse , th e P arns/zanzia’ha
th e sacr ifice of a man,and th e Sarname
'
a’
ha,the “
a ll
sacr ifice I ndeed,i t i s ca l cu la ted
,tha t i f all the va r i e
t i es spec ified in the texts were reckoned up , they wou l d
amou n t to more than a thou san d
The three c las se s of sac r ifices are ca l l ed the th r ice
seven myst ic r i tes compri s ed i n Agn i , becau se wi thou t
Agn i (fi re) th ey cou l d not be cel ebrated .
2 F or th e per
formance of the fi rs t , one S raa z‘a fi re , the Gar/zapa tva ;
was suffic i en t,bu t for th e la s t two
,th ree S ranta fi res
,
the Gar/zapatya , A hananiya ,and D ahsh ina ,
were neces
sa ry . The las t two S raa ta fi res were k i nd l ed from the
fi rst . These th ree fi res are a l luded to in R .-V . , i i . , 3 6 , 4 ,
B r i ng the god s h i ther,sage
,and offer sacr ifice : at the
th ree a l tars sea t thee wi l l ingly,O pr i es t
Th e h igh ant i qu i ty of the Soma cu l tu s is a ttes ted by
the references to i t in th e I ran ian Zend-Aves ta . The
hao/na of the Zend-Avesta is e tymo logi ca l ly the same as
the Soni a of the Veda . Both are from the root sn,
1 R .-V . , i. , 3 0, 2 ; i i i . , Ibid . , 72 , 6 ; i . , 2 ; iv .
,12 . 1 .
1 96 T H E TEA CH ING OP T H E VEDA S .
Zen d ha ,wh ich s i gn ifies “ to beget , and “ to drop
,or
“ to pres s ou t j u i ce thu s show ing that Soma-sacrifice
was preva l en t before the sepa ra t i on of the H i n du A ryan s
from the i r breth ren,th e I ran ian s . I t s eem s , however ,
to have rece ived a new impu l se on the I nd ian terr i tory,
as the hymn s of the Veda , e spec ia l ly those of the n i n th
book of the R i g , exh i b i t i t in a remarkab l e sta te of
developm en t . There Soma is addressed as a god i n the
h ighest stra i n s of venerat i on ; a ll d i v i ne powers be long
to h im,a ll b l e s s i n gs are h i s to bestow .
“ We have dru nk
the Soma,we have become immorta l , we have en tered
into l i ght,we have known the god s . Wha t can an
enemy now do to u s, or wha t can the ma l ice of an}
morta l e ffect , 0 thou immorta l god” 1
I n common wi th the Scyth ian s ,2 the A snaméa’
ha , or
horse-sacrifice, was a very anc i en t r i te among the H i n du
A ryan s,hymn s 1 62 and 1 63 of the fi rst Manda la of
the R i g-Veda be i ng u sed at its ce l ebra t i on . I t was
regarded as th e ch i ef of an ima l sac r ifices ; and,i n later
t imes,i t s efficacy was so exaggerated
,tha t a hundred
horse-sacrifices were supposed to en t i t l e the sacrificer to
d i sp lace even I ndra from h is th rone i n heaven
Accord i ng to R .
-V .
,i 1 62
,the sacr ifice of a horse was
preceded by tha t of a goa t to Pu shan .
“When th ey (the
Pri ests) l ead before th e horse , wh ich i s decked with pu re
gol d ornamen ts,the Offer i ng fi rm ly gra sped , the spotted
goa t,b l ea ts wh i le wa l k i n g onwa rd ; i t goe s the path
bel oved by I ndra and Pu shan . Th i s goat,des t i ned for
1 R .-V . , v i i i . , 48 , 3 . H e rod . , iv . , 7 1 .
1 98 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
of thy l imbs wh ich I have sea sonab ly prepared,I sac r i
fice i n the fi re a s bu l l s O ffered to the gods . M ay no
greedy and u n ski l fu l immolator,m i ss i ng wi th th e sword
,
throw thy mangl ed l imbs together . I ndeed,thou d iest
not thu s , thou su ffere st not ; thou goes t to the god s on
ea sy pa th s .
When th e horse was t i ed to th e sacr ific ia l post,the
bystanders prayed tha t the ha l ter and hee l ropes of the
nob l e an ima l , th e head ropes ,the gi rth s and any other
requ i s i te,th e gra s s tha t was pu t i n to h is mou th , wha t
ever the fl i e s may have ea ten of h i s raw flesh,wha tever
wa s smea red on the bru sh or the axe , or th e hand s o r
na i ls of th e immola tor ; the p lace of going forth , of
tarry i ng , of ro l l i n g on the grou nd the wa te r tha t he h ad
drunk,the gra s s tha t he had ea ten
,m i gh t a ll be w i th
h im among the god s . Then the roast ing and cook i ng
of h is flesh are m i nu te ly descr i bed ; and every b i t of
h im,ev en to the sma l l est tha t m ight have fa l l en from
th e sp i t,mu s t be given to th e longi ng gods . And the
whol e ceremony ends wi th the pet i t i on ,“ M ay th i s
horse give u s ca tt l e and horses, men,progeny
,and all
su sta in i ng wea l th . M ay i t keep u s from s in ; may th e
horse of th i s sac r ifice give u s strength .
Though human sacr ifices were known du r ing th e M an
t ras,or o l de st hymn s of th e Veda
,th e ev i dence is too scan ty
for u s to conclude that they were common . The n inet i eth
hymn of th e tenth Manda la of th e R .
-V . i n wh ich P a r
ns/za ,th e p r imeva l ma l e
,is descr i bed as cu t to p i eces
and offered as a sacr ifice by the god s , shows tha t the i dea
of offer i n g a man,F ar asha , wa s fam i l iar to the an ci en t
T H E soT E R IOLOGY OF T H E VED A S . 199
Aryan s . I t i s true that P a ras/2a ,i n th e hymn
,i s an
imagi na ry be i ng ; bu t the descr ip t i on of h i s immola t i on
i s so rea l and m i nu te,as to j u s t i fy the conc lus i on tha t
i t was taken from th e wel l-known manner i n wh ich
human be i ngs were sac r ificed .
“ The god s immola ted
h im on the sacr ific ia l gra s s they bound h im,doubtl e s s
,
to the pos t (y apa ) seven p i eces of wood were la i d for
h im roun d the fi re,
and “ th r i ce seven p i eces of fue l
were emp l oyed The same i dea u nder l i es the immola
t ion of Prajapa t i,who offered h im se l f a sacr ifice for th e
devas or god s and of V isvakarman,who offered h imse lf a
sacr ifice to h im se l f. I n R .
-V .
,v i i .
,19, 4 ,
we read,
“ Thou
(I n dra) has t d e stroyed , a l o ng wi th the Maru ts,numerou s
enem i es a t th e sacr ifi ce to the gods ; , thou ha s t pu t to
s l eep wi th thy thunderbol t the D asyus, Chanzar i , and
D hnni,on beha l f of D ab/ziti There seem s to be an
a l lu s i on here to the prac t i ce of sacr ifi c i ng the enem i e s
of the A ryan s to the god s ; l i ke th e th ree hundred c i t i
z en s of Peru sia,whom Augu stu s sac r ificed i n one day to
h i s de ified u n c l e (D ino j nlio) or th e Grec ian naviga tors ,whom the barbar ian s of Tau r i s offered to Ar tem i s when
ever cas t upon the i r sea-shore s .
S unasepha , the son of Ajigarta ,i s th e au thor of the
twen ty-fou rth and s i x fo l l owi ng hymn s i n th e fi rst
Manda la of th e R i g—Veda . Pra i s i ng Va runa i n th e
twenty-fou rth hymn,he prays
,
“ I imp l ore thee for tha t
(l i fe)1 wh ich the i n st i tu tor of th e sac r ifi ce so l i c i ts with
1 T h e text h as on ly,
“ I ask th at th e S ch o l iast supp l ie sl i fe , taday ns. T h e addi t ion m igh t be d ispu ted, but its pro
200 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
ob la t i ons,Varuna
,undisdainfu l
,bestow a thought upon
u s ; mu ch lau ded,take not away our l i fe . Th i s (thy
pra i s e) they repeat to me by n ight and by day ; th i s
knowledge speaks to my heart . M ay he whom the
fettered S unasepha has i nvoked, may th e rega l Varuna
set u s free . S unasepha , se i z ed and bound to the
three-footed tree,h as invoked th e son of Ad i t i . M ay
the rega l Va runa,wise and i rres i s t i b l e
,l i bera te h im ;
may he l et loose h i s bonds H ere S unasepha re
presen ts h im sel f as se i z ed and bound to the three
footed tree,
” wh ich is sa i d to be the sacr ific ia l post,a
sort of tr i pod . H e p rays tha t Va runa may set h im
free,
”and “ tha t h i s l i fe may not be taken away ”
There i s reference to the same c i rcum stance i n R .
-V,
v . ,2, 7 ,
“ O Agn i,thou hast re l eased the bou nd Suna
sepha from the pa l e, for he had prayed thu s take from
u s,too
,th ese ropes
,O sagac i ou s H ota r , after thou hast
sett l ed here ” . Looki ng a t these passages a l one,perhap s
we are not j u st ified i n conc lu d i ng tha t S unasepha was
bou nd as a v i ct im to be sac r ificed . H is “ bond s and
ropes ” may be taken i n a figu ra t ive sen se,denot i ng
the fette rs of s i n,espec ia l ly as we have seen before tha t
s i n is often compared to a“ bond
,or a
“ rope,i n the
Veda ; and,indeed
,i t i s so compared i n the la s t verse
of th is very hymn . We are not,however
,l eft i n un
certa i n ty . The A itaréya B rahmana of the R .
-V . supp l i e s
fu l l par t icu la rs of the c i rcum s tances referred to i n the
priety is confi rmed by th e conc luding expre ss ion ,ma na ay ah
pra ni osheh , do not ta ke away ou r l ife (Prof. W i lson’
s R ig
V eda ,vo l . i. , p .
202 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
" I’
rave l Roh i ta t rave l led fou r years more,com ing
home at the end of each yea r,and sen t back aga i n by
I ndra i n the form of a B rahman . Du r i n g th e s ixth year
of h i s soj ou rn,he met a sta rv i ng R i sh i
,Ajigarta , the son
of S uyavasa , who h ad th ree son s , the second of whom
was S unasepha . Roh i ta sa i d to h im,
R i sh i,I g ive
you a hundred cows , I ran som myse l f w ith one of these
thy son s The fa ther,poi n t i ng to the e l des t
,sa i d ,
Not h im Nor h im,
sa i d the mother,embrac i n g
the you nges t . And the paren ts barga i n ed to g ive Suna
seph a , th e m i dd l e son . Roh i ta gave a hu ndred cows to
Ajigarta , took S unaseph a ,and went from the forest to the
v i l lage . Address i ng h is fa ther,he sa i d
,F ather
,Dea th l
I ran som myse l f by h im The fa ther wen t to Va ru na
and sa i d,
“ I sha l l sac r ifice th i s man to you'
Va runa
sa i d,
“ Yes,for a B rahman is bette r than a Kshatr iya
,
and commanded h im to perform a R ajasfiya sacr ifice .
H arichandra took S unasepha to be the v i ct im for the daywhen the Soma was offered to the god s .
V isamitra was h is H otr i pr i e s t , J amadagn i h is A ct/z
oaryn pri est, V asish th a the B rahman,Ayasya the Udga z
‘
r z
pr i est . When S unasepha had been prepared , they
found nobody to b i n d h im to th e sacr ifi c ia l post . A nd
Ajigarta ,the son of S uyavasa sa i d
,G i ve me another
hu ndred,and I sha l l b i n d h im They gave h im anoth er
hu ndred,and he bound h im . When he h ad been pre
pa red and bound,when th e Apr i hymn had been su ng ,
and he h ad been l ed rou nd the fi re , they found nobody
to k i l l h im . And Ajigarta ,the son of S uyavasa ,
sa i d ,“ G i ve me another hundred
,and I sha l l k i l l h im ”
. They
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 203
gave h im another hundred,and he came whett ing h is
sword . Then S unasepha though t ,“ They W l ll rea l ly
k i l l me ,as i f I were not a man
”. Dea th I sha l l p ray
to the god s . H e went wi th a hymn to Prajapa t i (Lord
of crea tu res), th e fi rs t of th e gods . Prajapa t i sa i d to
h im,
“ Agn i (fi re) is the n earest of god s , go to h im
H e went wi th a hymn to Agn i,and Agn i sa i d to h im
Sav i tr i (th e p rogen i tor) ru l es a ll crea tu re s ,go to h im
H e went wi th a hymn to Sav i tr i,and Sav i t r i sa i d to
h im “ Thou art bound for Va ru na,the k i ng
,go to
h im H e went wi th a hymn to Varuna,the k i ng
, and
Va runa sa i d to h im ,
“ Agn i i s th e mou th Of the gods,
the k i n des t god ; pra i se h im , and we sha l l set thee free ”
Thu s he pra i sed Agn i,and Agn i said
/
to h im,
“ Pra i s e
the Vi sve D evah . and we sha l l se t thee free Thu s he
p ra i sed the Vi sve D evah,and they sa i d to h im
,I nd ra
is the greates t,m i ght i est
,s trongest
,and fr i end l i es t of
the god s ; p ra i se h im ,and we sha l l se t thee free Th u s
he pra i sed Indra,and I n dra wa s p l eased and sa i d to
h im,
“ Pra i se th e Asv i n s,and we sha l l set th ee free ” .
Thu s he pra i sed th e A sv i n s , and they sa i d to h im
Pra i se U sha s (dawn), and we sha l l set thee free
Thu s h e pra i sed U shas wi th three verses . Whi l e each
verse was u ttered ,h i s fette rs were l oosed
,and H a r i
chandra grew better ; and when th e la s t verse wa s sa i d ,a ll h is fe tters were loosed , and H arich andra wa s wel l
aga i n .
The A itaréya B rahmana goe s on to sta te tha t the
pr i ests a sked S unasepha to perform the sacr ifice of th e
day ,wh ich he d id ; and when the sacr ifice had been
204 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
performed , S unasepha sat down on the lap of V isva
m i tra . Ajigarta then sa i d , R i sh i,give me back my son
V isvam itra sa i d , No ; for the gods have given h im to
me S unasepha became D evarata (Theodotu s), th e
son of V isvam itra ; and th e members of the fam i l i es of
Kap i la and B abh ru became h i s re la t i on s . Ajigarta sa i d ,Come thou , O son
,we
,both I and thy mother
,ca l l
thee away . Thou art by b i rth an A ngirasa ,th e son of
Ajigarta , cel ebra ted as a poet . 0 R i sh i,go not away
from the l i n e of thy grandfa th er ; come back to me .
S unasepha rep l i ed ,“ They have seen thee w ith a kn i fe
i n thy hand,a th i ng tha t men have never fou nd even
amongst Sudras ; thou has t taken the hu ndred cows for
me,O A ngiras l
”Ajigarta sa i d , My ol d son ,
i t gr i eves
me for the wrong tha t I have done thee ; I th row i t away ;may these hu ndred cows bel ong to thee S unasepha
rep l i ed,
“Who once comm i t s a s i n , wi l l comm i t a l so
another s i n ; thou wi l t not absta i n from the ways of
Sudra s ; wha t thou ha st comm i tted cannot be redressed
V isvam itra th en sa i d , “ D readfu l stood the son of S uyavasa when he wen t to k i l l w i th h i s kn i fe . B e not h is
son ; come and be my son . S unasepha sa i d ,“ Tel l u s
thyse l f,0 Son of a K i n g , thu s as thou art known to u s
,
how I,who am an A ngirasa ,
sha l l become thy son ”.
V isvamitra re p l i ed ,“ Thou sha l t be the e ldest of my
son s,thy offspr i n g sha l l be the fi rs t
,thou sha l t rece ive
the her i tage wh ich the god s have gi ven me , thus I
addres s thee ”. S unasepha rep l i ed ,
“ M ay the leader
of the Bhara ta s say so i n the presence of h is agree i ng
sons,for fri end sh ip
’s and happ i ne ss’ sake
,that I sha l l
200 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
pr i nce cou l d make the offer of buy ing the i r ch i l d ren,bu t
where the fa ther offered h im se l f to b i nd and k i l l the son,
whom he had sol d for a hu nd red cows . Th i s was a case
so s ta rt l i ng to the la ter B rahman s,tha t th e au th or of the
Laws of M ann was ob l iged to a l lu de to i t,i n order to
defend the d i gn i ty Of h i s ca ste . Manu says tha t hunger
is an excu se for many th i ngs,and tha t Ajigarta , a l though
he wen t to k i l l h is own son, was not gu i l ty of a c r ime ,
becau se he d i d so to appea se h is hu nger . N ow the
au thor of the A itaréya B rahmana certa in ly does not
adopt th i s v i ew , for Ajigarta is there severe ly abused for
h i s c rue l ty ; so mu ch so , that h i s son ,whom he has sol d ,
con s i ders h im se l f a t l i berty to l eave the fam i ly of h is
parents , and to accept the offer made by V isvam itra of
be i ng adopted i n to h is fam i ly . So revo l t i ng,i n deed
, is
the descr i pt ion gi ven of Ajigarta’
s behav iou r i n the B rah
mana,tha t we shou l d ra th er recogn i se i n h im a spec imen
of the un-A ryan popu la t i on of I n d ia . Such a su ppos i
t i on,however
,wou l d be i n con trad ict i on wi th severa l of
th e most essen t ia l po i nt s of the l egend,part icu la r ly i n
wha t regard s the adopt i on of S unaseph a by V isvam itra .
V isvam itra , though arr i ved at the d i gn i ty of a B rahman,
c l ear ly con s i ders the adopt i on of S unasepha D evarata ,
of the famou s B rahman ic fam i ly of the A ngirasas , as an
advantage for h imsel f,and for h is descendan ts ; and the
D evara tas are indeed men t i oned as a famou s branch of
the V isvam itras . S unaseph a is made h is e l de st son ,
and the l eader of h is brothers ,ev id en t ly as the defender
and voucher of thei r B rahmanhood,whi ch mu st have
been then of very recent date,becau se V isvam itra h im
T H E S OTER IOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 207
se l f is st i l l addressed by S una sepha as R aj a pa tra and
B hara ta 1
Max Mul l e r doubts the exi stence of human sacr ifices
du ring the Chhandas or o l dest Ved ic per i od , bu t sees no
reason to dou bt i ts prev iou s ex i s ten ce .
2 Con s i der i ng ,however
,tha t the fu l l est and c l earest a ccoun t of th i s
prac t ice i s found i n th e B rahmanas,and that du r ing the
B rahmana per i od sacerdota l i sm reached i ts z en i th,i t i s
natu ra l to suppose tha t the p ract i ce became more com
mon after the Chhandas per i od . I t is repeat ed ly sta ted
i n the B rahmanas,sarnanz
,sarr'anz pa ras/zanzea
’ha sa roa
syap t ra i sarnasyaoa rna’cl/zya i .
“ A l l,a ll is the human sacr i
fice for the Obta i n i ng of a ll , for th e ga i n i n g of all.” By
mean s of i t the sacrificer obta i n s a ll .” 3 Pu ru sha Narayana
su rpa ssed a ll th ings,and became a ll th i n gs by sacr ifi c i n g
wi th the Puru shamedha . N o wonder then,tha t i t i s sa i d
,
P aras/co hi pra i/za /na pasananz. M an is,indeed
,the fi rst
of the sac r ific ia l v ict ims .
” 4 I ndeed,so rea l was th e prac
t ice that even the name of the man who ce l ebrated th e r i te
fo r the la s t t ime h as been preserved . Accord i ng to th e
1 In th e Kath a Upan i sh ad, a fath er is int rodu ced as offer inga S arvamedh a , or
“A l l-sacrifice ,
”wh en a ll th at a man
posse ssed is supposed to be given up . H e,h oweve r
, neg
lec ted to offer h is son,and
,strange to say , th e son taunted
h im for not h av ing fu lfi l led h is vow . Th e reupon th e fath er .
th ough exc eedingly angry , and aga inst h is w i l l,offered up
h is son .
2 H ist. S ans. L it. , pp . 4 19 , 20 .
3 S . B r .,x i i i .
, 6 , 1 , 6, 1, 12 .
4 S . P . B r .
,v i i 2 ,
1,18 .
208 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Sa tapatha B rahmana , Cyaparna Sayakayana was the last
who con secra ted th e erec t i on of the a l ta r by th e immo
la t ion of a human v i ct im .
1
When S unasepha , bound to the sacr ific ia l post , saw
h i s fa ther com i ng and whett i ng h i s kn i fe to str ike h im ,
he exc la imed,They wi l l rea l ly k i l l me
,as i f I were not
( 7)a man Th i s seems to i nd i ca te,tha t the cu s tom of offer
i ng men ,or at any ra te B rahman s
, was fa l l i ng to desu etude
at the t ime . Accord i ng to the S atapatha B rahmana , xi i i . ,6,6,1,there was a typ i ca l Puru shamedha , i n wh ich
ceremony one hu ndred and e igh ty-five human v i ct im s of
var iou s tr i be s,cha racters and profes s i on s
,were bound
to e l even y apas or post s , and after th e Pu ru sha S ukta had
been u ttered over them,and the sacred fi re had been carr i ed
rou nd them,th ey were l i bera ted u nhu rt
,and ob lat ion s of
bu tte r offered on th e sacr ifi c ia l fi re i n the i r s tead . Perhap s
th i s cu stom was begi nn i n g to preva i l i n th e t ime of Suna
sepha ,and hence h i s exc lama t i on
,They wi l l rea l ly
k i l l me ,as i f I were not a man 1 Th i s rece i ves cor
robora t i on from the ch ronol ogi ca l order of A ryan sacr i
fices , as gi ven i n the fo l l owi ng passage of the A itaréya
B rahmana,
“ The god s k i l l ed a man for thei r v i ct im .
B u t from h im thu s k i l l ed,th e part wh i ch was fi t for a
sacr ifice went ou t and entered a horse . Thence the
horse became an an ima l fi t for be i ng sacr ificed . The
gods then k i l l ed th e horse , bu t the part fi t for be i ng
sacr ificed wen t ou t of i t and en tered an ox . The gods
then k i l l ed th e ox , bu t the part fi t for be i ng sac r i fi ced
1 B arth ’
s R eligions of India , p . 58 .
210 T H E TEACH IN G OF T H E VE DAS .
a dora t i on addressed to the gods exa l t th ee .
” 1 “ M ay
th e l i bera l man ever be prosperou s , who prop i t iate s
th ee w i th con stan t ob la t i on s and pra i s es ; may a ll the
days i n h i s arduou s l i fe b e p rospe rou s , and may th i s
h i s sacr ifice be produc t i ve of reward .
” 2
A l l other na t i on s sac r ifi ced for the same pu rpose .
H erodotu s says tha t th e Egypt ians be l i eved tha t th e
pu b l ic or pr iva te ca lam i t i es,whi ch m i gh t be impend i ng ,
were a rres ted by be i ng “ tu rned u pon the head ” of the
vic t im sacrificed .
3 The Ke l ts con s i dered tha t the favou r
of the gods cou l d not be secu red un l es s th e l i fe of one
man were offered up for tha t of another. The sacr ifice of
Innocen t ch i l dren or pu re v i rgin s was h i gh ly es teemed
by the Greeks,as th e be st mean s of avert i ng ca lam i ty at
home,and of carry i ng i t abroad among enem i es . F eb
ruary is deri ved from an O ld Roman word, F earna , wh ich
was a genera l term for sacr ifices and ceremon i es per
formed at th e c l o se of the year . F ebrua ry was th e last
mon th i n th e anci en t Roman year,i n wh ich i t was
hel d an essen t ia l pa rt of fi l ia l du ty to make a tonemen t
on beha l f of ou r paren ts , by a sacr ifice of the grea tes t
va lu e Profes sor H . H . Wil son says tha t the not ion of
prop i t ia t i n g some d i v in i ty by offer i ng to h im what was
most prec i ou s to the sacrificer, was wide ly d i ffu sed
1 R .-V .
, iv . , 3 , 1 5.
2 Ibid.,iv . , 4 , 7.
3 One of th e c u rses put on it s h ead was th is :If any ev i l is th reaten ingT o th e sac rificer
, or to a ll E gypt ,May i t be pu t on th i s h ead
”
.
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 2 1 1
th roughou t th e worl d i n o l d t imes ,a s was a l so the
prac t ice of the i n d iv i dua l p ledging h imse l f to ac t by a
sol emn prom i se or vow . We m i gh t i n fer ,” he p roceed s,
“ tha t the pract ice was not u nknown to th e pa t r iarcha l
era,from the condu c t of Abraham when commanded to
offer up h i s son ; for a l though he wou l d not under anyc i rcumstances have hes i ta ted to obey the d iv i n e com
mand , yet he m igh t , con s i sten t ly wi th h is obedi ence,
have expres sed some su rpr i se a t the i nj unc t i on , had the
pu rport of i t been whol ly u n fam i l ia r . A t a later da te,
i n the J ewi sh h i story,we have a s im i la r sort of sa cr ifice
,
u nder a sol emn prev iou s engagemen t in the vow of
J eph tha ; and i t is worthy of remark,tha t one of the
cau ses ass igned by the Greek wri te rs to the deten t i on
of th e fleet a t Au l i s , and consequ en t sacr ifice of I ph i gen ia ,
was Agamemnon’
s v i o la t i on of the vow wh ich he had
made to offer to D iana the mos t l ove ly th ing wh ich
the yea r i n wh ich h is daughter was born shou l d produce .
I ph igen ia was tha t th i ng , and th e sacr ifice was i n s i sted
on i n sa t i sfact i on of that vow . T h e offer ing of ch i l d ren
to Mo loch , subsequ ent ly borrowed by th e j ews from
the i r i do la trou s n e ighbou rs,origina ted probab ly i n a
s im i la r fee l i n g,wh ich , i t is ev i den t , exerc i sed a very
exten s i ve i nfluence over the na t i on s of West As ia i n
remote an t i qu i ty ; and ,as appear s from the story of
S unasepha ,was not confined to tha t qua rte r , bu t h ad
reached the oppos i te l im i ts of As ia a t a per iod a t least
p r ior by ten or twe lve cen tu r i e s to the Chr i st ian era .
1
1 E ssay s on the R eligions of the H indus, pp . 266 , 267 .
2 1 2 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
There wa s no temp l e or sacred p lace set apart for the
performance of sac r ifice s i n the remote Ved ic age . They
were performed e i ther on th e domest ic hea rth , wh ich was
u sed for ord i na ry hou sehol d pu rposes , or in an enc l osu re
connected wi th the hou se , or in a spec ia l p lace se l ected
for the pu rpose ; the d imen s i on and s i tua t i on of wh ich
changed accord i ng to th e na tu re and requ i remen ts of the
ceremon i es . Su ch a p lace was con secra ted for theob
servance of a pa rt icu lar r i te,and
,when the observance
of tha t r i te wa s at an end,i t ceased to be a sacred p lace .
I f u sed aga i n for th e same pu rpose , i t requ i red to be
consecra ted anew .
A l l Ved ic sacr ifices were e i th er perpetua l (niiya) or
occas i ona l (anitya). Perpetua l sacr ifice s were compu l
sory,i .e.
,mu s t be offered at s ta ted t imes
,or on the
occu rrence of certa i n even t s ; occas i ona l sacr ifices were
vo lunta ry, i .e. ,
m i gh t be performed,accord i ng to the wi l l
of the sacrificer,i n fu lfi lmen t of some vow
,or for th e
grat ifica t i on of some wi sh .
In th e R i g-Veda , we read tha t p rayers and l i bat i on s
were offered three t imes a day ; name ly ,morn i ng
,m id
day ,and noon .
1
S’
3 . T he S acrzfi cers .
O r ig i na l ly th e fa th er of a fam i ly wa s the pr i es t who
offered sacr ifice for h is own hou sehold,and hence was ,
and st i l l i s , ca l l ed Yaj anzana ,wh ich m ean s
,l i tera l ly
,th e
1 R .-V . , i i i . , 28 .
2 1 4 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
accord i ng to the ru l e s . The whol e number was on ly
wan ted for Soma sac r ifices . F or the Agn ihotra ,one
p r i e s t , an Adhvaryu , wa s su ffic i en t ; for th e D arsapurna
masa ,fou r pr i ests ; for the Chaturmasya ,
five ; for the
Pa subandh a,s ix ; and for th e A gn ish toma
,s ixteen . At
S at tra s ,wh ich was exc lu s i ve ly a pr i e st ’s sacr ifi ce
,th e
Yajamana h im se l f, i f a good B rahman,became one of
the R itvijs .
The du ty of the H otr z’
s (ca l l er s)was to rec i te loud ly and
d i st inct ly certa in hymn s of the R i g-Veda ,i n pra ise of
the de i t i es to whom any part icu lar act of the sacrificer
wa s addre ssed . Thei r du t i e s are m inu te ly recorded i n
the B rahmana s of th e B ahnr ic/zas , su ch as the Kau sh itaki,
and A itaréya B rahmanas . The Udga tr is (s ingers) sang
the hymn s wh ich form the col l ect i on of the Sama-Veda .
Thei r du t i es are p rescr i bed i n the B rahmanas of the
Khandogas . The A dhvaryus (person s of the ceremon i es)u ttered th e Mantras of the Yaj u r-Veda i n a l ow voice .
B es i des,to th em was ent ru s ted all th e hard manua l
labou r o f th e sac r ifice . They had to m ea su re th e
sacr ific ia l ground (yaj naahnnzi ), to bu i l d the a l tar (nedi),to prepare the sac r ific ia l imp l emen ts
,to fetch wood and
water,to l ight the fi re
,to br ing and immolate the
an ima l s,press the Soma
,and th row the obla t i on s i n to
th e fi re . They formed,a s i t wou l d seem , the l owest
c la s s of pri ests , and the i r acqu i remen t s were more of a
prac t ica l than of an i n te l l ec tua l cha rac ter . Some of the
offices wh ich wou l d na tu ra l ly fa l l to the l ot of the
A dhvaryu s were con s i dered so degrad i ng tha t other
person s bes i de s the pri ests were frequent ly emp l oyer! i n
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 2 1 5
them . The S am itri , for i n stance ,who h ad to s lay the
an ima l , was not a pr ie s t , he need not even be a B rahman,
and th e same app l i e s to the V a ikartas , th e bu tchers , and
the so-ca l l ed Charmasadhvaryu s (the ass i stan ts of the
A dhvaryu s). The number of hymn s and i nvoca t ions
wh i ch they had to u se a t th e sacr ifices was sma l l e r than
tha t of th e other p r i ests . These , however , they h ad to
l earn by heart . The B rahman was th e genera l con tro l l er
of th e sacr ific ia l performance . I n a s i tt i n g postu re he
had to watch ca refu l ly the three other c la s ses of pr i est s ,and to correc t any m i s take they m i gh t comm i t . H e was
therefore su pposed to know the whol e ceremon ia l , as wel l
as all the hymn s emp l oyed by the H otr i , Adhva ryu ,and
Udgatri . I t wa s on ly a t Somas tha t h e had to take an
act i ve pa rt , and th en i t was cu s tomary to el ec t another
super in tenden t , ca l l ed Sadasya ,cha i rman .
” 1
The fou r ch i ef p r i ests,and some of the i r ass i s tants, are
men t i oned in the R i g-Veda . I n Man da la i i . , I,2, Agn i
i s ca l l ed the H otr i,Adhvaryu
,and B rahman .
2 Aga i n , i n
R .-V .
,i ., 1 0
,1,we read
,
“ The s i ngers s i ng thee,sa ta
kra tu ,
2 the rec i ters of the R ichas p ra i s e thee , who art
worthy of pra i se,th e B rahman s ra i se thee a l oft , l i ke a
bamboo pol e”
. H ere th e s i ngers are not ca l l ed by the i r
techn ica l name of Udga tris, bu t Gaya trins , l i tera l ly those
who empl oy the Gayat r i -metre ; and the rec i ters are no t
1 M . M . , S ans. L it . , p . 47 1 .
S ee a l so R .-V . , i i i . , 3 5 , 10 ; x . ,
A name of Indra , mean ing h e to whom h undreds o f v ic t ims
are o ffered at a sac r ifi c e .
2 16 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
des igna ted by the i r techn ica l name of H otri,bu t Ark i n s .
Thi s shows , however , tha t the Udgatri and H otr i pr i es t s
ex i s ted as funct i ona r i e s a t that ear ly t ime . M en t i on is
a lso made of “ R ich and Saman verses,
” 1and of “ the
hymn s ca l l ed the R i ch and Saman,the metres and the
Yaju sh thu s showing c l ear ly tha t the d iv i s ion of the
sacr ifice between the H otr i, Udgatri , Adhvaryu ,
and
B rahman , was fu l ly e stab l i sh ed before the comp l et i on of
the Sanh i ta,or co l l ec t i on s of the R i g-Vedas .
Every pr i est mu s t be whol e i n body,and b lame l e s s i n
l i fe . H e mu st be anyanyanga ,not hav i ng too few l imbs ;
anatirihtanga , not hav i ng too many l imbs ; doesa z‘
a,re
gu larly shaped ; anatihr is/zna , not be i ng too o l d ; and
ana tisneta , not be i ng too young . H e mu s t above a ll be
saa’
hncarana,a man who leads a proper l i fe .
3
The pri es t s , however , were con sc i ou s of many s i n s
and imperfect i on s i n them se lve s ; and hence , l i ke the
Lev i t ica l p r i es t s of o l d , h ad to offer prayers and sacr i
fices for the rem i ss i on of the same . Th i s th ey d i d
ch i efly at S at tras ,when a body of seventeen or twenty
fou r of them met together a t the ceremony,sacr ificed
for one another,and then so l emn ly con secra ted each
other afresh to the sacred serv ice of the gods .
I t appea rs tha t i n very ear ly t imes,th e A ryan sacr i
ficers i n I n d ia wore a cord (nzehala'
, rasana) at the
sacr ifices . Th i s th ey d id i n th ree ways ,correspond ing
1 R .-V . , x . , 7 1 , 1 1 ; v i i i . , 7 1 , 5 . Ibid. , x . , 90 , 9 .
3 Compare th e qua l ificat ions nec essary for th e L ev i t i ca l
pr iesth ood (Lev i t i cu s, xx i . , 1 7,
2 1 8 T H E TEA CH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
therefore , to su ppose tha t prayers and pra i s es are a lone
the resu l t of the fee l i ng of dependence u pon God , and
sacr ifices a lone the resu l t of th e fee l i n g of mora l re
lat ionsh ip to H im . Both are the resu l t of the same
fee l i ngs d i fferen t ly expres sed . H en ce a ll prayers are
not pra i ses,and a ll sac r ifi ces are not thank-offer i ngs .
Some prayers are ea rn est pet i t i on s , imp l or i ng the A l
m i ghty to bes tow tha t wh ich is needed,and to avert
tha t wh ich is dreaded ; and some sacr ifices are i n tended
whol ly to a tone for sin,and to tu rn th e frown s of the
Supreme i n to sm i l es . Prayers are the offeri ngs of the
l i ps,and sac r ifices the offer ings of posses s ion s bu t both
proceed from th e sam e heart wi th the same i n ten t i on .
I n a s ta te of s i n l e s s pu r i ty , we may imagi ne that man
wou l d worsh ip h i s Crea tor by pra ises on ly , the over
flowings of a sou l i n p erfec t ha rmony wi th i tse l f and
all existenc ies, v i s i b l e and i nv i s i b l e . B u t the en trance of
s i n i n to the sou l was the en trance of d i scord , of m i sery ,of es trangemen t from God. The con sc i ou sness of s i n ,
and of the l oss cau sed by i t , wou l d na tu ra l ly impe l man
to do someth i ng to exp iate s i n , and so to repa i r the ru i n
wh ich i t had e ffected . And wha t cou l d he do , but
re l i n qu i sh,and devou t ly present to God
,what he h imsel f
mos t cher ished and va lu ed ? Wha t cou l d he do , bu t
perform those ac ts of k indnes s wh ich among men are
ca l cu la ted to ma i n ta i n fr i end ly fee l i ngs when present ,
and to re s tore such fee l i ngs when absent Ac tua ted by
these mo t i ves , th e Ved ic A ryan s offered to the i r gods/
the food,— con s i st i ng of vegetab l e and an ima l , — and the
dr i nk,— cons i st i n g of m i l k and the sou l-insp ir i ng soma
T H E SOTER IOLOGY O F T H E VEDA S . 2 1 9
j u ice , —wh ich they loved so wel l th emse l ves . N O wonder,
then,tha t so many hymn s conta i n i n voca t ions to the
gods to descen d from the i r e therea l man s i on s above to
s i t i n a fr i end ly manner w i th the i r votar i e s on the green
grass of the earth,and to partake of th e cho ice v iand s
prepared for them I t appear s from the hymn s addressed
to Va ru na,that vegetab l e food predom i na ted among the
A ryan s i n the ear l i est age , as i t p robab ly d i d among th e
H ebrews,rem in i scence of wh ich was preserved i n the
J ewi sh shew-bread , wh i ch was con stan t ly kep t on the
a l tar before J ehovah .
1 B u t when the A ryan s developed
i n to m i gh ty conquerors , de l i ght ing i n war, with I nd ra as
the i r ch iefde ity ,b l oody sac r ifice s as sumed suprem e impor
tance . And human sacrifices— wh i ch or ig i na ted e i ther i n
gra tefu l fee l i ngs towards the gods,for v ic tor i es ga ined
over enem i e s,and th e con sequ en t de s i re to offer the
capt ives to them,a s an expres s i on of those fee l i ngs , or
i n the des i re to give up to the god s on e’
s deares t posses
s i on,one’s own ki th and k i n , wh ich is th e l og ica l con
c lusion of a ll other sacrifices— appea red abou t th e same
t ime . Th i s i s obv i ou s from the few traces of human
sacr ifices found i n the Mantra s,or o l des t port ion s of the
Veda s,and the h igh va lu e a t tached to such sacr ifices i n
the B rahmanas,or la ter port i on s . There i s no need , there
fore,to suppose
,as some do , tha t human sacr ifice s are
remnants of cann i ba l i sm . Su ch a su ppos i t ion assumes
that all na t i on s have once been cann iba l s,i na smuch
as a ll nat i on s have been gu i l ty of offer i ng human sacr i
1 E xodu s ,xxv . , 30 ; Lev . , xx iv . , 5 .
220 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VE DA S .
fices ; an a s sumpt i on wh ich der ive s no su pport wha tever
e i ther from the ear l i es t record s of the A ryan,or of the
Sem i t i c na t i on s .
B u t though sacr ifi ce of possess i on s i s the most na tu ra l
and s i gn ifi cant express i on of man’s con sc iou s ness of s i n,
and of h i s strong des i re to avert the pun i shmen t du e to i t,by prop i t ia t i ng the god s and though we grant that su ch
an act is th e spon taneou s ou tcome of the fe l t sp i r i tua l
n ecess i t i e s of human natu re ; yet , the true mean i ng of
the act cou l d no more be d i s covered by human reason,
una i ded by reve lat i on,than cou l d the B e i ng h imse l f to
Whom su ch homage i s due .
The Ved i c not i on was tha t , by the act of sacr ifice
a lone, th e god s cou l d be pac ifi ed and the i r favou r
secured . And th i s i s the preva l e n t not i on among all
heath en nat i on s . H en ce the sacrificer was i dent ified
wi th the sacr ifice,and h is sin was su pposed to pas s
d i rec t ly to the v ict im .
“ The sacrificer is h im se l f the
v i c t im . I t takes the very sacrificer h imse l f to heaven ” 1
The an ima l i s man by a l l egory . The sacrificer i s
the an ima l ” (yaj amanah paste/z).“ The an ima l is u l ti
mate ly th e sacrificer h im se l f. ” The sacrificer is i n deed
the sacr ifi ce 2 (vaj anzano oa i yajna/z). The sacrificer
ki l l s,on the day prev i ou s to th e Soma fe st i va l
,an an ima l
d evoted to Agn i-soma,thu s rEdeem ing h im se l f from
the ob l i gat i on of be i ng h im se l f sacr ificed . H e then
br i ngs h is Soma sac r ifice , after hav i ng thu s redeemed
1 T a it . B r . ,i i i . , 3 .
S at . B r . ,x i .
, 3 ; T a it . B r . ,i i . , 2 , 8 , 2 ; A it . B r . , i . , 28.
22 2 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
of sacr ifi ce bei ng p leas i ng to the gods was too deep ly
rooted i n human na tu re to be erad i cated by ph i lo soph i ca l
s pecu la t i on s , e i ther i n the Eas t or i n the West . Even
Bu ddh i sm , though i t abol i shed sac r ifices , fa i l ed to de stroy
the doctrine, wh ich found expres s i on for a t ime i n a scet i
cism and mortificat ion of the fle sh ; and afterwards , i n
I n d ia,i t reasserted i t se l f by revert i ng to i t s or i gi na l tvpe .
H ere , then , i s an apparen t oppos i t i on between the d ic ta tes
of rea son and the d ic ta te s of two imper ious impu l s e s of
human natu re re s pec t i ng the doc tr i ne of sac r ifice . I s
there no way of reconc i l i ng them
I t i s imposs i b l e to reconc i l e them on the a s sumpt i on
tha t , when man began to sacr ifice,he was too low i n the
sca l e of evo lu t i on to reason , and hence tha t h e acted
more l i ke an an ima l from i n s t i ncts and impu l s es than
from h i gher data . F or whether man descended from
some “arborea l an ima l wi th pom ted ears ,
or was
crea ted i n the image of God , we mu s t bel i eve , that
a t th e po i n t when h e man i fested rel i gi ou s facu l t i e s,he
mu s t have been a man in the fu l l sen se of tha t term“a th i nker
,posse s s i ng the same powers and tendenc i es
as he pos sesses at presen t ; otherwi se we have no data
from which to rea son abou t wha t h e was e i ther capab l e
of,or l i ke ly to do . I n deed
,the ev i dence of Language i s
dec i s i ve on th i s poin t ; and i t is the on ly ev i dence worth
l i sten i ng to concern ing pre-h i s tor ic t imes . Every language
is a monument to the fac t,tha t man had been pre-em i n ent ly
endowed wi th the powers of ob serva t i on and e labora t ion
when tha t language was formed ; and,a s re l i g i on i s un
known wi thou t language,we may l eg i t ima t e ly conclude
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 2 2 3
tha t he pos ses sed such powers when he expre ssed the
re l igi ou s tendency of h is na tu re i n prayer and sacr ifice .
N e i ther w i l l the wel l-known a rgumen t , tha t b loody
sac r ifices na tu ra l ly or i g i na ted i n the i dea of God, as
a terr i b ly ma l evol en t Be i ng a lways th i rst i n g for b lood,
remove the d i fficu l ty . F or th ere is noth i ng p la i n er than
tha t th e h igher up we trace the s tream of Ved i c re l ig i ou s
thought,the more we are impre ssed w i th the fact
,tha t
the predom i nan t cha racter i s t ic of the gods was benefi
cence , and not ma l evo l ence .
What exp lana t i on,then
,can be g iven of the fac t tha t
wh i l e the Ved ic not i on of sacr ifice s is repugnan t to
Reason and Revelat i on , sacr ifices were em i n en t ly pOpu
lar, and had the i r roo t deep down i n th e na tu re of man
The exp lana t i on i s fou nd i n the true mean i ng of sacr i
fices ; and for the true mean i ng , we are dependen t u pon
Reve lat i on . Sac r ifices ,a s the re su l t of two powerfu l
fee l i ngs o f human na tu re,exp re s s an ete rna l fact , viz . ,
tha t s in mu st be a toned for,or pu n i shmen t be i nfl i cted .
Th i s is i n harmony wi th reason . B u t the not ion tha t
the sacr ifice of pos ses s ion s,however va luab l e
, can a tone
for s i n and aver t pun i shmen t , is contra ry to reason . Th i s
paradox i s so lved i n the B i b l e ; for we read that sacr ifices
were con st i tu ted by God , soon after th e entrance of s i n
i n to the sou l of man,as
“a shadow of good th i ngs to
come,
as svmbols of the sacr ifi ce of J esu s,
“ the Lamb
of God, and of the doc t r i n e i nc luded i n tha t fu tu re
act . H ence sacr ifi ces were i n tended to rem i n d man of
sin and the pu n i shmen t of sp i r i tua l d eath due to i t,and
to portray before h im the sac r ifice of the Sav iou r,wh ich
224 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
a l one wa s su ffic i en t to a ton e for s i n,and to sa t i s fy the
sp i r i tua l c rav i ngs wh ich i n st i nct ive ly and i rres i s t i b ly fou nd
expres s i on i n th e sacr ifice of possess ion s . Thi s i s th e
true mean i ng of sac r ifi ce ; and , v i ewed i n th i s l i gh t , the
appa ren t oppos i t ion between the test imony of rea son and
th e powerfu l fee l i ngs wh ich produced sacr ifice,van i shes
,
and i t s or ig i n appears both human and divine. I t is the
ou tcome of two or ig i na l fee l i ngs of human na tu re,— the
fee l i ngs of dependence u pon, and of mora l re la t i on sh i p
to , God ; and i t wa s sanct i oned and emp loyed by God,
as a type of the mean s by wh ich , s i n can be removed
and man reconc i l ed to h i s Crea tor . B u t the typ ica l
m ean i ng was gradua l ly obscu red,
and u l t ima te ly lost
among all nat i on s and the erroneou s not ion tha t sacr i
fices a lone can paci fy the D e i ty,and restore fr i end ly
fee l i ngs between H im and H is worsh i ppers, was sub
s t i tu ted . Wherea s th e true i dea is,that on ly su ch sac r i
fices as were offered,wi th the con sc i ou snes s of the i r
typ i ca l mean i ng,cou l d be we l l p l ea s i ng to God. H ence
we read,tha t the d i fferen ce between th e sac r ifices of
Ca i n and Abe l— the fi rst sacr ific es on record— lay in the
d i spos i t i on of the brothers . Abe l offered a fu l l er sacr i
fice than Ca i n,becau se he “ offered i t by fa ith
,and
rece ived the d iv i ne approba t i on .
1 N ow , fa i th imp l i e s a
D i v i n e commu n ica t i on,for fa i th cometh by hear i ng , and
hear i ng by the word of God”
.
2 Abe l , th erefore , offered
a more exce l l en t sacr ifice than h i s brother, becau se he
offered i t i n obed i en ce to the D i v i ne command ; or , i n
1 Gen .
,iv . , 3 , 7 ; H eb .
,x i .
, 4 . R om . ,x . , 17 .
2 26 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
Teu ton ic branch of the Aryan fam i ly . I n one of the o l d
R ane songs,Od i n
,th e ch i ef De i ty of the Teu ton s
,i s
represen ted as hangi ng,du r i ng n i n e l ong n ights , i n the
wind-rocked tree,wi th a s pear
,wounded , offer ing h im
se l f to h im se l f ” .
I wot that I h ung on th e w ind-roc kedN ine long n igh ts ;W i th a spear , wounded ,
A nd to Odin offered
Myse l f to myse lfOn th at tre e of wh ich none knows
F rom wh at root i t sp rings .
5 . M editation and A sceticisnz .
I n proport i on as Mon i sm,or Panthe i sm
,rose
,th e con
sciou sness of sin waned . When a ll exi s tences,inc lud ing
man,were rega rded a s the phenomena l man i fe s ta t i on of
th e Atman— th e on ly exi stence— there was no more p lace
for sin,as the tran sgres s i on of an obj ec t i ve law
,than
there wa s for an obj ec tive crea t i on . Ev i l and m i sery ,however
,were fact s too pa l pab l e to be i gnored ; and so
an a t tempt was made to accoun t for them,on the su ppo
sit ion tha t th ey are the resu l t of i gnorance on the part
of man,wh ich l eads to th e be l i e f tha t he i s someth i ng
d i fferen t from the un ive rsa l S ou l . The cau se of evi l and
m isery i s,therefore
,the m i staken not i on tha t man i s an
i n d iv i dua l,an ego, sepa rate from the grea t Se l f ; and
freedom from both i s obta i n ed by tha t knowledge wh ich
enab l e s h im to i den t i fy h is own se l f wi th the h i ghest
Se l f. And tha t knowledge can be acqu i red on ly by
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VE DA S . 2 27
Penance and Med i ta t i on . Sacr ifices and good works are
not whol ly ignored on the con trary,they are encou raged
a s the mean s of a t ta i n ing the b l i ss of heaven for a t ime,
wh ich ,accord i ng to the Upan i shad s , is very d i fferen t
from un i on wi th B rahma . I n some Upan i shads th ese
are i ncu lca ted a s nece s sary p re l im i nar i e s to a l i fe of
penance and med i ta t ion in th e fores t . A man,we are to l d
,
mu s t pass th rough th e two stages of a s tudent of th e
Vedas,and of a marr i ed hou sehol de r
,before he can ret i re
to the forest ; whence he mu s t pa ss to the fou rth or la st
s tage,v iz .
,tha t of the S ann iyasi or a scet ic . L i tt l e stre ss
,
however,i s la i d in th e Upan i shads on sacr ifi ce and good
works ; penance and med i ta t i on are the m ost exce l l en t way .
Saunaka,the grea t hou seho ld er
,approached A ngiras
respect fu l ly,and asked
,S i r
,wha t i s tha t through wh ich
,
i f i t is known , everyth ing e l se becom es known
H e sa i d to h im,Two ki nd s of knowl edge mu s t be
known,
-th i s i s wha t a ll who know B rahma te l l u s,
the h igher and the l ower knowl edge .
The lower knowl edge i s the R i g-Veda,Yaj u r-Veda
,
Sama-Veda,A tharva-Veda , S iksha (phonet ics), Ka lpa
(ceremon ia l ), Vyakarana (gramma r), N irukta (etymology),Khanda s (metre), Jyot ish a (astronomy). B u t the h i gher
knowl edge is tha t by wh ich the Indes tru c t i b l e (B rahma)i s apprehended
,tha t wh i ch cannot be seen nor se i z ed ,
wh ich has no fam i ly and no ca s te , no eyes n or ears , no
hand s nor feet,the e terna l
,th e omn i pre sen t (a ll-pervad ing),
i nfi n i tes ima l,which the wi se regard a s the sou rce of a ll
be i ngs .” 11 M undaka Up. ,
i. , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 .
2 28 T H E TEA CH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
F ra i l , we are to l d i n another Upan i shad . are those
boa ts,the sacr ifices , i n wh ich the lower ceremon ia l or
th e l ower knowl edge exi s t s . F ools who pra i se th i s as th e
h i ghest good are su bj ec t aga i n and aga i n to o l d age and
dea th .
Con s i der i ng sacr ifice and good works as th e be st ,
the se foo l s know no h igher good , and hav ing enj oyed
the i r rewa rd on the h e i gh t of heaven , ga i n ed b y good
works,they enter aga in th i s worl d or a l ower one .
’
Every H i ndu is sa i d to be born a debtor to th e gods,
to the r i sh i s,to the fa thers
,and to men . H e . fu lfi l s th e
fi rst by sac r ifice s , the second by stu dy i ng the Veda s,th e
th i rd by hav i ng offsp r i ng , and th e fou r th by ho sp i ta l i ty
and k i ndness .
1 The man who fu lfi l s these , du t i es i s free
from b lame he i s a performer of good works accord i n g
to the “ l ower knowledge ,’
and wi l l “ enj oy h i s reward
on the he igh t of heaven bu t he wi l l be subj ec t to be
born aga i n .
“ Those,
on the other hand,‘fwho pract i se
penance and fa i th i n the forest , t ranqu i l , wi se , and l i v i n g
on a lm s , depa r t free from pas s i on , th rough the su n ,to
whe re tha t immorta l person dwel l s , whose natu re i s im
p er i shab l e” 2
H e who h as perce ived tha t wh i ch is wi thou t sound,
W i thou t touch,withou t form , withou t decay , wi thou t
taste,eterna l
,wi thou t sme ll
, ,withou t begi nn i ng
,withou t
end ,beyond the grea t and u nchangeab l e
,is freed from
the jaws of death .
” 3 “ As wa ter does not c l i ng to a
1 S at. B r. , i . , 7, 2 ,1, 5 . 1 1 .
3 Ka tha . Up., 1 , 3 ; Va ll i . 1 5 .
2 3 0 T H E TEACH ING OF T H E VEDA S .
The Soter i o l ogy of the U pan i s had s i s far more i l logica l
and pu eri l e than that of the Man tra s and B rahmana s .
F or i f man be on ly a phenomena l crea tu re of phenomena l
c i rcumstances over wh i ch he has no contro l , he cannot
be he l d a ccou ntab l e for h i s ac t i on s . H e i s a s much the
c reatu re of organ i sm and envi ronment as th e bea st of
the fie l d . And i f he be on ly a phenomena l man i fes ta t i on
of the U n iversa l Sou l,wh ich is both the ma ter ia l and
effici en t cau se of all th i ngs , th ere can be no room for
e i ther good or ev i l , wh ich imp ly the exerc i se of free-wi l l .
N oth i ng,therefore , tha t he may do can have the l eas t
i nfluence on h i s cha racter and dest i ny ; and hen ce , l og i
ca l ly,no p lan of sa l va t i on is e i ther n ecessa ry or pos s i b l e .
H uman na tu re , however , i s s t ronger than l og i c ; and ,
hence,th e i n extr i cab l e con fu s i on i n wh ich the ph i lo
sophers of the U pan i s had s have i nvol ved themse l ves .
6. R etrospect and Conclusion .
We have now pa ssed i n revi ew the L i te ra tu re , the
Theology,the Cosmol ogy , th e An th ropol ogy , and th e
Soter i o logy of the Veda s . We have fol l owed the s tream
by G ibbon :“Wh en th ou art a lone in thy ce l l , shu t thy door
and seat thyse lf in a corne r ; ra ise thy m ind above a ll th ings
va in and trans i tory ; rec l ine thy h eart and ch in on thy brea st ;turn thy eyes and thy th ough ts towards th e m iddle of thy
be l ly, th e region of th e nave l , and search th e p lac e of th e
h eart , th e seat of th e sou l . At fi rst all w i l l be dark and
c omfort less ; but if you pe rseve re day and n igh t , you w i l l fe e lan effable joy ; and no soone r h as th e sou l discove red th e
p lace of th e h eart , th an i t is enc i rc led in a myst ica l eth e rea ll igh t .
T H E S OTER IOLOGY OF T H E VEDA S . 2 3 1
of A ryan re l i g i ou s and specu la t i ve thought , i n a ll i t s
ram ifica t i on s,th rough the Mantra , B rahmana
,and Upan
i shad stages of i ts d escen t . We have con s idered th e
H i n du A ryan s’ concept i on of God, th e i r s pecu la t i on s on
the c reat i on of the worl d , and the i r not i on of the or i g in ,
natu re,and dest i ny of man
,i n each of those s tages . We
have pu shed our i n qu i r i e s as far back i n t ime as th e
record s wou l d perm i t ; and we have found tha t the re
ligiou s and specu la t i ve thought of the peop l e wa s far
pu rer,s imp l e r, and more rat i ona l at th e fa rthest poi n t
we reached , than at the nea re s t or la te s t i n th e Ved ic
age . The conclu s i on,th erefore
,i s i n ev i tab l e
,viz . : T ha t
the development of religious though t in India has heen uni
formly downward, and not upward— deteriora tion
,and not
evolu tion .
We have a l so seen tha t the poi n t reached by u s was
not the po i n t whence the deter i o ra t i on began ; and tha t
i n proport i on a s we go back i n t ime,the number of th e
gods grows l ess , and th e eth i ca l con sc i ou sn es s of s i n
grows stronger . H ence the probab i l i ty i s tha t , i f we
cou l d go back far enough i n t ime,so as to reach th e
poi n t whence the deter i ora t i o n began , we shou ld find a
monotheistic religion , pure and simp le.
We have seen,fu rther , tha t the knowl edge of the d iv i n e
att r i bu tes pos sessed by the Ved i c A ryan s was ne i ther
th e produ ct of I n tu i t i on nor Exper i en ce,bu t a su rv iva l
,
or a rem i n i scence . We are j u st ified , th erefore , i n con
c lud i ng (un t i l the contra ry i s proved), tha t the.
h igher and
purer conceptions of the Vedic A ryans were the results of a
P r imitive D ivine R evela tion .
2 3 2 T H E TEACH ING O F T H E VEDA S .
The theory of a Pr im i t i ve D i v i n e Reve la t i on a l one is
capab l e of exp la i n i n g all th e re l i gi ou s i deas of the Vedas ,such as an obj ec t of worsh i p
,s i n , mercy , sacr ifi ce , a
fu tu re sta te . These i dea s are a ll fore ign to Na tu re .
S un,moon , ea rth ,
mou n ta i ns,and r ivers
,have noth i ng
to do wi th wor sh ip , wi th forg iv i ng sin,and wi th pre
servi ng men from gu i l t . B u t they are qu i te at home i n
th e theory of a pr imeva l revela t ion . We mu s t be l i eve
that the most probab l e theory is tha t wh i ch exp la in s a ll
the fac ts . The theory of N a tu ra l Evolu t i on cannot exp la i n
a ll th e facts . B u t the theory of a Pr im i t i ve D i v i n e Reve
lat i on , wha tever ha rd words may be sa i d abou t i t as be i ng
u n sc i en t ific ,does exp la i n a ll th e fa cts . I t te l ls u s tha t
the pre sen ce of su ch i deas i n the Veda s a s God , con
fession of sin ,pet i t ion s for m ercy , sacr ifice , and a l i fe after
dea th,are re l ic s of a van i sh ing Reve la t i on
,he l d mech an i
ca l l y , withou t any comprehen s i on of the i r mean ing .
Gran t i n g tha t th i s . i s on ly a theory , th e oppos i te V i ew
is no more . B ETWE E N THE SE TWO TH EOR IE S , THE R E IS ,
HOWE V E R ,TH IS D IF F E R ENCE . T H E ON E IS IN HA R M ONY
WITH T H E TE ACH ING O F A V E NE R A B L E OLD B OOK ,A GA INST
WH ICH N O WE APON FOR M E D H A S YET PR E V A ILE D ; T H E
OTHE R IS IN OPPOS ITION T O IT .
I N D E X .
A D H V A R YU S,see sacrificers .
A diti , goddessE tymo logy of, 4 1 , 4 2 .
M yth of, in India and Iran , 4 2 .
T o ta l ity o f all ex i stences , 4 2 .
A dityas , lum inous gods , th e sons
of Aditi , 4 1 , 42 .
T h e ir number and names,
43 , 44T he ir ph ysica l import and
moral character, 43 .
A gara , see S acrifice .
A gnayi , see Goddesses .
Agn i , God o f F ire ;E tymo logy of
, 57 .
Origin of, 57 , 58 .
A ttribu tes and functions Of,
58-60 .
A gnidhra ,see S acrificers .
A gn ih otra ,A gn ish stoma ,
Agn iyadh eya ,
A grayani, A grayane sh ti
,A havanya , sec S acr ifice .
A h inas , see S acrifice .
A hura-M az da , ch ief god of t h e
Z oroastrians , 3 2 .
Identified w ith Varuna , 3 2 ,
3 3 1
A itareya B rahmana ,A itaréya U p
anish ad , see Veda .
A lexander the Great , 1 5 , 23 .
Amesh a spentas, 3 3 , 4 2 .
A naxagoras, 69 .
A nitya , see S acrifice .
A nsa , see A di tyas .
A po l lo , 58 .
A psarases , w ives of th e Gandh arvas, demigods,
A ptoryama , see Sacrifice .
A ramaic , 24 .
A ratu s, 1 3 7 .
A rch i lochus, 3 4 .
A rgyll , D uke of, 104 , 1 1 0,1 1 1 .
A ristoph anes, 1 3 1 .
A ristotle , 9 2 ,109 , 148 .
A rk ins , 2 1 6 .
A rno ld , S ir E dw in , 99 .
A ryaman , see A dityas .
A ryanakas , see Veda .
A ryans,1 78 , 179 .
A scetic ism , 226-23 0 .
A shhavaka , see S acrificers .
A sh taka,A t iratra , A tyagn ish toma ,
see S acrifice .
A soka ,1 5 .
A svalayana ,1 5 , 1 6 .
A svamedha , 196-19 8 .
A svins , mean ing and functions of,63 , 64 .
A tharva-Veda , see Veda .
A tman , its origin and h istory , 7377
A ugustine , 1 88 .
B A B YLON , (ian), 25 , 13 7 .
Barth,M . A .
,1 8 , 3 5 , 1 69 ,
170 ,
20 8 .
Bh aga , see A dityas .
B hagavata Purana , sec Purana .
B rahma , a god
Its e tymo logy , 77 , 78 .
Its deve lopment into a god ,
788 0 .
Its cu lm ination , 80-82 .
B rahman , see Caste .
Brahmana,sec Veda .
B rahmanach au sin ,2 1 3 .
2 3 6 IN DEX .
B rahmanaspat i ,Lord of Prayer, 59 .
B rih adaryanaka Upan ish ad , see
Veda .
Brihaspati , same as B rahmaspat i ,
58-59B rown
, S ir T .,1 3 6 .
B uddh ism , 23 .
B unsen , B aron , 108 .
B urne l l , D r. A . C ., 24 , 25 , 26 .
B urnou f. E . , 1 66 .
CE S A R , 23 , 209 .
Caste , etymo logy and significationof th e word
,1 7 1 .
Origin and deve lopment of
caste,17 1 .
(1) A ccording to the PurushaS ukta ,
1 74 .
(2 ) A ccording to Manu ,175 ,
1 76 .
(3 ) Real origin ,177 .
B rahmans , 1 82-1 86 .
Ksh atriyas , 1 8 1 .
Vaisyas , 1 8 1-182 .
S udras. 179 1 8 1 .
A ll men original ly one caste ,
Chaldea, (n), 2 5 .
Ch andas , metre .
Ch andragupta ,1 5 , 1 6 .
Ch andramas,th e moon .
Ch armasadhvaryus , 2 1 5 .
Ch aturmasya ,sce S acrifice .
Ch rist l ieb , D r . , 82 , 92 .
Ci cero , 1 6 1 .
Co lebrook , H . T ., 9 , 40 ,
1 1 5 .
Confuc iu s , 1 10 .
Creation , ascribed to some inte lligent be ing,
1 1 3 , 1 1 4 .
Creation from noth ing,1 14
1 2 2 .
Creation from pre-existing
0
matter, 1 2 2-3 1 3 2 .
Creation a ph enomenal em
anation,1 3 2
-1 3 5 .
Cudworth,D r . R .
,inte l lectual
system of th e un iverse , 70 , 73 ,
74Cyaparna Sayakayana ,
208 .
E DDA ,1 2 1
,1 22 .
Egypt -ians), 24 , 4 2 , 2 10 .
E kah as , see S acrifice .
Emanation , see Creation .
E xperience , see God .
F A IRB A IRN , D r . A . M .,1 65 .
Faith , 55 , 1 90 .
Fal l , 142 ,1 55 .
Fath ers , see P itris .
F etich ism ,1 1 0 .
DA KS HA , see A dityas .
Darius , 25 .
D armeste ter, M . J . , 3 2 .
D arsanas , 2 .
D arsapfi rnamasa, sec S acrifice .
Dasa , S lave .
Dasyus , 48 , 49 .
De luge ,1 3 7
-1 3 9 .
Demeter. 66 .
Devi,64 .
D harmalipi , 23 .
D h arma S fi tras , 1 .
D hatar,scc A d ityas .
Dhou l i,23 .
D iana , 2 1 1 .
D ionysu s, 50 .
D iv, 3 1 .
D rav idas, 176 , 177 .
Dru ids , 1 1, 23 .
Drummond ,Prof. , 1 06 .
Dual de ities , 69 .
Dyaus , 3 1 .
D yau Spitar, 3 1 , 3 5 , 3 6 , 109 .
Dyn , 3 1 .
GA NDHA RV A S , 3 0 .
Ganga, r iver and a goddess, 66 .
Garh apatya , see S acrifice .
Gautama , 192 , 195 .
Gayatri , 9 .
G ibbon ,E .
, 23 0 .
Girnar , 23 .
G ladstone , Righ t H on. W . E ., 58 .
God ,United A ryans’ concept of,
3 3 ) 3 4 .
Vedic A ryans’ concept o f, 40 ,
72 , 74 ,80 , 8 1 , 83 , 84 , 85 , 86 , 88 .
2 3 8
Manes , see P itris .
Mandala , see Veda .
Mantra , see Veda .
M anavadharmasatra ,1 .
Manse l,Dean
,86 , 87 , 88 ,
1 02 .
M anu ,1 28 , 1 29 , 1 3 7
-1 3 9 .
M arat tanda,a name o f th e sun ,
43 .
M aru ts , storm god s, 5 1 .
M aurya ,1 5 .
Med itat ion,2 26 , 2 29 .
M egasth enes , 1 5 , 26 , 179 .
Metaphysica l gods, see Gods .
M etempsych osis , 169-17 1 .
M itra,M ith ra, 4 1 .
M o lloch , 2 1 1 .
Mon ism, 73 , 99 , 1 00 ,
1 3 4 , 2 26 .
Monogamy , 149 .
Mono the ism , 99 ,1 00
,108 , 23 1 .
M o togon ,1 1 9 .
M u ir,D r. J . , S anscrit tex ts , quoted ,
3 7 4 ) 3 9 ) 50 3 97 9 1 1 5 7 1 1 6 , 1 24 , 1 27 )
Mul ler,Prof. M ax , quoted, 2 , 3 , 4 ,
1 4 ,1 5 , 1 6 , 1 8 , 26
,27 , 28 ,
3 0 1 3 2 1 3 9 , 40 , 5 1 , 64 1 73 1 80 1 83 ,
M ungh eir , 2 5 .
N A KSH I-I-R U S T R A M,25 .
N anda ,1 2
,1 6 .
N arayana ,1 29 .
N asatyas , see A sv ins .
N earchu s, 26 .
N esh tri , see S ac rificers .
N i t ri t i , 1 4 2 ,143 .
N irfidh apasubandh a , see S acrifi ce .
N itya ,see S acrifice .
N ivita ,2 17 .
Ou R A N os, 3 2 , 3 3 .
O xus , 20 .
PA KA YA J N A ,19 2
-3 .
Paliboth ra ,1 5 .
Pan in i , 15 .
IN DEX .
RAJ A ,k ing.
Rajanya ,see Caste .
R ajasunya ,see S acrifice .
Raksh asas , demons, and aboriginalinh ab itants .
Ramayana ,2 .
Ratus , 29 .
Re l igion , h igh est abstraction o f,
Reve lation ,1 , 6 , 1 7 , 86 , 88 , 104 ,
1 06 , 1 2 1,2 2 1 , 2 23 ,
23 1 , 23 2 .
Panth e ism , 72 , 73 , 1 3 4 , 2 26 .
Parasurama , 10 .
Pariah s , 177.
Parjanya , 48 .
Parmen ides , 13 1 .
Pasu-Pasubhanda , see S acrifice .
Pat ilapu tra ,1 6 .
Pat talene , 179 .
Pau l , 29 , 1 20,1 56 .
Pe lasgians , 86 .
Perkunas, 48 .
Persian (ans), 24 ,25 , 26 , 109 .
Ph i losophy , h igh est abst ru c t ion
Of, 73 7 99 , 1 00)103 '
Ph oenic ia (ns), 2 3 , 24 , 26 .
Ph ysiolatry , 83 .
P ictet , M . de,107.
P itris, 66 .
P lato ,69 , 9 2 ,
1 3 1 , 1 6 1 .
Po l yandry , 150 .
Po lyth e ism , 72 , 1 08 .
Potr i , see S acrificers .
Pra ise ,1 88 , 189 .
Prajapati , Lord of Creature s .
Prasto tri , see S acrific ers .
Prat ih artri , see S acrifice .
Prat iprasthatri , see S acrificers .
Prayer,1 28
,1 89 .
Prisn i , 5 1 .
Pr ith iv i , earth goddess , 66 .
Puranas , 2 .
Puroh ita ,fam i l y priest .
Puru sh a , man, God .
Purush amedh a,h uman-sacrifice ,
198-208 .
Pushan ,God of roads .
IN DEX .
Rh ibhus , th e de ifi ed artisans o f
the gods , 66 .
R ig,sec Veda .
R ish is , bards and pr iests ; authorsof th e hymns,
R i ta ,law , the origin o f th e con
cep t , 1 55-1 57 .
Roth ,Prof. von ,
1 59 , 1 67 .
Rudra , 5 1 .
Rudrasi , sce Goddesses .
SACR IF ICEIts greatness , 190-1 .
C lassification of,1 92 .
D ifferent k inds of, 1 92-209 .
Origin o f, 2 17-2 26 .
Purport of, 209-2 1 1 .
S acrificers , origin of, 2 1 2-2 1 3 .
D ivided into four c lasses, viz .,
A dhvaryus, H o tris,Udgatris,
B rahmans , 2 1 3 .
W ork a l lotted to each c lass ,2 14
-2 1 5 .
Must be blame less, 2 16 .
Purification o f,2 16 .
S acred thread of,2 1 6-2 17 .
Sama Veda ,sce Veda .
S amayach arika Satras, 1 .
S anh itas , 1 , 2 , 3 .
S anyasi , 2 27 .
S arama, 48 .
S arasvati , see Goddesses .
S arvamedh a , sec S acrifice .
S at (ya), 1 3 4 .
S atapath a Brahmana , see Veda .
S at tras , 104 .
S au tramani,148 .
S ayce , Prof. A . H . , 25 .
S avitri , th e sun , see A dityas .
S eers , see Rish is.
S eneca , 65 , 7o ,S ensus numin is, 85 , 88
,89 ,
9 1 .
S h advimsa B rahmana , sce Veda .
S iksha , 1 .
S in , acknow ledged , 1 3 9-1 42 .
Fundamenta l idea of, 142-143 ,1 55 .
T A C IT U S , 86 .
T ait t irya B rahmana,see Veda .
T andya B rahmana , see Veda .
T antras , 2 .
T h at,that one , 7 1 , 8 1 .
T heo logy of th e Veda , 29-1 1 5 .
T u l loch ,Princ ipal , 144 .
T vash tar, divine A rt iz an .
T yrius Max imus , 70 .
U D GA T R I,see S acrificers .
Ukthya , see S acrifice .
Upan ish ad ,see Veda .
Upavita , 2 17 .
U sh as,th e dawn , _
64 , 65 .
V A IKA R T A S , see S acrificers .
Vaisya , sec Caste .
V ajapeya ,see S acrifice .
V ak, 78 .
23 9
S in , Represented as transgressionsof divine laws , 144
-5 .
A bond, or rope , 145 .
A burden ,145 .
A sea , or a flood , 45 .
Imputed ,146 .
Its e ffects, 147 .
A cts not considered sinfu l ,148
-1 53 .
A cts considered sinfu l , 1 531 55 .
S inivali , sec Goddesses .
S kamba , 7 1 .
Smarta Sutras, 1 .
Smriti,1 .
S oma,see H aoma .
S oteriology , 1 88 .
Spencer , H erbert,87 , 89 , 9 3 , 94 .
Sp iri t , see A tman .
S rau ta S I‘
Itras, 1 .
S ru t i , 1 .
S udra , sec Caste .
S unasepha , 199 , 2 1 1 .
S i‘
i rya ,the sun ,
S fi tra ,1 6 , 1 8 .
Svetasvatara Upan ish ad,Veda .
240 I ND EX .
V alakhylya , 9 .
Varana , 3 7 .
Varna ,1 7 1
-172 .
V arunani , see Goddesses .
Varuna ,
E tymo logy and ph ysicalmean ing of, 3 2 , 3 3 .
A ttributes of, 3 7-4 1 , 43 .
A reflection of th e true God,
O ldest h istorical god of th e
undivided A ryans, 3 4
-3 6 .
Moral grandeur of, 3 8 , 40 , 45 .
T he degradation and sup
pression of, 40
-4 1 , 56 , 57 .
Vayu , 58 .
Veda , etymo logy of, 2 .
Denotes four col lections ,S anh itas
,cal led R ig
-Veda ,
Sama-Veda , Yajur-Veda ,and
A th arva-Veda,2, 3 .
E ach Veda divided in M antraand B rahmana ,
B rahmanas contain A ryanakas and Upan ish ads , 4 .
A uth ors of,
1 1,1 2 , 14 .
Inspiration of, 6 4 0 .
A ge of, 1 4-1 8 .
oral ly transm itted , 2 1-26 .
General ch aracter of, 26-28 .
V edadanta,1 3 5 .
Vedangas, 1 .
V ishnu , 5 1 .
V isvadevah , all gods.
V isvakarman , a name for
Creator.
V riad-A ryanaka,sec Veda .
V ritra , 47 .
V yakarana ,1,227 .
Z END AVE STA , 3 3 , 3 6 .
Z eu s pater , 3 1 , 3 5 .
Z io , 3 5 .
Z oroaster,109 ,
1 1 0 .
AB ERDEEN UN IV E RS IT Y PRE S S .
the
W A LL IS , H . W . , quoted ,1 57 .
Weber,Prof. , quoted , 25 , 1 3 9 ,
Wh itney,Prof. D . W .
, quoted , 3 ,5 1 .
W i l l iams, Prof. S ir M .
,quoted ,
1,
62 ,1 1 5 , 1 23 .
W i lson ,Prof . H . H . ,
quoted ,1 0 ,
W i lson ,R ev . D r .
,quoted
,170 .
Writing,wh en and wh ence intro
duced to India , 23-25 .
YA J AMAN A ,2 1 2 .
Yajna ,see S acrifice .
Yajur-Veda , see Veda .
Yama,1 6 1-1 65 .
Yam i , 1 6 1-162 .
Y ima , 162-1 63 .
Yogananda ,1 6 .
2 LON GM A N S or 6 03 5 S T A N D A R D A ND GE N E R A L wore/rs.
H iétory, Poli tics, Polity, Political Memoirs, &c.— continued.
F 1 t; z p a t r i c k .— S ECRET S ERV ICE Gr ev i l l e .
—A JOURNAL O F T H E R E IGNSUND E R P ITT . By W . J . F IT Z PA rR ICK ,
OF K ING GEORGE IV . K ING WILL IAMA u thor of Correspondence of IV .
,A N D Q UEEN VI .CTOR IA By
Daniel O ’
connell ’. 8vo . , 7s. 6d . CHARLES C . F. GREV ILLE , formerlyC lerk '
oi th e Counc i l . 8 vols. GrownF reem an — T H E H ISTOR ICAL GEO 8vo . , 6s. each .
GR APHY OF EUROPE. By EDWARD A .
FREEMAN,D . C .L . ,
LL. D . W ith 65 H ar t .-PRA CT ICA L ESSAYS IN A MER ICAN
Maps. 2 vols. 3 1s. 6d. GOVERNMENT . By A LBERT BUSHNELL .
HART , Ph .D . , &c . Ed i tor of‘ EpochsF rou d e .
— W orks by JAMES A ' FROUDE ’of American H istory , ’ &c &c . Crown
R egiuso
Professor of Modern H istory In8vo . , 6s.
th e UnlverSIty of O xford .
T H E H ISTORY OF ENGLAND , from the H earn .— T H E GOVERNMENT OF E N G
Fall of Wolsey to the Defeat of th e LA N D z its S tructure and its Development
Span ish A rmada.
By W . EDWARD HEARN . 8vo . , 16s.
Popu lar Ed it ion . 1 2 vols. Crown H i stor i c T own s ,— Ed ited by E . A ,
sy o . , 3s. 6d . each . FREEMAN, and R ev. WILL IAM
S ilver Library Ed it ion. 1 2 vo ls.HUNT . M .A . W l th Maps and Plans.
Crown 8vo . , 3 s. 6d. each Crown 8vo ., 3s. 6d . each .
T H E D IVORCE OF CATHER INE OF A R A BR ISTOL BY th e R CV W . HUNTGON : th e S tory as told by th e Imperial CARL ISL‘ E ByMANDELL CRE IGHTON .Ambassadors resident a t the Court of D-D B 15110P Of Peterborough .
H enry VIII. In usum Lotearam .CINQUE PORT s. By MONTAGU B UR
Crown 8vo. , 6s.ROWS .COLCHESTER . By R ev. E ; L . CUTTS.EXETER . By E. A . FREEMAN .
LONDON . By R ev. W . J . LOFT IE .
T H E S PAN ISH STORY OF T H E A RMADA ,and oth er Essays , Historical and
Descriptive . Crown 8vo . , 6s.
OXFORD . By R ev. C . W . B OASE .
T H E ENGL ISH IN IRELAND IN T H E WINCHESTER . By R ev. G. W . K ITEIGHTEENTH CENTURY. 3 vols. Cr.
CHIN,D .D .
8vo . ,1 83 . YORK . By R ev. JAMES R A INE .
SHORT STUD IES ON GREAT SUBJECTS. NEW YORK . ByT H E OD OR E R OOSEVELT .
4 vo ls . Cr. 8vo . , 3s. 6d . each . BOSTON By HENRY CABOTCE SAR : a Sketch . Cr. 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
L ODGE
Gard in er .— ‘
vV orks by SAMUEL_
R AW J oy ec .— A SHORT H IST ORY OF IRELAND
,
SON GARD INER , M .A . , H on. LL. D . , from the Earliest T imes to 1608 . By P .
Ed inburgh . W . JOYCE , LL.D . Crown 8vo . 10s. 6d.
H ISTORY OF ENGLAND , from th e A c
cession of James I. to th e Outbreak o f S
V’ithI
h
D
gfitizzancTymA
ITlfigtlth e C1V11 War , 1° VO15 “
t ions in the T ext , by T . HODGE . 8voCrown 8vo . , 65 . each .
1 53 . net
H ISTORY OF T H E GREAT CIV IL WAR,
1642-1 649 . 4 v .ols Cr. 8vo .
,.6s each .
L eak y_ W01k5 by WILL IAM ?
u DWA R D
H ISTORY OF T H E COMMONWEALTH HARTPOLE LECKYA N D T H E PROTECTORATE , 1649-1660 . H ISTORY OF ENGLAND IN T H E EIGHV ol . I. , I649
-1651 . 8vo . ,2 .1 s T E E N T H CENTURY.
Library Ed it ion . 8 vo ls. 8vo ., £ 7 4s.
Cabinet Ed it ion. ENGLAND . 7 vo ls .
Cr. 8vo . , és. each . IRELAND . 5vols. Crown 8vo .
,6s. each .
H ISTORY OF EUROPEAN MORALS FROMA UGUSTUS T o CHARLEMAGNE. 2
T H E STUDENT S H ISTORYOF ENGLAND,
W ith 378 Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 1 2s.
A lso in T h ree Volumes.
Vol . I. B .C . 55— A .D . 1 509 . W ith 173
Illustrath zl s. Crown SYO . 4s .
V ol . II. 1 500-1680. W ith 06 Illustra
LON GM A N S e= C0.
’
S S T A N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L WOR KS .
H istory, Politics, Polity, Political Memoirs, &c .— continued.
L e ck y .— Works by WILL IAM EDWARD M a cau lay .
— Works by LORD MACHARTPOLE LECKY A ULA Y .
—cont inued .
T H E EMPIRE : its Value and its Growth . MISCELLANEOUS WR ITINGS .A n 1112 11111113 1A ddress del ivered at the Peop le ’
s E d . 1 vol. C r. 8vo . , 4s. 6d .
Imperial Inst i tu te, N 0vember 20 , 1893 ,
under the Presidency of H .R . H . th e Library Ed it ion . 2 vo ls. 8vo . ,2 1s.
Prince ofWales. Crown 8v0 . 1s. 6d . SELECT IONS FROM T H E WR ITINGS O FLORD MACAULAY . Ed ited ,
wi thM a cau lay .
—Works by LORD M A C O ccasiona l N o tes , by th e R igh t H on.
A ULA Y . S ir G . O . T revelyan , Bart . CrownCOMPLETE WORKS . 8v0 . . 65 .
Cabine t E d . 1 6 vols. Pt . 8vo . £ 4 1 6s.
M ay .—T H E CONST ITUTIONAL H IS roR YLibrary Ed i t ion. 8 VOIS ‘ 8V0 ” £ 5 52” O F ENGLAND since the Accession of
H ISTORY OF ENGLAND FROM T H E A c George III. 1 760-1 870 . By S ir TH OMASCESS ION O F JAMES T H E S ECOND . ERSK INE MAY
, K .C . B . (Lord FarnPopular Ed i t ion . 2 vols.
gr. 8vo . , 5s.
13010118111 3 V015 . Crown 8V0-r 1 85 .
S tudent’s Ed i t ion . 2 vols. r. 8vo . , 1 2s.
People ’
s Ed i t ion. 4 vols. Cr. 8vo 16s.
M er 1vale .—Works by the Very R ev.
Cabine t Ed i t ion. 8 vols. Pt. 8vo . , 48s.
CHARLES MER IVALE' 16116 Dean °1E1Y
Library Ed it ion. 5 vols. 8vo . , £ 4 .H ISTORY OF T H E R OMANS UNDER T H EEMP IRE .
CR IT ICAL A N D H ISTOR ICAL E 55 2 1“, Cabine t Ed ition . 8 vols. Cr. 8vo . , 48s.W ITH LAYS OF A NC IENT R OME , 111 1 S i lver Library Ed it ion. 8 vols. Cr.volume . 8vo . , 3s. 6d . each .
120111113 1 E dl tl on ;Crown 8170 25 64
'
T H E FALL OF T H E R OMAN R EPUBL ICA u tho
ddsed 15111
6
1
29 11
.
lt
C
EOWD 8vo. , a Short H istory of th e Last Century
2s. or 3 5 .
3 . g1 e ges.
of th e Common e 1th . d.
S i lver Library Ed i t ion. Crown 8vo . ,
w a 1 2mo 7s 6
3 5 ° 662 M on tague— T H E ELEMENTS O F E N G
CR IT ICAL A N D H ISTOR ICAL ESSAYS . “ 511 CONST ITUT IONAL H ISTORY. fromS tudent’s Ed it ion . 1 vol . Cr. 8vo . , 6s.
th e 13 3 1116 5 1 T ime 10 the Present D ay.
Peop le ’
s Ed i t ion. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. , 8s. 51, I
géic ' MONTAGUE 'M °A ' Crown 8V°
T revelyan Ed it ion. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo . , 9s.
Cabinet Ed it ion . 4 vols. Post 8vo . , 24s. O’B r i en .
— I'
RISH IDEAS.Library Ed it ion. 3 vo ls. 8vo . , 3os. A DDRESSES.R E P111111 13 13
By WILL IAM O'BR IEN
,
ESSAYS wh ich may be had separately , I M ~P C13 8170 25 60'
rice 6d . each sewed , I S . each c loth .p P rend ergast .— IRELA ND FROM T H E
A ddison and Wal Lord Cl ive. R ESTORAT ION T o T H E R EVOLUT ION,
pole . T he Earl of Chat 1660-1690 . By J OH N P . PRENDERGAST,
Frederick the Great . ham(T wo Essays). A uthor of T h e Cromwel l ian S et tlement
Lord Bacon. Ranke and Glad in Ireland 8vo . , 55 .
1
Croker’
s Boswel l’s Stone.
Johnson . M i lton and Mach ia S eeb ohm .— T HE ENGL ISH VILLAGE
Hallam’s Constitu vell i . COMMUN ITY Examined in its Relat ions
tional H istory. Lord Byron,and T h e to the Manorial and T ribal Systems , &c .
Warren Hastings Comic Dramat ists BYF R E D E R IC S E E BOH M . W l th 1 3 Maps
(3 611 swd . , 6d. of th e Restorat ion.and Plates
.
8V0 . . 165 .
MISCELLANEOUS WR IT INGS ‘
A N DS h arpe °
_ L0N D.
ON A N D 1f11E K 1N GDOM
S PEECHES . a H istory derived mainly from the
A rch ives at Gu i ldhal l in th e custody ofPopu lar Ed ition. Cr. 8vo . , 25 ° 6d‘ the Corpora t ion of the C ity of London.
Cabinet Ed it ion. Includ ing Ind ian By R EG INALD R . SHARPE , R e
4 LON GM A N S 61° C0 .
’S S TA N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L WOR K S .
H istory , Poli tics, Pol ity , Political Memoirs, &c.— continued.
S h e p p a r d . MEMOR IALS OF ST .
J AMEs’
S PALACE . By the R ev.
EDGAR SHEPPARD , M .A . , Sub-Dean ofth e Ch apels Roya l. W ith 4 1 Plates and3 2 Illustrat ions in th e T ext. 2 Vols.
8vo , 3 és . ne t .
Sm ith .— CARTHAGE A N D T H E CA R T H A
GIN IA N S . By R . BOSWORTH SM ITH ,M .A . , A ssistant Master in HarrowS choo l . W ith Maps, Plans , &c . Cr.8vo . , 3s. 6d .
S tep h en s .— A H ISTORY OFTHE FRENCH
R EVOLUT ION . By H . MORSE STEPHENS ,Ball io l Col lege , Oxford . 3 vo ls. 8VO .
Vols . I . and I I . 1 8s. each .
S tubbs .— H ISTORY OF THE UN IVERS ITY
OF D UBL IN , from its Foundat ion to th e
E nd o f th e Eigh teenth Century. By J .W . STUBBS. 8vo . , 1 2s. 6d.
S u t h e r l a n d — T H E
A USTRAL IA AND N EW Z EALAND , from1606 to 1 890 . By A LEXANDER SUTHERLAND
,M .A . , and GEORGE SUTHER
LAND , M .A . Crown 8vo . , 2s. 6d.
H ISTORY OF
T odd.— PARL IAMENTARYGOVERNMENT
IN THE BR IT ISH COLON IES. ByA LPH E UsTODD , LL.D . 8vo . , 3os . net .
W ak eman and H assa11.— ESSAYSINTRODUCTORY TO THE STUDY OFENGL ISH CONST ITUT IONAL H ISTORY.Ed ited by HENRY OFFLEY VVA KE MA N ,
M .A . , and A RTHUR H A SSA LI M .A .
Crown 8vo . , 6s.
W a lp ole .— Works by S PENCER WAL
POLE .
H ISTORY OF ENGLAND FROM THE CONCLUS ION OF THE GREAT WAR IN
1 8 1 5 TO 1 858 . 6 vols. Cr. 8vo. , 6s. each .
THE LAND OF HOME R ULE : be ing an
A ccount Of the H istory and Institu
t ions of th e Isle ofM an . Cr. 8vo . , és.
W y lie.— H ISTORY OF ENGLAND UNDER
HENRY IV. By JAMES HAM ILTONWYL IE , M .A one of H . M . Inspectors
of S ch ools. 3 vols. Crown 8vo . V ol .
I. , 1 3 99-1404 , 1os. 6i . V ol. I I . 1 5s .
V ol. I I I . [In preparaz‘z'
ozz .
B iography , Persona l Memoirs, &c.
A rm strong— T H E LIFE AND LETTERS
OF EDMUND J . A RMSTRONG. Ed itedby G. F. A RMSTRONG. F cp . 8v0 . 7s. 6d.
B a C O D .— LETTERS AND LIFE OF
FRANC IS BA CON , INCLUD ING ALL H I SOCCAS IONAL WORKS . Ed ited by J .S PE D D IN G. 7 vo ls. 8vo. , £ 4 45 .
Bageh ot.— B IOGRAPH ICAL STUD IES .By WALTER B A GE IIOT . 8v0 1 2s.
Boy d.— TWENTY-F IVE YEARS OF ST .
A NDREWS , 1 865-1 890 . B y A . K . H .
BOYD . D .D . ,LL .D . , A uthor of Recrea
t ions of a Country Parson ,
’&c .
~ 2 vols.
I 8vo . V ol . I 1 2 5 . Vol. 1 5s.
C ar ly l e .— T HOM A S CARLYLE : a H istory
of h is Life. By . J . A . FROUDE .
179 3—1 835. 2 vo ls. Crown 8vo . , 7s.
1 834-1 88 1 . 2 vo ls. Crown 8vo . , 7s.
E r a sm u s .— LIFE A N D LETTERS OF
ERASMUS aseries of Lectures del iveredatOxfOI
‘
d. B yJAM E S A NTHONYFROUDE .Crown 8v0 . (is .
F abert. —A BRAHAM FABERT Governor
F OX .— THE EARLYH ISTORYOF CHARLE
jA ME s F OX . By th e R igh t H on. S ir G .
O . TREVELYAN , Bart.Library Ed it ion .
Cabinet Ed it ion.
8vo 1 83 .
Crown 8vo . , 6s.
Granv i l l e .-T H E LETTERS OF HARR IE
COUNTESS GRANV IL LE , 18 10-1 845Ed ited by h er Son , the H on. F. LEVESON GOWER ; 2 vols. 8vo .
, 3 2s.
H am i l ton — LIFE OF S IR W ILLIA L
HAM ILTON . By R . P . GRAVES . 3 vols15s. each . A DDENDUM. 8vo . ,
6d. sewed
H av elock .— MEMO IRS OF S IR H E N R
HAVELOCK,K .G. B . By JOH N C LA R
MARSHMAN . Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
M acau l ay .—T H E LIFE AND LETTER
OF LORD MACAULAY. By th e R ighH on . S ir G . O . TREVELYAN , Bart.Popu lar Ed it ion. I VOI. Cr . 8vo .
,2s . 6d
Student’s Ed ition. I VOI. Cr. 8v0 6s.
6 LON GM A N S CO.
’
S S T A N D A RD A N D GEN E R A L WOR K S .
h am ! and Adventure, the Colonies, &c.— continued.
B ra ssey .— Works by the late LADY
BRASSEY— cont irzued.
SUNSH INE A N D STORM IN T H E EAST.
Library Ed i t ion . W i th 2 Maps and
141 Illustrat ions. 8vo . ,2 1s.
Cabinet Ed it ion. W ith 2 Maps and
1 14 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d .
Popu lar Ed it ion . W ith 103 Il lustrat ions. 4 to . , 6d. sewed , I S . c loth .
IN T H E TRADES , T H E TROPICS, A N D
T H E R OAR ING F ORT IE sCabinet Ed i tion. W i th M ap and 2 20
Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
Popu lar Ed it ion. W i th 1 83 Illustrat ions. 4to . , 6d. sewed ,
1 s. c loth .
THREE VOYAGES IN T H E SUNBEAMPopu lar Ed it ion. 346 Illustrat ions.
4 to . ,2 s. 6d.
B ry d en .—KLOOF A N D K AROO : Sport ,
Legend , and N atura l H istory in CapeColony . By H . A . BRYDEN . 17 Illustrat ions. 8vo . , 5s.
F rou d e .— Works by JAMES A . FROUDE .
OCEANA or England and h er Colonies.
W ith 9 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo
2s. boards , 2s. 6d . c loth .
T H E ENGL ISH IN T H E WEST IND IESor the B ow of U lysses. W ith 9 Illustrations. Cr. 8vo . , 2s. bds. , 2s. 6d. cl.
H ow ard -L IFE W ITH TRANS-S IBER IANS AVAGES. By B. D OUGLAS HOWARD
,
M .A . Crown 8vo és.
H ow i t t .-VISIT S T O R EMARKABLE
PLACES , Old Halls , Bat tle-Fields,S cenes i llustra t ive of S triking Passagesin Engl ish H istory and Poetry. ByWILL IAM HOW ITT. W ith 80 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
K n igh t .— W’
orks by E. F. K N IGHT .
T H E CRU ISE OF T H E‘A LERTE ’
: the
N arrative o f a S earch for T reasure on
th e Desert Island of T rin idad . 2 Maps
and 2 3 Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 3 s.
'
6d.
WHERE THREE EMPIRESMEET : a N ar
rat ive of Recent T ravel in Kashmir,
W estern T ibet , Balt istan ,Ladak ,
G i lgit , and the adjo in ing Countries.
W i th a M ap and 54 Il lustrat ions.
Cr. 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
L e e s and Clu t te rb u ck .— B . C . 1 887
A R AMBLE IN BR IT ISH COLUMB IA . ByA I n n s a n d W (
“I -I rfr
'r n‘ n nn
M on t agu e .— T A LES OF A NOMAD ; Or,
Sport and Strife . By CHARLES MONTAGUE . Crown 8vo . ,
65 .
M u rdoCh .— FROM ED INBURGH T o T H E
A NTARCT IC : A n A rtist ’s N otes and
Ske tches during the Dundee A ntarct icExped it ion of 1 892
-93 . ByW . G . BURN
M UR D r’
iCH . W i th a Chap ter by W .
S . BRUCE , N aturalist O f the Barque ,Balaena ”
. W i th 2 Maps . 8vo . , 18s .
N an sen .—Works by D r.
NANSEN .
T H E FIRST CROSS ING OF GREENLAND .
W ith numerous Illustrat ions and a
M ap . Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
ESK IMO LIFE . T ranslated byWILL IAMA RCHER . W ith 3 1 Illustrat ions. 8vo . ,
1 6s.
P eary— M Y A RCT IC JOURNAL : a Year
among Ice-Fields and Esk imos. By
JOSEPH INE D IEB ITSCH-PEARY . W ith1 9 Plates , 3 Sketch Maps , and 44Illustrat ions in the T ext . 8vo. 1 2s.
R ock h i l l . —T HE LAND OF T H E LAMASN otes of a Journey through Ch ina . Mon
gol ia , and T ibet . By WILL IAMWOODV ILLE R OCKH ILL. W i th 2 Maps and
6 1 Illustrat ions. 8vo . ,15s.
FR IDTJOF
S m i t h .-CL IMB ING IN T H E BR IT ISH
I SLES . By W . P. HASKETT SM ITH.
W ith Illustrat ions by ELL IS CARR .Part I. ENGLAND . F cp . 8vo . , 3 s. 6d.
Part II. WALES. [In p ; eparafi on.
Part I I I . S COTLAND . [172preparazz’
un .
S t ep h en . T H E PLAYGROUND OF
EUROPE . By LESLIE STEPHEN , formerlyPresident o f the A lp ine C lub . N ew
E dition ,.with A dd it ions and 4 Illustra
t ions. Crown 8vo . , 65 . net .
THR EE IN NORWA Y .
T hem.
t ions.
By T wo of
W i th a M ap and 59 IllustraCr. 8vo . , 2s. boards , 2s. 6d. c lo th .
‘
V on H ohn e l .— D ISCOVERY OF LAKESR UDOLF A N D STEFANIE A N arrat ive ofCount SAMUEL T E LE K I
‘
S Exp loringand Hunt ing Exped i t ion in EasternEquatoria l A frica in 1 887 and 1 888 . ByLieu tenant LUDW IG V ON H OH N EL .
W i th 179 Illustrations a nd 5 Maps. 2
vols. 8vo . , 42s.
W h i sh aW .— OUT OF D OORS IN TSAR
Y A N h ' a n p nn r d n f f la p n o n n rl
LO.
"
OM A N S . (94 C0.
’
S S T A N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L WOR KS .
Sport and Past ime.
THE BADMINTON LIBRARY .
Ed ited by the D UKE OF BEAUFOR T , K .G. ,
A R CHER Y . By C . J . LONGMAN and
C01. H . W A L
yRON D . W ith Contribu
‘
t ions by M iss LEGH and ViscountD ILLON . W ith 195 Illustrations.
Crown 8vo . , 10s. 6d.
ATHLET ICS A N D FOOTBALL . ByMONTAGUE SHEARMAN . W i th 5 1
Illlustrat ions. Crown 8vo 1 os. 6d .
B IG GAME SHOOT ING. By C . PH ILL I PPS-WOLLEY
,F. C . SELOUS , ST .
GEORGE L IT T LE D A LE , &c . W ith 150
Illustrations . 2 vols . , 10s. 6d. each .
BOA T ING. ByW . B. WOODGATE . W ithan Introduc t ion by the R ev. EDMONDWARRE , D .D . , and aChapter on R ow
ing at Eton ,
’ by R . HARVEY MASON .
W i th 49 Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 1 0s. 6d.
COUR S ING A N D FA LCONR Y . ByHARD ING Cox and the H on. GERALDLASCELLES . W ith 76 Illustrat ions.
Crown 8vo . , 1os. 6d .
CR ICK ET . By A . G . STEEL and the H on .
R . H . LYTTELTON . W ith Contribu
t ions by A NDREW LANG , R . A . H . MITCHELL
,W . G . GRACE , and F . GALE .
W ith 64 Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 1os. 6d .
CYCL ING. By VISCOUNT BURY (Earlof A lbemarle), K .C .M .G and G .
LACY H ILL IER . W ith 89 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo. ,
1os. 6d.
D R IV ING. By th e D UKE OF BEAUFORT.
W ith 65 Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . ,1os. 6d.
FENC ING , BOX ING . A N D WR ESTL ING. By WALTER H . POLLOCK , F .
C .GROVE . C. PREVOST , E . B .MITCHELL,
and WALTER A RMSTRONG. W i th 42Illustrations. Crown 8vo. , 1 os. 6d.
FISHING . By H . CHOLMONDELEY-PENNELL . W i th Contributions by th e
MARQU IS OF EXETER , HENRY R .
FRANC IS , Major JOHN P. TRAHERNE,
G . C HR ISTOPHER D AV IES , R . B . MARSTON , &c .
V ol . I. Salmon , T rout, and Grayling.
W ith 1 58 Il lustrations. Crown 8vo .,
1 0s. 651.
V ol . II. P ike '
and other Coarse Fish .
W ith 1 3 3 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . ,
1os. 6d .
GOLF . By JHORA CE G . HUTCH INSON,
the Rt. H on. A . J . BALFOUR , M .P . ,
S irW . G . S IMPSON , Bart. , LORDWELLWOOD , H . S . C. EVE RARD
, A NDREWI . A l\l (1 saa n t h p r
‘ W r i f p r c W I B Q
assisted by A LFRED E . T . WATSON .HUNT ING . By the D UKE OF BEAUFORTK .G . , and MOWBRAY MORR IS . W it l
Contribut ions by th e EARL OF S UI
FOLK A N D BERKSH IRE,R ev. E . W . L
D AV IES , D IGBY COLL INS , and A LEREIE . T . WATSON . W ith 53 Illustrat ions,
Crown 8vo . , 1os. 6d.
MOU NTA INEER ING . By C . T . D EN TS ir F. POLLOCK , Bart . ,W . M . CONWAYD OUGLAS F R E SH F IELD , C . E . M A
THEWS , &c . W ith 1 08 Illustrat ions.
Crown 8vo . ,10s. 6d.
RA C ING A N D STEEPLE-CHA S INGBy th e EARL OF SUFFOLK A N D BERKSH IRE , W . G . CRAVE N , A R T H UF
COVENTRY , &c . W ith 58 Illustrat ions.
Crown 8vo . , 1os. 6d.
R ID ING A N D POLO . By Capta i tR OBERT WE IR
, J . MORAY BROWN , theD UKE OF BEAUFORT ,
K .G the E A R
of SUFFOLK A N D BERKSH IRE , &c . W ith59 Illustrations. Cr. 8vo . , 1 os. 6d .
SHOOT ING. By LordWALS INGHAM anc‘S ir R ALPH PAYNE-GA LLWEY ,
Bart .
W ith Contributions by LORD LOVAT ,
LORD C . L. K ERR , th e H on. G . LA S
CELLES,and A . J . STUART-WORTLEY .
V ol . I. F ie ld and Covert . W i th 10
Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 1os. 6a’
.
V ol . II. Moor and Marsh . W i th 6 :
Illustrat ions. Cr ; 8vo . , 105 . 6d.
SKA T ING , CUR L ING , TOBOGAN ING , A N D OTHER ICE S PORTS .
By J . M . HEATHCOTE,C . G . T E B B UT T ,
T . MAXWELL WITHAM , the R ev. JOHNK ERR , ORMOND HAKE , and Co lonelBUCK W ith 284 Illustrat ions. Crown8vo . , 1os. 6d .
SW IMM ING. By A RCH IBALD S INCLA IRand WILL IAM HENRY. W i th 1 19 Illustrations. Cr. 8vo . , 1 05 . 6d.
TENN IS , LAWN TEN N IS , RA -C
Q UET S , A N D F IVES . By !. M . and
C . G . HEATHCOTE , E . O . PLEYDELLBOUVER IE and A . C . A INGER . W i thContribu t ions by th e H on. A . LYT T E L
TON ,W . C . MARSHALL , M iss L . D OD ,
&c . W i th 79 Illustrat ions. C . 8vo . ,1os. 6d .
YA CHTING .
V ol. I. Cru ising, Construc t ion , Rac ing,
R ules,F itting
-Ou t , &c . ByS ir EDWARDSULL IVAN
,Bart . , LORD BRASSEY ,
C . E . S ETH-SM ITH , C .B . , &c .
W ith 1 14 Illust . Cr. 8vo . , 1os. 6d.
V ol. II. Yach t C lubs Yachting inA merica and th e Co lonies , Yacht R acing , &c . By R . T . PR ITCHETT
,the
b 1 111 6—
6 0 75
F U R A N D F E A T H E R S E R IE S .
Ed ited by A . E . T . WATSON .
T H E PA RTR IDGE. N atural H isto ry , T H E GROUSE . N atural H istory by theby the R ev. H . A . MACPHERSON ; R ev. H . A . MACPHERSON ; Shoo t ing,
S hoot ing, by A . J . STUART-WORTLEY ; by A . J . STUART-WORTLEY ; Cookery ,Cookery , by GEORGE SA INTSBURY. by GEORGE SA INTSBURY . W ith 1 3W ith 1 1 fu ll-page Illustrat ions and Illustrat ions by J . STUART-WORTLEYVignette by A . THORBURN , A . J . and A . THORBURN , and various D ia
STUART-WORTLEY , and C . WHYMPER , grams in th e T ext. Crown 8vo . , 5s.
and 1 5 Diagrams in the T es t by A . J . T H E HA R E A N D T H E RA BB IT . BySTUART-WORTLEY. Crown 8vo .
, 55 . the H on . GERALD LASCELLES , &c .
[In prepara tion .
WILD FOWL . By th e H on . JOH N S COTT T H E PHEA SA NT . By A . l . STUARTMONTAGU , M . P . &c . Illustrated by A . WORTLEY , the R ev. H . A .MACPHERSON ,J . STUART WORTLEY , A . THORBURN , and A . J . INNES SHAND .
and Others. [In prepara tion . [In preparation .
C amp b el l-W a lk er .— T H E CORRECT L o n gm a n .
-CHESS OPEN INGS. ByCARD : or , H ow to Play at W h ist ; a FRED .W . LONGMAN . F cp . 8vo . , 2s. 6d.
Wh ist Catech ism.By Major A . CAMP M a sk e lyn e .
— SHA RPS A N D FLATS : a
BELL-WALKER , F cp. 8vo . , Comp lete Revelat ion of th e Secretsi
ol
2s. 6d.Ch eat ing at Games o f Chance and Skill .
D EAD SHOT (THE): or, Sportsman’s By JOHN NEV IL MASKELYNE . of the
Comp lete Gu ide . Be ing a T reatise on Egyptian Hall . W l th 62 Illustrations.
the U se of the Gun , wit h Rud imentary Crown 8V0 65 .
and F inish ing Lessons on th e A rt of P ay ne-Ga l lw ey .— W orks by Sn
Shoot ing Game of all kinds , also R ALPH PAYNE-GA LLWEY . Bart.Game Dr iving, W i ld-F owl and P igeon LETTERS T O YOUNG SHOOTERS (F IYS‘Shoot ing,
D og Breaking, etc . By S eries)..
On th e Choice and U se Of
MA R K SMA N . Crown 8vo . , 103 , 6d.
Gun. Wi th 4 1 Illustrat ions. Cr . 8vo .
a’
-GAM E S , A N CIE N T A N D OR I75 6
ENkTiIf
er
A N D HOW T o PLAY THEM LE T T E R S T O YOUNG SHOOTERS . (S econBy EDWARD FA LKE N E R W ith nume
S eries). On the Product ion , Preservation , and K illingof Game. W ith D irec
221
35 Photographs, D iagrams, &c . 8vo. ,
t ions in Shoot ing Wood-Pigeons an
Breaking-in Retrievers. W ith a Por
F ord — T H E THEORY A N D PRACT ICE OF tra it of th e A u thor , and 103 IllustraA RCHERY. B Y HORACE FORD . N ew
t ions. Crown 8vo . , 1 25 . 6d.
Ed ition ,th orough ly Revised and R e
P ole .— T H E THEORY OF T H E MODER
written byW . BUTT , M .A . W ith a Pre S C IENT IFIC GAME OF VV H IST B Wface by C J LONGMAN , M °A ~ 8V0 " I45 ° POLE
,F. R .S . Fcp . 8vo . ,
2s. 6a'.y
F ow l e r 03 0 1113 P roc t or . Works by R . A . PROCTORCOUNTRY LIFE
,S oc laI, Poli t ica l , S port H OW T O PLAY WH IST : W ITH T H
ing »aD d A gfi cu1tura1 BYI K FOWLER LAWS A N D ET IQUETTE OF /WH IST
Rust icus formerly of A ylesbury. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d,
W i th Portra it and 10 Illustrat ions. 8vo . , HOMEWH I ST : an Easy Guide to Cor1 os. 6d. rect Play. 16mo . , Is.
F ran c i s.— A BOOK ON A NGL ING : or , R onald s.
—T H E FLY-FISHER ’S ENTOT reat ise on th e A rt of F ish ing in every MOLOGY . By A LFRED R ONALDS . W itBranch ; inc lud ing fu ll Il lustrated List coloured Representations of th e N atura
of Salmon Flies.By FRANC IS FRANC IS. and A rt ific ial Insect . W ith 20 Coloure
W ith Portra i t and Coloured Plates. Cr. Plates. 8vo . , 14s.
8vo . , 1ss .W i l cock s . T H E S E A FI SHERMAN Corn
H aw k e r .— T H E D IARY OF COLONEL prising the Ch ief Methods of Hook an
PETER HAWKER, au thor of “ Instruc Line F ish ing in the Bri t ish and othe
t ions to Young Sportsmen”
. W ith an S eas , an Remarks on N e ts , Boats, anIntroduct ion by S ir R ALPH PAYNE Boat ing. y!. C .W ILCOCKS . IllustratedGA LLWEY ,
Bart . 2 vols. 8vo . , 32s. Crown 8vo . ,6s.
Menta l , Moral and Political PhilosophyH earn .
—T H E A RYAN HOUSEHOLD : its L add .— Works by G. T . L
S trucmre.
and “5 D evelopment.
A“ PSYCHOLOGY , D ESCR I PT IVE AND‘
ExIntroduc ti on to Comparat ive Jurispru PLA N A T ORY : a T reatise of the Ph enodence . BY W EDWARD HEARN ' mena , Laws, and Development ofSYO 1 65 Human Mental Life . 8vo . , 2 1 5 .
— Works Dy S H A DWOR T H H ‘
L ew es .— T H E H IST ORY OF PH ILOSOPHY ,from T hales to Comte . By GEORGE
TIME A N D S PACE : a Metaphysical HENRY LEWES . 2 vols. 8vo . , 3 25 .
Essay. 8vo . , 16s.
THE THEORY OF PRACT ICE an Eth ical M ax M u l l en — Works by F : M A X M UL
LER .
Inqu i ry. 2 vols. 8vo . , 245 .
T S T 8HE GIENGE OF HOU H vT H E PH ILOSOPHY OF R EFLECT ION . 2
G T O 2”
vo ls. 8vo . , 2 1 3 .
THREE INTRODUCTORY LECTURES ONTHE S C IENCE OF THOUGHT. 8v0
H um e — T H E PH ILOSOPH ICAL WORKS 23 , 6d .
OF D AV ID HUME . Ed ited by T . H .
GREEN and T H -GROSE 4 VOIS 8V0 M ill.— A NALYS IS OF THE PHENOMENA5és. Or separately , Essays. 2 vols. OF THE HUMAN MIND , By JAMES28s. T reat ise of Human N ature. 2 MILL . 2 vols. 8vo . , 285 ,
vols. 2 85 .
J h t A SM i lI. -Works by JOHN STUART MILL.
0 u s on e . HORT INTRODUCT IONT o T H E S TUDY OF LOG IC. By LA U _
A SYSTEM OF LOGIC. Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d .
RENCE JOHNSTONE . W ith Q uest ions. ON LIBERTY. Cr , 8vo l s. 4d.
Cr. 8vo . , 2s. 6d.
ON R EPRESENTAT IVE GOVERNMENT .
J on e s.—A N INTRODUCT ION TO GENE Crown 8vo . ,
2 3 ,
RAL LOGIC. By E. E. CONSTANCEJONES. Cr. gw ” 6d .
UT IL ITAR IAN ISM. 8vo . , 5s.
J u st in ian — T H E INST ITUTES OF JUs E X A M IN A T IOI‘I OF S IR WILL IAM
T IN IAN : Lat in T ext, ch iefly that Of H A M ILT ON S PH ILOSOPH Y 8V0
u1 65
Huschke , with Engl ish Introduction , NA T UR E ,
‘
T H E UT IL ITY OF R EL IG ION ,TfigfligE
’
gfiifisd
fin fi 1231 AND THE ISM . T hree Essays. 8vo . ,
K an t .— Works by IMMANUEL K ANT.
M onck .— INTRODUCT ION T o LOGIC.
By W . H . S . MONCK . Crown 8vo . , 5s.
CR IT IQUE OF PRACT ICAL R EASON,AND
OTHER WORKS ON THE THEORY OFETH ICS. T ranslated byT . K . A BBOTT ,B .D . W i th Memo ir. 8vo . , 1 2 5 . 6d.
INTRODUCT ION TO LOG IC , AND H I SESSAY ON THE MISTAKEN SUBT ILTY S tO Ck .
— D EDUCT IVE LOG IC. By ST .
OF THE FOUR FIGURES. T ranslated GEORGE STOCK . F cp . 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
by T . K . A BBOTT ,and with N otes by
S id i ck .— D IST INCT ION and the
Critic ism of Be lief. By A LFRED S IDOW ICK. Crown 8vo 65 .
S . T . COLER IDGE . 8vo . , 65 . S u l ly .— Works by JAMES SULLY.
K illick .— HANDBOOK TO MILL’S SYS THE HUMAN MIND : a T ext-book 0!
T EM OF LOGIC. By R ev. A . H . K IL Psychology . 2 vols. 8vo . , 2 15 ,
L ICK ,M .A . Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
L a dd .— Works by GEORGE TURNBULL
LADD .
THE TEACHER’S HANDBOOK OF PSYELEMENTS OF PHYS IOLOG ICAL PSY
CH OLOGY ' Crown 8m " 55 °
CH OLOGY ' 8m " 2 1 5 .
Sw inbu rne.-P ICTURE LOG IC an
OUTL INES OF PHYS IOLOG ICAL PSY A ttempt to Popu larise the S c ience o i
CH OLOGY . A T ext-Book of M ntal Reasoning. By A LFRED JAMES SWIN
S c ience for A cademics and Colleges. BURNE,M .A . W ith 2 3 Woodcuts.
8vo . , 1 2s. Post 8vo . , 5s.
OUTL INES OF PSYCHOLOGY. 8vo . , 95 .
LON GM A N S Gr“ CO.
’
S S T A N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L IfVOR K S . I I
Mental , Mora l and Politica l Ph ilosophy— continued.
T h om SOH .—~OUTL INES OF T H E NE CE S
SARY LAWS OF THOUGHT : a T reat iseon Pure and A pp l ied Logic . By W IL
LIAM THOMSON , D .D . , formerly LordArchbishop of York. Post 8vo 6s.
W ebb .—T H E VE IL OF I S IS : a Series of
Essays on Idealism. By T. E. WEBB .
8vo 105 . 6d.
W h a te ly .— Works by R . WHATELY ,
D .D .
BACON ’S ESSAYS .By R . WHATELY. 8vo . , 1 05 . 6d.
ELEMENTS OF LOG IC. Cr. 8vo . , 4s. 6d.
ELEMENTS OF R HETOR IC. Cr. 8vo. ,
4s. 6d.
LESSONS ON R EASON ING.
1 5 . 6d.
W i th A nno tat ion.
F cp . 8vo . ,
Z e l ler .— Works by D r. EDWARD Z E L
LER,Professor in the U nivers i ty of
Berl in.
THE STO ICS , EPICUREANS , AND SCE PT ICS . T ranslated by the R ev. O . J .R E ICHEL
,M .A . Crown 8vo . ,
1 5s.
OUTLINES OF THE H ISTORY OF GREEKPH ILOSOPHY. T ranslated by S ARAHF. A LLEYNE and EVELYN A BBOTT .
Crown 8vo . ,105 . 6d.
PLATO AND THE OLDER A CADEMY.T ranslated by S ARAH F. A LLEYNEand A LFRED GOODW IN , B .A . Crown8vo . ,
1 85 .
SOCR ATES AND THE SOCR A T ICSCH OOLS .
T ranslated by th e R ev. 0 . J . R E ICHEL ,M .A . Crown 8vo . ,
1 05 . 6d.
MA N UA LS OF CA T H OLIC PH ILOSOPH Y.
{S tony/ta rs! S eries.
A MANUAL OF POL IT ICAL ECONOMY.
By C . S . D EVAS , M .A . Cr. 8vo . , 6s. 6d.
FIRST PR INC IPLES OF K NOWLEDGE . ByJOHN R ICKABY , Crown 8vo. , 55 .
GENERALMETAPHYS ICS. ByJ OH N R ICKABY , S .J . Crown 8vo . , 55 .
LOG IC. By R ICHARD F . CLARKE , S .J .
Crown 8vo. , 55 .
MORAL PH ILOSOPHY (ETH ICS AND NATURAL LAW). By JOSEPH R ICKABY , S . J .
Crown 8vo . , 55 .
NATURAL THEOLOGY. By BERNARDB OE D D E R
, S .J . Crown 8vo .,6s. 6d.
PSYCHOLOGY. By MICHAEL MAHER ,S .J . Crown 8vo . , 6s. 6d.
H istory and Science of Language, &c.
D av idson.-LE A D IN G A N D IMPORT A N T
ENGL ISH WORDS : Exp la ined and E x
emplified . By WILL IAM L . D AV IDSON
,M .A . F cp . 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
F arrar.—LANGUAGE AND LANGUAGES .
By F. W . FARRAR , D .D . ,F.R .S . , Cr.
8vo . ,65 .
Grah am .— ENGL I SH SYNONYMS , Classi
fied and Exp lained : wi th Pract icalExerc ises. By G. F. GRAHAM . F cp .
8vo. , 6s.
M ax M ii l ler . Works by F. M A x
MULLER .T H E S C IENCE OF LANGUAGE , Foundedon Lectures del ivered at the RoyalInst itut ion in 1 86 1 and 1 863 . 2 vo ls.
Crown 8vo . 2 15 .
R IO C R A P I—I IFI‘
Q m : W n nn s A N D T H E .
M ax M ii l ler .— Works by F. M A X
MULLER— continued .
THREE LECTURES ON THE SC IENCEOF LANGUAGE
,AND ITS PLACE IN
GENERAL EDUCAT ION , del ivered atOxford , 1 889 . Crown 8vo . , 3s.
R oge t . THESAURUS OF ENGL ISHWORDS A N D PHRASES . Classified and
A rranged so as to Fac i l itate the E x
pression of Ideas and assist in LiteraryComposition. By PETER MARK ROGET ,M .D F . R .S . Recomposed throughout ,enlarged and improved , partly from the
A uthor’s N otes , and with a fu ll Index ,by the A uthor
’
s Son , JOHN LEW ISR OGET. Crown 8vo 10s. 6d.
A N D THEORY. By W . J . A SHLEY ,M .A . Crown 8vo . ,
Part I. , 5s. Par tI I . , 1 05 . 6d.
Bageh ot.— ECONOM IC STUD IES. ByWALTER BAGEHOT . 8vo . , 103 . 6d.
Barnett.— PRACT ICABLE SOC IAL ISMEssays on S oc ial Reform . By th e R ev.
S . A . and M rs. BARNETT.
” Cr. 8vo 65 .
B ra ssey .— PA PERS A N D A DDRESSES O N
WORK A N D WAGES . By Lord BRASSEY.Ed i ted by J . POTTER , and wi th Intro
duct ion by GEORGE HOWELL,M . P .
Crown 8vo . ,
D ev a s .—A MANUAL OF POL IT ICAL
ECONOMY. By C . S . D EVAS , M .A .
Crown 8vo . , 65 . 6d . (rll anua lsof Ca tfiolz’
c
P lzi /osoplzy .
D ow e l l .— A H ISTORY OF TAXAT IONA N D TAXES IN ENGLAND , from th e
Earl iest T imes to the Year 1 885. BySTEPHEN D OWELL (4 vo ls. 8vo . ) Vo ls.
I. and II. T h e H istory of T axat ion ,
z rs. Vols. I I I . and IV . T h e H istory ofT axes, 2 15 .
J ordan — T H E STANDARD OF VALUE .
By WILL IAM LE IGHTON JORDAN . 8vo . ,
6s.
L e SIIte .— ESSAYS IN POL IT ICAL ECON
OMY . By T . E. CL IFFE LESL IE . 8vo. ,
6d .
M a c l eod .— W orks by HENRY D UNN ING
MACLEOD , M .A .
B IMETAL ISM . 8vo . , 55 . net .
T H E ELEMENTS OF BANK ING. Crown8vo . , 3 5 . 6d .
T H E THEORY A N D PRACT ICE OF BANKIN G . V ol. I. 8vo . ,
1 2 3 . V ol. II. 145 .
T H E THEORY OF CRED IT. 8vo . V ol.
I. net. V ol. I I . , Part I. , 45 . 6d.
V ol. II. Part II '
10s. 6d.
1 l b fl h
STUART MILL.
b U N U M Y 0
Popular Ed i tion. Crown 8vo. ,-3s. 68 .
Library Ed it ion. 2 vo ls. 8VO 305 .
S h i rr e s .—A N A NALYS I S OF T H E IDEAS
OF ECONOM ICS . By L. P. S H IR R E S ,B .A . some t ime F inance Under-Secretaryof the Government of Bengal . Crown8vo . , és.
S ym es.— POL IT ICAL ECONOMY : a ShOrlT ex t-book o f Po l i t ical Economy. W ithProblems for Solu tion, and H ints forS upplementary Read ing. By Prof. J . E .
SYM ES , M .A . , of Un iversity Col legeN ottingham. Crown 8vo 25 . 6d.
T oynbee.— LECTURES ON
‘
T H E IND UST R IA L R EVOLUT ION OF T H E 1 8thCENTURY IN ENGLAND . By A RNOLDTOYNBEE . W i th a Memo ir of theA u th or by B. JOWETT. 8vo. , 6d .
W e h b .—
. T H E H ISTORY OF TRADEUN ION ISM. By S IDNEY and BEATRICEWEBB . W ith M ap and full B ibl iographyof th e Subject . 8vo. , 1 8s.
W i l son .-Works by A . J . , WILSON
Ch iefiy reprinted from T lze Investors
R eview.
PRACT ICAL H INTS T o SMALL INVE ST OR S . 1 5 .
PLA INA DV ICE ABOUT LIFE INSURANCE.Crown 8vo . , 1 3 .
Evolution, Anthropology , &c.
C lodd .—Works by EDWARD CLOD D .
T H E STORY OF CREAT ION a Pla in A ocount of Evo lut ion. W ith 77 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 35 . 6d.
A PR IMER OF EVOLUT ION : be ing a
Popu lar A bridged E d it ion of T he
S tory of Creat ion W ith Illust .F cp . 8vo .
,1 3 . 6d. [In the P ress.
H u th .—T H E MARR IAGE OF NEAR K IN .
considered wi th Respect to the Law of
N at ions , the Resu lt of Experience , and
th e T each ings of B iology. By A LFREDHENRY HUTH . Royal 8vo . , 75 . 6d .
L ang.— CUSTOM A N D MYTH : S tud ies
ofEarly Usage and Be l ief. By A NDREWLANG , M .A . W ith 1 5 Illustrat ions.
Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
L u b b o ck . T H E OR IG IN OF CIV ILISAT ION and th e Prim i t ive Cond i tion 01
M an. By S ir J . LU BBOCK , Bart M . P.
W ith 5 Plates and z o Illustrat ions in theT ext . 8vo . 183 .
R oman e s .— Works by GEORGE JOHN
R OMANES, M .A . , LL.D . , F.R . S .
D ARW IN , A N D A FTER D ARW IN : an Exposi t ion of th e Darwinian T heory ,and a Discussion on Post-DarwinianQ uest ions. Part I.
'
T he DarwinianT heory. W ith Portra it of Darwinand 1 2 5 Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . ,
103 . 6d.
A N EXAM INAT ION OF WE ISMANN ISM.
Crown 8VO 65 .
1 4 LON GM A N S 630 C0.
'
S S TA N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L WOR KS .
Poetry and th e Drama— continued.
A rm st rong— Works by G . F. SAVAGE G oe th e .
A RMSTRONG.
POEMS : Lyrical and Dramatic . F cp .
8vo . ,6s.
K ING SAUL . (T h e T ragedy o f Israel ,Part I. ) F cp . 8VO . 55 .
K ING D AV ID . (T h e T ragedy of Israel ,Part I I . ) F cp . 8vo . , 6s.
K ING SOLOMON . (T h e T ragedyIsrael , Part I I I . ) F cp . 8vo . , 65 .
UGONE : a T ragedy. F cp . 8vo . , 6s.
A GARLAND FROM GREECE : Poems.
F cp . 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
STOR IES OF WICKLOW : Poems. F cp.
8vo . , 7s. 6d.
MEPH ISTOPHELES IN BROADCLOTH : aSat ire . F cp . 8vo . , 4s.
ON E IN T H E INFIN ITE : a Poem. Cr.
8vo . , 7s. 6d .
A rm st r ong— T H E POET ICAL WORKS
OF EDMUND J . A RM STRONG. F cp .
8vo . , 5s.
A rnold .— Works byS ir EDW INA RNOLD ,
K .C . I.E A u thor of ‘ T he Ligh t of
A s ia ,
’&c .
T H E LIGHT OF T H E WORLD : or, th eGreat Consummation. A Poem.
Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d. net .
P resenta tion E di tion . W i th 14 Illustrations by W . HOLMAN HUNT.
4to . , 20s. net .
POTI PHAR’S WIFE, and oth er Poems.
Crown 8vo . , 5s. net .
A DZUMA : or, the Japanese W ife. A
Play. Crown 8vo . , 6s. 6d. net .
Bell.— CHAMBER COMED IES : a Colleet ion Of Plays and Monologues for theD rawmg Room. By M rs. HUGHBELL . Crown 8vo . , és.
rn sen .— Works by BJORN ST J ER N E
PASTOR SANG : a Play . T ranslated byWILL IAM WILSON . Cr. 8vo . , 55 .
A GAUNTLET : a Drama . T ranslatedinto Engl ish by O SMAN EDWARDS .W ith Portra it of th e A u th or. Crown8vo . , 5s.
C och ran e .— T H E KESTREL’S N EST ,
and oth er Verses . By A LFRED COCHRANE . F cp . 8vo . , 3s . 6d .
D an t e .— LA COMMED IA D I D ANTE . A
N ew T ext , carefu lly revised wi th the
FAUST , Part I th e German T ext , withIntroduct ion and N otes. By A LBERTM . SELSS , Ph .D . ,
M .A . Cr. 8vo . , 5s.
FAUST . T ranslated , with N otes. ByT . E . WEBB . 8vo . , 1 as. 6d.
Ingelow.—Works by JEAN INGELOW .
POET ICAL WORKS . 2 vols.
1 23 .
LYR ICAL A N D OTHER POEMS . S electedfrom the W ritings Of JEAN INGELOW .
F cp . 8vo . , as. 6d. c loth p la in, 3 s.
cloth gilt .
F cp . 8vo
K end al l .— SONGS FROM D REAMLAND .
l By M A Y K ENDALL . F cp . 8vo . , 5s. net .
L ang— Works by A NDREW LANG.
B A N A N D A RR IERE B A N . A Rally of
Fugitive Rhymes. F cp . 8vo. , 55 .
net .
GRASS OF PARNASSUS . F cp . 8vo . ,
as. 6d. net .
BALLADS OF BOOKS. Ed ited byA NDREW LANG. F cp . 8vo . , 65 .
T H E BLUE POETRY BOOK. Ed ited byA NDREW LANG . W ith 1 2 Plates and88 Illustra t ions in the T ext by H . J .
FORD and LANCELOT S PEED . Crown8vo . , 6s.
Specie—
21 E dition , pr inted on'
1726170 75
LVit/z N otes, bu t wi thou t
u tions. Crown Svo. , 7s. 6d.
L eek y .— POEMS . By W . E. H . LECKY.
F cp . 8vo. , 5s.
L ey t on .— Works by FRANK LEYTON .
T H E SHADOWS OF T H E LAKE , and
o ther Poems. Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
Cheap Ed it ion. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
SKELETON LEAVES : Poems. Crown8vo . , 6s.
L yt t on .— Works by T H E EARL o r
LYTTON (OWEN MERED ITH).MARAH . F cp . 8vo 6s. 6d.
K ING POPPY : a Fantasia . W i th 1
Plate and Design on T itle-Page byS ir E D . BURNE-JONES , A .R .A . Crown8vo . , 1os. 6d.
T H E WANDERER. Cr. 8vo . , 105 . 6d.
‘
Poetry and the Drama— continued.
M a cau lay .—LA YS OF A NC IENT R OME ,
&c . By Lord MACAULAY.
Illustrated by G. SCHARF.105 . 6d .
F cp . 4to
Bijou Ed it ion .
18mo . , 2s. 6d. , gi lt top .
Popu lar Ed it ion.
F cp . 4to . , 6d. sewed , 1 s. c loth .
Il lustrated by J . R .WEGUE LIN . Crown8vo . , 3s. 6d.
A nnotated Ed ition. Fcp . 8vo . , 1 s.
sewed , 1s. 6d. c lo th .
N e sb i t .— LA YS A N D LEGENDS. By E .
NESB IT (M rs. HUBERT BLAND). FirstSeries. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d. S econd
S eries, with Portra it. Crown 8vo . , 5s.
P iat t .— Works by S ARAH P IATT.
POEMS .2 vo ls.
W ith portra it of the A u thor.
Crown 8vo . , Ios.
A N ENCHANTED CASTLE, A N D OTHER
POEMS : P ictures , Portra its and Peop lein Ireland . Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
P i a t t . —Works by JOHN JAMES P IATT.
IDYLS A N D LYR ICS OF T H E OH IOVALLEY. Crown 8vo . , 55 .
LITTLE N EW WORLD IDYLS . Cr. 8vo . ,
53 .
R h oades. —TERESA A N D OTHERPOEMS . By JAMES RHOADES . Crown8vo . , 3s. 6d .
R i l ey— Works by JAMES WH ITCOMB
R ILEY.OLD F ASH IONED R OSES Poems.
1 2mo . , 55 .
POEMS HERE A T HOME . Fcap . 8vo .,
6s . ne t .
R ob e r ts. SONGS OF T H E COMMOND A Y
,A N D A V E : an Ode for th e Shel ley
Centenary. By CHARLES G . D.
R OBERTS . Crown 8vo. , 3s. 6d .
S h ak e sp eare .—BOWDLER ’
S FAM ILYSHAKESPEARE . W ith 36 Woodcu ts.
I vol. 8vo . ,14s . Or in 6 vo ls. F cp .
8vo . , 2 1s.
T H E SHAKESPEARE B IRTHDAY BOOK.
By MARY F . D UNBAR . 3 2mo . , 1s. 6d.
Drawing-Room Ed it ion , wi th Photograph s. F cp . 8vo . , 10s. 6d.
S tu rg i s .— A BOOK OF SONG. B vJUL IAN
STURG IS. 1 6mo . 5s.
Works of F iction, H umour, &c.
A n st ey .-Works by F. A NSTEY
, A uthorof Vice VersaT H E BLACK POODLE , and oth er S tories.
Crown 8VO 2s. boards, 2s. 6d. cloth .
VOCES POPUL I . Reprinted from‘ Punch F irst S eries. W ith 20
Illustrat ions by J . BERNARD PARTR IDGE . Cr. 8yo . , 3s. 6d .
T H E TRAVELL ING COMPAN IONS. R e
p rinted from Punch W ith 25 111ustrations by J . BERNARD PARTR IDGE .
Post 4 to . , 5s .
T H E M A N FROM B LA N KLEY’S : a S tory
in S cenes , and oth er Sketches.
'
Wi th24 Illustrat ions by J . BERNARD PARTR IDGE . F cp . 4to . , os.
A ston — A JOURNEY IN OTHERWORLDS.
a Romance of th e Fu ture . By JOHNJACOB A STOR . W ith 10 Illustrat ions.
(‘
r Rv n 6 r
B ak er .— BY T H E WESTERN SE A . By
JAMES BAKER , A u thor of ‘ JohnWesta
cott Crown 8vo. , 3 s. 6d.
B eacon sfi eld .—Works by the Earl of
BEACONSF IELD .
NOVELS A N D TALES .Comp lete in 1 1 vo ls.
each .
Vivian Grey .
T heYoungD uke ,&c .
A lroy , Ixion , &c .
Contarin i Flem ing,
Ch eap Ed ition.
Cr. 8vo . , 1s. 6d.
H enrietta T emple .
Venetia . T ancred .
Coningsby . Syb i l .Lotha ir . Endymion.
&c .
NOVELS A N D TALES . T h e H ughe ii den
Ed i t ion . W i th 2 Portra its and 1 1
Vignettes. 1 1 vols. Cr . 8vo . , 42s.
C legg.—D AV ID ’S LOOM : a S tory of
Rochdale li fe in the early years of theN ineteenth Century . By JOH N TRAF
1 6‘
LON GM A N S 61° C0 .
’
S S TA N D A R D A N D GEN E R A L WOR K S .
"
Works of F iction, H umour , &c.— continued
D e lan d .— Works by MARGARET D E H aggard
— Works by H . R IDER H A G~
LAND, A u thor of
‘ John Ward’
. GA RD— continued’
.
T H E S TORY OF A CH ILD . Cr. 8vo . . 55 . ER IC BR IGHTEYES . W ith 51 IllustraM R . TOMMY D OVE , and oth er Stories.
“ons C f : 8V0 35 6d.
Crown 8vo . , 6s. NADA T H E LILY. W ith 2 3 IllustraPH IL I P A N D H IS WIFE . Cr. 8vo . ,
6s.
C f : 8V0-i65
MONTEZUMA ’S D A UGH rE R . W ith 24D ou ga lI.
— Works by L. D OUGALL Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 65 .
BEGGARS A LL . Crown 8vo . . as. 6d. A LLAN 'S WIFE . W ith 34 Illustrat ions.
WHAT NECESS ITY K NOWS . Crown Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
8vo . , 65 .
T H E WITCH’S HEAD . W ith 1 6 Illustrations. Crown 8vo .
, 3s. 6d.
MR . M E E SON’S WILL . W ith 16 . Illus
trations. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
D oy l e .— Works by A . CONAN D OYLE .
MICAH CLARKE a T ale ofM onmou th’
s
Rebell ion . W ith Front isp iece and
Vignette . Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 , 6d .
D AWN . W i th 16 Illustrat ions. .Crown
8 6d .
T H E CAPTA IN OF T H E POLESTAR , andV0 35
oth er T ales. Cr. sy o . , , 5 . 6d.
T H E PEOPLE OF T H E M I ST. W i th 16
Il lustrat ions. Cr. 8vo .,6s.
T H E R EFUGEES : T l f T Ctinents. Cr. svi £
6 0 wo on
H aggard an d L an g .—T H E WORLD’S
D ES IRE . By H . R IDER HAGGARD andF arrar.
— D ARKNESS A N D D AWN : or,A NDREW LANG. W i th 27 Illustrat ions
S cenes in th e Days of N ero . A n H is by M . GR E IF F E N H A GE N . Cr. 8vo . ,
A rchdeacon FARRAR .H art e .
— IN T H E CA R Q UINE Z WOODS ,and o ther S tories. By BRET HARTE.
F orst er .— MA JOR JOSHUA . By FRANC IS Cf : 8V0 3 5 . 6d .
FORSTER . Crown 8vo . . 65 . H ornu ng .— T H E UNB IDDEN GUEST.
By E . W . HORNUNG . Crown 8yo . ,6s.
F rou d e .— T H E T WO CH IEFS OF D UN
BOY : an Irish Romance Of th e Last L y a lL— Works by EDNA LYALL, A uthor
Century. By J . A . FROUDE . Cr. 8yo . ,
Of‘Donovan
,
’
&C~
3 5 6d T H E A UTOB IOGRAPHY OF A S LANDER.G i lk e s .
—T H E TH ING THAT HATH F CP‘ 8Vf) " 1"
fie
fved ‘
BEEN ; or , a Young Man’
s M istake . By Presentat ion Ed i t ion. W i th 20 IlluS
A . H . G ILKES , M .A . , M aster of Du lwich trations by LANCELOT S PEED : Cr
Col lege , A uthor of Boys and Masters’.
Sv°° v 25 6d ° ne t .
Crown 8V0u 631 D OREEN : T he S tory Of a S inger. Cr.
H aggard .
’
— Works by H . R IDER H AG8m 65 ’
GARD . M e lv i l l e .— Works by G . J . WH YT F
SH E . W ith 3 2 Illustrat ions. Crown MELV ILLE :8vo . , 3 5 . 6d. T h e Glad iators. Holmby House.
A LLAN Q UATERMA IN . W ith 3 1 Illus T he Interp re ter Kate Coventrytrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 3s . 6d .
GOOd for N oth ing. D igby Grand .,
T h e Q ueen’
s Maries. General Bounce .
’
M A IWA S R EVENGE , or , T h e War ofCr. 8vo . , 1 5 . 6d. each .
th e Lit t le Hand . Cr. 8vo. ,1 5 . boards
,
1 5 . 6d. cloth . O l ip h an t .— W orks by "
M rs. OLIPH A N
COLONEL Q UA R IT CH ,V .C . Cr. 8vo . , MADAM . Cr. 8vo . , 1 5 . 6d .
3 5 . 601. IN TRUST. Cr. 8vo. , 1s. 6d.
CLEOPATRA . W i th 29 Illustrations P arr .— CA N T H IS B E LOVE ? By
Crown 8vo . , 3 5 ' 607
° PARR, A uthor of Dorothy F ox ’
.
BEATR ICE . Cr . 8vo . s . 6d . Rm 6 s
18 LON GM A N S 69° C0.
’
S S T A N D A R D A N D GE N E R A L WOR K S .
Popu lar Science (Natura l H istory,H ar tw i g .
— Wo rks by D r. GEORGE S tan l ey .— A FAM IL IAR H ISTORY OF
H A RT WIG— cont i nued. B IRDS . By E. STANLEY , D . D for
HEROES OF T H E POLAR WORLD . 19merly B ishop of N orwich . W ith Illus
Illustrat ions . Crown 8vo . , 2s.
trat ions. Cr. 8V0-i 3 5 6d
WONDERS O F T H E TROPICAL FORESTS .Crown 8V°~ 2 5 ° iW ood .
— Works by th e R ev. J . G . WoonWORKE RS UNDER T H E GROUND. 29
Illustrat ions . Crown 8vo . , 2S.
HOMES WIT H OU’
I HANDS : a D escript ion O f th e Habi tat ion of A nimals ,
M A R V E PS OVER OUR HEADS“ 29 Il c lassed accord ing to th e Prlustrat ions. Crown 8vo . . 25 . Construct ion. W ith 140 Illu
S E A MONSTERS A N D SE A BIRDS . 75 8vo . , 75 . net .
Illustra t ions. Crown 8V 25 6d INSECTS A T HOME a
D EN IZENS OF T H E D EEP. 1 17 Illustra of Bri t ish Insec ts
t ions. CI‘
OWD 8vo . , 2 5 . 6i . Habits and T ransit)VOLCANOES A N D EARTHQUAKES . 30
q suat lons
Illustrat ions. CIOWI’
I 8VO 25 . 6d. INSECT S A BROADWILD A N IMALS OF T H E TROPICS . 66
Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
H e lm h ol t z .— POPULA R LECTURES ON
S C IENT IF IC S UBJECTS . B y H ERMANNV ON HELMHOLTZ . _ W ith 68Woodcu ts.
2 VOIS .
‘ Crown 8vo . , 3s. 641. each .
P roc tor .—Works by R ICHARD A .
PROCTOR .
LIGHT S C IENCE F OR LE ISURE HOURS .Fam i l iar Essays on S c ient ific Subjects.
3 vo ls. Crown 8vo . , 55 . each .
CHANCE A N D LUCK : a Discussion of
th e Laws Of Luck , Co inc idence ,Wagers , Lotteries and th e Fallac iesof Gambling ,
&c . Cr. 8vo. ,25 .
boards, 2 5 . 6d. c loth .
ROUGH WAYS MADE SMOOTH . Fam il iar Essays on S c ient ific Subjects.
S i lver Library Ed ition . Crown 8vo . ,
3 5 . 6d.
PLEASANT WAYS IN S C IENCE . Cr.
8vo 55 . S i lver Library Ed it ion.
Crown 8vo . , 3 s. 6d.
T H E GREAT PYRAM ID , O BSERVATORY ,TOMB A N D TEMPLE . W ith Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 55 .
NATURE STUD IES. By R . A . PROCTOR ,GRANT A LLEN , A . WILSON , T .
’
FOSTER and E. CLOD D . Crown8vo . , 55 . S i lver Library Ed it ion .
Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
LE ISURE R EAD INGS. By R . A . PROCA W ” RO N T .
600 Il lustrat ions. 8vo . , 75 . net.
B IBLE A N IMALS : a Descrip t ionevery Living Creature mentionedth e S crip tures. W i th 1 1 2 Illustt ions. 8vo . , 75 . net .
PE T LA N D R EV IS ITED. W ith 3 3trations. Cr. 8vo . , 3s. 6d .
OUT OF D OORS ; a S elect ion of
nal A rticles on Pract ical NH istory. W ith 1 1 Illustrati8vo. , 3 3 . 6d.
STR ANGE D WELL INGS : a D
of th e Habitat ions of
abridged from ‘ Homes
Hands W i th 60 Illustratio8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
B IRD LIFE OF T H E B IBLE . 3 2
t ions. Cr. 8vo . , 35 . 6d.
WONDERFUL N E ST s. 30 IllusCr. 8vo . , 35 . 6d .
H oME S UNDER T H E GROUND. 28 1
trations. Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d .
WILD A N IMALS O F T HE B IBLE .Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
D OMEST IC A N IMALS OF T HE BIBLE .
Illustrat ions. Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d .
T H E BRANCH BU ILDERS . 28 l llust ions . Cr. 8vo . , 2 3 . 6d.
M au nd er’s (S amu el ) T reasu r i es.
B IOGRAPH ICAL TREASURY. W ith Supp lement brough t down to 1 889 . ByR ev. JAMES WOOD . F cp . 8vo . ,
6s.
TREASURY OF NATURAL H ISTORY : or,Popular Dictionary of Zoology. W i th900 W oodcu ts. Fcp . 8vo 63 .
TREASURY OF GEOGRAPHY , Physical ,Historical , Descrip t ive ,
and Po l it ical .W ith 7 Maps and 16 Plates. F cp .
_
8vo. , 65 .
T H E TR EASURY OF B IBLE K NOWLEDGE . By the R ev. J . A YRE , M .A .
W ith 5 Maps, 1 5 Plates , and 300
Woodcuts. Fcp . 8vo . ,65 .
H ISTOR ICAL TREASURY : Outl ines of
Un iversa l H istory , Separate H istoriesof all N at ions. Fcp. 8vo 6s.
TREASURY OF K NOWLEDGE A N D
LIBRARY OF R EFERENCE . Com
prising an Engl ish Dictionary and
Grammar , Universal Gaz eteer, ClassIcal Dic t ionary , Chronology , Law
Dict ionary , &c . F cp . 8vo .,65 .
Ch i ldren’s Books.
C rak e .—Works by R ev. A . D . CRAKE .
EDWY T H E FA IR ; or , th e F irst Chron icle of E scendune . Crown 8vo . ,
25 . 6d.
A LEGAR T H E D ANE : or, th e Second Chron icle of [E scendune Cr . 8vo . . 25 . 6d.
T H E R IVAL HE IRS : be ing the T h irdand Last Ch ron icle of fE scendune .
Cr. 8vo . , 2 5 . 6d.
T H E HOUSE OF WA LD E R N E . A T aleof th e C lo ister and the Forest in th eDays of the Barons' Wars. Crown8vo . , 23 . 6d .
BR IAN F IT z-COUNT. A S tory ofWallingford Castle and Dorch ester A bbey.
Cr. 8vo . , 2 3 . 6d .
Inge low .—VERY YOUNG , A N D Q U ITE
A NOTHER STORY. T wo S tories. ByJEAN INGELOW. Crown 8vo . , 2 3 . 6d.
L ang— Works ed itedbyA NDREW LANG .
T H E BLUE FA IRY BOOK . W ith 1 3 8Illustrat ions by H . J . FORD and G .
P . JACOME HOOD. Crown svc . , és.
L ang— Works ed ited byA NDREW LANG
-contz’
nuea’.
T H E R E D FA IRY BOOK. W ith 1 00 .
Illustrat ions by H , J . FORD and
LANCELOT S PEED . Cr. 8vo . ,65 .
T H E GREEN FA IRY BOOK . W ith 1 0 1
Illustrat ions by H . J . FORD and L .
BOGLE . Crown 8vo 65 .
T H E YELLOW FA IRY BOOK. W i th 104
Il lustrat ions by H . J . FORD . Crown”
8vo . , 6s.
M au nd er’s (S amu el ) T reasu r i e s
— cozzt i7zued .
SC IENT IFIC A N D LITERARY TREASURY .
F cp . 8vo . , 65 .
T H E TREASURY OF BOTANY. Ed itedby J . LINDLEY , and T .
MOORE , F . L . S . W ith 274 Wood
cu ts and 20 S teel Pla tes. 2 vo ls.
F cp . 8vo . , 1 2s.
R oget. -THESAURUS OF E N GLISHWORD S
A N D PHRASES . Classified and A r~
ranged so as to Fac il i tate the Expressiono f Ideas and assist in Li terary Com
posi t ion. By PETER MARK R OGET ,
M . D ., F . R . S . Recomposed through
ou t , enlarged and improved , partlyfrom the A uthor'
s N otes , and wi th a
fu l l Index , by the A uthor’s S on ,JOHN
LEW I S R OGET. Crown 8vo. , 105 . 6d.
W i l l i ch .— POPULA R TABLES for giving
informa t ion for ascerta ining the value ofLifehold , Leaseho ld , and Ch urch Pro ~
perty . th e Public Funds , &c . ByCHARLES M . WILL ICH . Ed ited by H .
BENCE J ONES . Crown 8vo . ,105 . 6d .
T H E BLUE POETRY BOOK . W i th 1 6 0
Illustrat ions by H . J . FORD and
LANCELOT S PEED . Crown 8vo . ,65 .
T H E BLUE POETRY BOOK . S choolEd ition , without Illustrat ions. F cp .
8vo . , 2 5 . 6d.
T H E TRUE STORY BOOK . W ith 66
Illustrations by H . J . FORD , LUC IEND AV I S , C . H . M . K ERR , LA NCELOT S PEED
,and LOCKHART BOGLE .
Crown 8vo . , 65 .
Ch ildren’s Books— continued .
M ead e .—Works by L . T . MEADE .
D ADDY’S BOY . Illustrated . Crown8vo . , 3s. 6d.
D E B A N D T H E D UCHESS . Illustrated .
Crown 8vo . , 3s . 6d .
S t ev en son — A CH ILD ’S GARDEN OF
VERSES . By R OBERT LOU IS S TEVENSON .
Small fcp . 8vo . , 53 .
M o le sw orth .—Works byM rs.MOLES
WORTH .
S ILV E RT H OR N S . Illustrated . Cr. 8vo . , 53 .
T H E PALACE IN T H E GARDEN . Illustrated . Crown 8vo .
, 5s.
NE IGHBOURS. Illus. Crown 8vo . ,
Longmans’Series of Books for Gir ls.
Crown 8vo . , price 2 5 . 6d. each
(T H E ) DU LYS : or an A rt
S tudent in th e Re ign of T error.
B Y T H E SAME A UTHOR .MADEMO ISELLE MOR I : a T ale of
Modern Rome .
THAT CH ILD . Illustrated by GORDON
UNDER A CLOUD .
T H E FIDDLER OF LUGAU. With Illustra tions by W . R ALSTON .
A CH ILD OF T H E R EVOLUT ION . W ithllustrat ions by C . J . STAN ILAND .
HESTER’S VENTURE .
IN T H E OLDEN TIME : a T ale of th e
Peasant War in Germany.T H E YOUNGER S ISTER.
A THERSTONE PR IORY. By L . N . COMYN .
T H E TH IRD MISS S T . Q UENT IN . ByM rs. MOLESWORTH .
T H E STORY OF A S PR ING MORN ING, &c.
By M rs. MOLESWORTH . Illustrated .
N E IGH BOUR S . By M rs. MOLESWORTH .
IllustratedVERY YOUNG ; and Q U ITE A NOTHERSTORY. T wo S tories. By JEAN INGELOW .
K E ITH D ER AMORE .
M iss Mo lly ’
.
S IDNEY. By MARGARET D ELAND .
LAST WORDS T o G IRLS ON LIFE A T
S CHOOL A N D A FTER SCHOOL. ByM rs. W . GREY.
By the Author of
Th e Si lver Library .
CROWN 8vo .
Arnold’s (Sir E dwin) Seas and Lands.
W ith 7 1 Illustrat ions. 3 5 . 6d.
Baker’s (Sir S . W.) E igh t Years in
Cey lon. W ith 6 Illustrat ions. 3s. 6d.
B aker’s (Sir S . W.)Rifl e and H ound in
Ceylon. W ith 6 Illustrat ions. 3 s. 6d .
B aring-Gou ld’s (Rev. Curious Myth s
of th e Middle Ages. 3s. 6d.
B aring-Gould’s (Rev. Origin and
D evelopment of Religious B elief. 2
vols. 35 . 641. each .
B rassey’s (Lady)A V oyage in th e Sun
b eam W ith 66 Illustrat ions. 3s. 6d.
Clodd’s (E .) S tory of Creation a Pla in
A ccount of Evolu t ion. W ith 77 Illustrations. 3 5 . 6d .
:
Conyb eare (Rev. W. J .) and H owson’s
(V ery Rev. J . S .) Li fe and E p istles of
S t . Paul . 46 Illustrat ions. 3 5 . 6d.
Douga ll’s (L.) B eggars A l l ; a N ovel.
3 3 . 6d .
33 . 6d. EACH VOLUME . 1
Doyle’s (A . Conan)Micah Clarke a T ale
of Monmouth '
s Rebell ion. 3s. 6d.
Doyle’s (A . Conan) Th e Capta in of the
Polestar, and oth er T ales. 3s. 6d .
F roude’s (J. A .) Sh ort S tud ies on Great
Subjects. 4 vols. 3 3 . 6d . each .
F ronde’s (J. A .)Caesar : a Sketch . 3 3 . 6d .
F ronde’s (J. A .) Th omas Carlyle : a
H istory of h is Life.
1795-1 835 . 2 vols. 7s.
1834-1881 . 2 vo ls. 7s.
Fronde’s (J. A .)Th e Two Ch iefs of Dun
boy : an Irish Romance of the LastCentury . 3 5 . 6d .
F roude’s (J. A .)T h e H istory of England ,
from the Fal l ofWolsey to the Defeatof the Spanish A rmada . 1 2 vols.
3s. 6d. each .
Gleig’s (Rev. G. R .) Li fe of th e Duke of
Well ington. W ith Portra it. 3s. 6d .
22 LON GM A N S a: CO.
’S S T A N D A R D A N D GE N E RAL WORK S .
Cookery , Domestic Management , 810.
A CtOIl .— MODERN COOKERY. By EL I ZA D e S a l i s .
— Works by M rs. D E SAL ISA CTON . W ith 1 50 Woodcu ts.
45 . 6d.
B u l l .— Works by THOMAS BULL , M .D .
H INTS TO MOTHERS ON THE MANAGEMENT OF THE IR HEALTH DUR ING THEPER IOD OF PREGNANCY. F cp . 8vo . ,
1 3 . 6d .
THE MATERNAL MANAGEMENT OFCH ILDREN IN HEALTH AND D ISEASE.F cp . 8vo . , 1 s. 6d .
D e S al i s .— Works by M rs . D E SAL I S.
CAKES AND CONFECT IONS A LA MODE .F cp . 8vo . , I S . 6d.
D OGS : a Manual for Amateurs.
8VO
F cp . continued .
PUDD INGS AND PASTRY A LA MODE .
F cp . 6d .
S AVOUR IES A LA MODE .13 . 6d .
SOUPS AND D RESSED FISH A LA MODE .
Fcp . 8vo . ,1s. 6d.
SWEETS AND SUPPER D ISHES A LAMODE . F cp . 8vo . ,
1 3 . 6d.
TE MPT ING D ISHES FOR SMALL IN
COMES . F cp . 8vo . , 1 s. 6d .
WR INKLES AND NOT IONS FOR E V E R iHOUSEHOLD . Cr . 8vo . , 1s . 6d .
Fcp . 8vo .
F cp . L ear .—MA IGRE COOKERY. By H .
‘
I
S IDNEY LEAR . 16mo . , 2s.
D RESSED GAME AND POULTRY A LA P oole .— COOKERY FOR THE D IABET IC .
MODE . F cp . 8vo . ,1 5 . 6d.
D RESSED VEGETABLES A LA MODE.F cp . 8vo . ,
1 5 . 6d.
D R INKS A LA MODE . F cp . 8vo ., 15 . 6d.
ENTREES A LA MODE . F cp . 8vo . ,1 s. 6d.
FLORAL D ECORAT IONS . Suggest ionsand Descrip t ions. F cp . 8vo .
, 1 5 . 6d.
NAT IONAL VIANDS . F cp . 8vo.
[In the P ress.
By W . H . and M rs. POOLE . W ithPreface by. D r. PAVY . Fcp . 8vo . ,
2 5 . 6d .
W a l k er .— A HANDBOOK FORMOTHERS :
be ing S imple H ints to Women on th e
Management of th e ir Health duringPregnancy and Confinement , together
with Pla in Direct ions as to th e Care ofInfants. By JANEand L .M . , and M .D .
Cr. 8v0 2s. 6d.
N EW-LA ID EGGS : H ints for Amateur W e st — T H E MOTHER ’S MANUAL OFPou l try Rearers. Fcp . 8vo . , 1 5 . 6d .
OYSTERS A LA MODE . F cp . 8vo . , 1 5 . 6d .
CH ILDREN ’S D ISEASES . By CHARLESWEST , M .D . F cp . 8v0 2s. 6d.
Miscel laneous and Critica l Works.
Allingh am .— VAR IET IES IN PROSE . B oy d (
‘ A i K . H .— Works by
By WILL IAM A LL INGHAM . 3 vo ls. Cr.8v0 , 1 8s. (Vols. 1 and 2 , Rambles , byPA T R ICIUS WALKER . V ol . 3 ,
IrishSketch es, etc . )
A rm s tr on g — ESSA YS AND SKETCHES .By EDMUND J . A RMSTRONG . F cp .
8vo . , 55 .
B ageh o t .—LIT ERA RY STUD IES . By
WALTER BAGEHOT . 2 vols. 8vo . ,2 8s.
B ar ing-G ou ld .—CUR IOUS MYTHS OF
THE MIDDLE A GES . By ‘
R ev. S .
BAK ING-GOULD . Crov’
vn 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
B a t t y a .— PICT URES IN PROSE OF
NATURE,WILD S PORT , AND HUMBLE
LIFE . By A UBYN TREVOR B A T T YE ,
B .A . Crown 8vo .,63 .
Baynes .— SHAKESPEARE STUD IES , AND
OTHER ESSAYS . By the late THOMAS
A . K . H . BOYD , D .D .,LL .D .
A nd see MISCE LLA N E OUS TH E OLO
GIGA L WORKS , p. 24 .
A UTUMN HOL IDAYS OF A COUNTRYPARSON . Crown 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
COMMONPLACE PH ILOSOPHER . Crown8vo . , 3 s. 6d .
CR IT ICAL ESSAYS OF A COUNTRYPARSON . Crown 8vo . . 3s. 6d.
EAST,COAST D AYS AND MEMOR IES.
Crown 8vo. , 3s. 6d .
LANDSCAPES,CHURCHES AND MORA
L IT IE S . Crown 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
LE ISURE HOURS IN TOWN .
8vo . , 3s. 6d.
LESSONS OFMIDDLE A GE .
OUR LITTLE LIFE . T wo S eries. Cr.8vo . , 3s. 6d. each .
OUR HOMELYCOMEDY : A N D T R A GE D Y .
Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d .
Crown
L U IV U IWA \ 0 .
Miscel laneous and Critical Works— con/inued.
B u tl er .—Works by SAMUEL BUTLER .
E R EWIION . Cr. 8vo . , 5s.
T H E FA IR HAVEN . A Work In Defenceof the M iraculous Element in our
Lord ’
s M inistry . Cr. 8vo . 75 . 6d .
LIFE A N D HAB IT. A n Essay after a
Completer View of Evolu t ion. Cr .
8vo . , 75 . 6d
EVOLUT ION , OLD A N D N EW. Cr. 8vo . ,
105 . 6d .
A LPS A N D SANCTUAR IES OF P IEDMONTA N D CANTON TIC INO . Illustrated.
Pott 4 to . ,1 05 . 6d .
LUCK, OR CUNN ING ,
A S T H E MA INMEANS OF ORGAN ICMOD IF ICAT ION PCr. 8vo . , 7s. 6d .
Ex VOTO . A n A ccount of the Sacro
Monte or N ew Jerusa lem at VaralloS esia . Crown 8vo . , 105 . 6d .
ran c i s .—J UNIUS R EVEALED By h is
surviving Grandson ,H . R . FRANC IS ,
M .A . ,late Fellow of S t . John'
s College ,
Cambridge . 8vo . , 6s.
H odgson . OUTCAST ESSAYS A N D
VERSE TRANSLAT IONS . By H . SHADWORTH HODGSON . Crown 8vo . , 85 . 6d.
I‘Iu llah .— V\70rks by J . H ULLA H , LL .D .
COURSE OF LECTURES ON T H E H ISTORY OF MODERN MUS IC . 8yo . , 85 . 6d.
COURSE OF LECTURES ON T H E TRANS IT ION PER IOD OF MUS ICAL H ISTORY.8vo .
,103 . 6d .
J efi‘
er i es .— Works by R . JEFFER IES .
FIELD A N D HEDGEROW : last Essays.
W i th Portra i t . Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
T H E STORY OF MY HEART : W ithPo rtrai t and N ew Preiace by C . J .LONGMAN. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
R ED D EER . W ith 17 Illustrations. Cr.
8vo . , 3s. 6d .
T H E T O ILERS O F T H E FIELD . W ithPort i ait . Crown 8vo . ,
6d.
WOOD MAG IC . W i th Frontisp iece andVignette by E . V . B. Cr. 8vo . , 35 . 6d .
J Oh n S OIl .— T H E PATENTEE’SMANUAL :a T rea t ise on th e Law and Prac t ice Of
Let ters Patent . By J . J . H . JOHNSON , Pa tent A gents , &c . 8vo . , 1 05 . 6d.
L ang .— Works by A NDREW LANG.
LETTERS T O D EAD A UTHORS.8vo . , 2s. 6d. net .
LETTER S ON LITERATURE . F cp . 8vo . ,
25 . 6d. net .
BOOKS A N D BOOKMEN . W i th 19Illustrations. F cp . 8vo. , 2 5 . 6d. net.
OLD FR IENDS . F cp . 8vo . ,25 . 6d. net.
COCK LANE A N D COMMON SENSE.F cp . 8vo . , 6s. 6d . net .
F cp .
L e onard .— T H E CAMEL : Its U ses and
Management. By Major A RTHUR GLYNLEONARD . Royal 8vo . , 2 1s. net .
M ac far r en .— LECT URES ON HARMONY.
By S ir GEO . A . M A CF A R REN . 8vo . ,1 25 .
M ax M ul l er . Works by F. M A X
MULLER . IND IA :WHAT CA N IT T E A CIIUs Cr. 8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
CH I PS FROM A GERMAN WORKSHOP .
N ewE dit ion in 4 V ols. V ol . I. ,Recent
Essays and A ddresses. Crown 8vo . ,
6s. 6d . ne t. (R eady ).In P repara tion— V ol . I I . , B iograph icalEssays ; V ol . III Essays on Languageand Literature ; V ol. IV. ,
Essays On
th e S c iences of Language , of T hough t ,and O f Mythology .
M endelssoh n.—T H E LETTERS OF
FEL IX MENDELSSOHN . T ranslated byLady WALLACE . 2 vols. Cr. 8vo . , 1 0 5 .
M i ln er .— Works by GEORGE MILNER .
COUNTRY PLEASURES : the Chron ic le ofa Year ch iefly in a Garden. Cr. 8vo . ,
3s. 6d.
STUD IES OF NATURE ON T H E CoA sTOF A RRAN . W ith Illustrations byW . N O EL JOH N SON . 16mo . 65 . 6d . net .
P err ing .—HA RD K NOTS IN SHAKES
PEARE. By S ir PH IL IP PERR ING , Bart.8vo . 7s. 6d.
P roc tor .—Works by R . A . PROCTOR .
STRENGTH A N D HAPPINESS . W i th 9Illustrat ions. Crown 8vo . , 53 .
STRENGTH : H ow to ge t S trong and
keep S trong, with Chap ters on R ow
ing and Swimming, F a t , A ge , and the
Wa ist . W ith 9 Il lus. Cr. 8vo , 2s.
R i ch ard son .— N A T IONA L HEALTH .
A Review Of the Works of S ir EdwinChadwick , K .C . B. By S ir B . W .
R ICHARDSON , M .D . Cr. 8vo . , 4s. 6d.
R osse t t i . -A SHADOW OF D ANTE b e
ing an Essay towards studying H imself,h is World , and h is P i lgrimage. ByMAR IA FRANCESCA R OSSETT I . Cr.
8vo . , 3 5 . 6d.
S ou th ey . CORRESPONDENCE W ITHCAROL INE BOWLES . By R . SOUTHEY .
Ed i ted by E. D OWDEN . 8vo . ,14s.
W a l lasch ek . PR IM IT IVE MUS IC : anInqu iry into the O rigin and Development O f Music , S ongs , Instruments ,
Dances , and Pantomimes of SavageRaces. By R ICHARD WA LLA SCH E K .
W ith Musica l Examp les. 8vo . ,1 25 . 6d .
W e st — W ILLS , A N D H ow N OT T o
MAKE THEM . W ith a Selec t ion Of
Lead ing Cases. By B. B. WEST. F cp .
8vo . , 25 . 6d .
Miscel laneous Theologica l Works.
F or C/zu relz
.
of E ngland and R oman Ca t/2011'
s Works see MESSRS. LON GM A N SSpeeia l Cd ia logues.
B oyd .—Works by A . K . H . BOYD , D .D . , M a c d on a ld .
— Works by GEORGE M A C
F irst M inister o f S t . A ndrews , au th or of‘ Recreat ions of a Country Parson ,
’&c .
COUNC IL AN D COMFORT FROM A C ITYPULPIT. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d .
SUNDAY A FTERNOONS IN T H E PAR ISHCHURCH OF A SCOTT ISH UN IVERS ITYCITY. Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
CHANGED A SPECTS OF UNCH ANGEDTRUTHS . Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
GRAVER THOUGHTS OF A COUNTRYPARSON . T h ree Series. Crown 8vo . ,
3 s. 6d . each .
PRESENT D A Y THOUGHTS . Crown 8vo . ,
3s. 6d .
S EAS IDE MUS INGS . Cr. 8vo . , 3 s. 6d.
‘ T O MEET T H E D A Y’th rough th e
Christ ian Y ear be ing a T extg
of S cripture , with an O riginal Medi tation and
a Short S elect ion in Verse for EveryD ay. Crown 8vo . , 4s. 6d.
D e L a S au ssay e .— A MANUAL OF
THE ' S C IENCE OF R EL IGION . By Prof.CHANTEPIE DE LA SAUSSAYE . T rans
lated by M rs. COLYER FERGUSSON (neeM A X MULLER). Crown 8vo . . 1 2s. 6d.
K al i sch .— Works by M . M . K AL ISCH ,
B IBLE S TUD IES. Part I. T he Pro
phecies of Balaam. 8vo . , 1os. 64 . PartII. T h e Book of Jonah . 8vo . , 105 . 6d.
COMMENTARY ON T H E OLD TESTAMENTwith a new T ranslat ion . V ol . I .
Genesis. 8vo . , 1 8s. Or adapted for th e
Genera l Reader. 1 z s. V o l. II. Exodus.
15s. O r adapted for the Genera lR eader. 1 2 5 . V ol. I I I . Levit icus, PartI. 1ss. O r adapted for the GeneralReader.
‘
8s. V ol . IV . Levit icus, PartII. 15s. Or adapted for th e GeneralReader. 8s.
M ar t in eau .—W orks by JAMES MAR
T IN E A U , D .D . , LL .D .
HOURS OF THOUGHT ON SACREDTH INGS . T wo Vo lumes Of S ermons.
Crown 8vo . , 7s . 6d.
ENDEAVOURS AFTER T H E CHR IST IANLIFE . Discourses. Cr. 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
T H E SEAT OF A UTHOR ITY IN R EL IG ION .
8vo . , 143 .
ESSAYS,R EV IEWS , A N D A DDRESSES.
Vols. Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d. each .
I. Personal ; Po l it ical .II. Ecclesiast ical ; H istorical .I I I . T h eological ; Ph ilosoph ical .IV . A cadem ica l ; Rel igi ous
HOME PRAYERS , wi th T wo S ervices forPublic Worsh ip . Crown 8vo . 3 s. 6d.
DONALD,LL .D .
UNSPOKEN S ERMONS . T hree Series.
Crown 8vo . , 3s. 6d. each .
T H E MIRACLES OF OUR LORD . Crown8vo . , 3 s . 6d
.
A BOOK OF STR IFE , IN T H E FORM OF
T H E D IARY OF A N OLD SOUL : Poems1 8mo . , 6s.
M ax M ul len—Works‘
by F . M A X
MULLER .
H IBBERT LECTURES ON T H E OR IG INA N D GROWTH OF R EL IGION , as i llustra ted by th e R eligious of Ind ia .
Crown 8vo . , 7s. 6d.
INTRODUCT ION T O T H E S C IENCE OF
R EL IG ION Fou r Lec tures del ivered at
th e Royal Inst i tution. Cr. 8vo . , 3s. 6d.
NATURAL R EL IG ION . T h e Gi ffordLectures , del ivered before the Uni
versi ty of Glasgow in 1 888 . Cr. 8vo .,
103 . 6d.
PHYS ICAL R EL IG ION. T he G iffordLec tures, delivered before the Uni
versi ty of Glasgow in 1 890 . Cr. 8vo .
,
1 0s. 6d.
AN THROPOLOG ICAL R EL IG ION . T h eGifford Lectures , del ivered before th e
Un iversity Of Glasgow in 189 1 . Cr.
8vo . , 105 . 6d.
THEOSOPHY OR PSYCHOLOGICAL R EL IG ION . T he G ifford Lectures , del iveredbefore th eUn iversityofGlasgow in1892 .
Cr. 8vo . ,10s. 6d.
THREE LECTURES ON T H E VEDANTAPH ILOSOPHY , del ivered at the RoyalInst itut ion in March , 1 894. 8vo . , 5s.
S ch ol len — A CHAPTER O F CHURCHH ISTORY FROM SOUTH GERMANY : be ing
“
Passages from th e Life Of Johann Evangelist Georg Lu tz , formerly Parish Priestand Dean in Oberroth , Bavaria . By L .
W . SCHOLLER . T ranslated from th e
German-by W . WALL IS . Crown 8 y o .
,
3s. 6d.
SUPER NA TURA L R ELIG ION an
Inqu iry into the Real ity of Divine Revelat ion. 3 vo ls. 8vo . , 3 6s.
R EPLY (A )T O D R . LIGHTFOOT’S ESSAYS .By th e A fi thor Of
‘
Supernatural R eligion 8vo . , 6s.
T H E GOSPEL ACCORD ING T O S T : PETERa S tudy. By the A u thor of ‘ Super
'
natura l Rel igion ’. 8vo. , 6s.
A B E R D E E N U N IV E R S IT Y PR E S S .